Polyworks Scanning Package

©2014-2018 InnovMetric Software Inc. All rights reserved.
PolyWorks® is a registered trademark

of InnovMetric Software Inc. InnovMetric, PolyWorks|Inspector, PolyWorks|Modeler,
PolyWorks|Talisman, PolyWorks|Reviewer, IMAlign, IMMerge, and "The Universal 3D Metrology
Software Platform" are trademarks of InnovMetric Software Inc. SmartGD&T is a trademark of
Multi Metrics Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
This manual, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used or
copied only in accordance with the terms of such license. The content of this document is
furnished for informational use only, and is subject to change without notice. InnovMetric
Software Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear
in this document.
Except as permitted by such license, reproduction in whole or in part in any way without written
permission from InnovMetric Software is strictly prohibited.
Essentials for PolyWorks|Inspector Premium Package
Essentials – PolyWorks|Inspector™ Premium Package
PolyWorks® Metrology Suite 2018

[8/14/18] – TEC-0037-2018-EN-2.0
POLYWORKS|INSPECTOR PREMIUM PACKAGE
22 Introducing the Essentials
24 Introducing the Workspace Manager
24 Adding license keys
25 Introducing the workspace format
26 Starting the PolyWorks Metrology Suite modules
27 Setting essential project options
POLYWORKS|INSPECTOR™
30 The inspection workflow
31 Understanding the workflow
32 The probing workflow with a CAD model
35 The probing workflow without a CAD model
FUNDAMENTALS
39 The graphical user interface
40 Specifying the required plug-ins
40 Connecting to devices
41 Particularities when scanning
41 Connecting to a scanning device
43 The graphical user interface specific to probing
44 Particularities when probing
44 Connecting to a probing device
49 Using the Search tool
51 Moving objects in the 3D scene
52 An object-based approach
52 Objects and their elements
54 Selecting objects
55 Selecting elements
59 Selecting elements using the Brush tool
61 Selecting elements using the Freeform Contour tool
63 Selecting a single element
3
IMPORTING REFERENCE OBJECTS
65 Introducing Reference objects
65 Categories of Reference objects
65 Assigning tolerances
66 Controlling CAD model display colors
68 Using CAD models to describe nominal parts
68 Importing a CAD model
69 Importing Product and Manufacturing Information (PMI) with
the CAD model
71 Using polygonal models to describe nominal parts
71 Converting a polygonal Data object to a Reference object
72 Assigning tolerances to Reference objects
72 Assigning tolerances to the entire Reference object
73 Assigning tolerances to specific surfaces
ACQUIRING DATA OBJECTS

75 Introducing Data objects
75 Categories of Data objects
76 Introducing surface and boundary Data acquisition
76 Data acquisition by scanning
76 Scan types
78 Using a clipping plane
78 Probe
79 From Plane
80 Scanning parameters
81 Data acquisition by probing
82 Acquiring surface and boundary Data objects
82 Scanning a part using a point cloud digitizer plug-in
82 Meshing point cloud data in real time while scanning
84 Analyzing the quality of the digitized polygonal model using
metrics
85 High scanner-to-surface-normal angle
86 Low scan density for mesh curvature
87 High noise level
87 Detect misaligned scan passes
88 Enhancing the quality of the mesh
89 Scanning surfaces of a part to obtain a raw point cloud Data
object
4
93 Scanning surfaces and boundaries of thin parts
96 Scanning sharp edges of thin parts
99 Guidance while scanning features
103 Probing a part using a probing device plug-in
103 Using the probing device to collect surface points
105 Using the probing device to collect boundary points
107 Importing surface and boundary point cloud Data objects
107 Importing surface Data objects
107 Importing IMAlign projects
108 Meshing an IMAlign project
109 Importing surface Data objects from files
111 Importing boundary Data objects
113 Importing polygonal models
114 Editing Data objects
114 Cleaning scan data
114 Removing data points interactively
115 Removing data points using a CAD model
116 Recovering deleted data points
117 Purging deleted data points
118 Adding data to a scanned Data object
119 Splitting a Data object into two objects
ALIGNING DATA OBJECTS TO REFERENCE OBJECTS

121 Introducing alignments
121 Alignment tools
124 Introducing data alignments
124 Activating a data alignment
126 Aligning using object surfaces
126 Best-fitting Data objects to Reference objects using an automatic
prealignment
128 Best-fitting Data objects to Reference objects using a manual
prealignment
131 Aligning by probing surface points
133 Best-fitting measurement objects
136 Understanding the Best-Fit Measurement Objects - Setup and
Results pane
137 Editing the alignment parameters
138 Changing the objects used for the alignment
5
140 Changing the pairing of feature components
141 Aligning with features
142 Aligning using a plane-axis-point approach
144 Aligning using perpendicular planes
146 Aligning with reference targets
146 Introducing reference targets
148 Creating reference target points
148 Creating surface reference target points
149 Creating feature reference target points
151 Measuring reference targets
153 Aligning using reference targets
153 Align using surface and feature reference targets
154 Align using surface and feature reference targets by probing
157 Aligning with Datum Reference Frames
157 Align using a Datum Reference Frame
159 Align a Datum Reference Frame by probing
161 Aligning surface Data objects to each other using surface information
161 Align Data objects to Data objects one at a time
164 Globally optimizing the alignments of all Data objects
Coordinate systems
167 Introducing coordinate systems
167 In the 3D scene
167 Using a new coordinate system
168 Understanding the coordinates of a point
169 Creating and activating coordinate systems
MEASURING DIMENSIONS AND DEVIATIONS

173 Introducing measurement objects in PolyWorks|Inspector
173 Measurement objects
173 Measured status icon
174 Automatic project update
Data color maps

176 Measuring deviations using data color maps
176 Data color map types
177 Understanding key parameters
6
179 Measuring deviations from surfaces
181 Measuring deviations from boundaries
183 Measuring deviations from feature primitives
185 Measuring the thickness of a part
187 Measuring the clearance between parts
189 Changing the color map display
191 Displaying data point deviations on a data color map
Features
194 Defining part geometry using features
194 Feature types
195 Feature primitives
195 The feature creation methodology
196 The feature creation dialog box
196 Key feature creation parameters
198 Creation methods explained
203 Feature dependencies
204 Creating features on cross-sections for 2D inspection
205 Duplicating cross-section features in 3D
207 Analyzing measured point deviations
208 Feature measured point deviation display options
210 Creating point features
210 Creating nominal point primitives
210 Numerically
211 Obtaining measured point primitives
211 Probe
211 Anchor
213 Constructing point features
213 From Objects
214 From Intersection
215 These methods generate dependent point features, which
means that if something affects the source objects, it affects the
dependent point feature as well. For example, if the source
object becomes measured, the dependent point feature
becomes measured as well.
215 Creating point features on cross-sections
215 Creating nominal cross-section point primitives
216 Extracting measured cross-section point primitives
216 Numerically
216 Anchor
7
217 Constructing cross-section point features
218 From Objects and From Intersection
219 Creating line features
219 Creating nominal line primitives
219 Numerically
220 Anchor
221 Obtaining measured line primitives
221 Probe
224 Constructing line features
224 From Objects
226 Creating line features on cross-sections
226 Creating nominal cross-section line primitives
226 Pick on CAD Model
227 Numerically
227 Anchor
228 Extracting measured cross-section line primitives
229 Constructing cross-section line features
231 Creating plane features
231 Creating nominal plane primitives
232 Numerically
232 Anchor
233 Obtaining measured plane primitives
233 Extract
234 Probe
236 Fit
237 Extract from Polygonal Models
239 Constructing plane features
239 From Objects
241 Creating circle features
241 Creating nominal circle primitives
242 Numerically
242 Anchor
243 Obtaining measured circle primitives
243 Extract
244 Probe
246 Fit
248 Constructing circle features
8
249 From Objects
251 Creating circle features on cross-sections
251 Creating nominal cross-section circle primitives
252 Numerically
252 Anchor
253 Extracting measured cross-section circle primitives
253 Constructing cross-section circle features
256 Creating arc features
256 Creating nominal arc primitives
257 Numerically
257 Anchor
259 Obtaining measured arc primitives
260 Creating slot features
260 Creating nominal slot primitives
261 Numerically
261 Anchor
262 Obtaining measured slot primitives
262 Extract
263 Probe
265 Fit
268 Creating slot features on cross-sections
268 Creating nominal cross-section slot primitives
269 Numerically
269 Anchor
270 Extracting measured cross-section slot primitives
271 Creating rectangle features
271 Creating nominal rectangle primitives
272 Numerically
273 Anchor
274 Obtaining measured rectangle primitives
274 Extract
275 Probe
278 Fit
280 Creating polygon features
9
280 Creating nominal polygon primitives
281 Numerically
281 Anchor
282 Obtaining measured polygon primitives
282 Extract
283 Probe
287 Fit
289 Creating ellipse features
289 Creating nominal ellipse primitives
290 Numerically
290 Anchor
291 Obtaining measured ellipse primitives
291 Extract
292 Probe
295 Fit
297 Creating cylinder features
297 Creating nominal cylinder primitives
298 Numerically
298 Anchor
299 Obtaining measured cylinder primitives
299 Extract
300 Probe
302 Fit
304 Extract from polygonal models
306 Creating cone features
306 Creating nominal cone primitives
307 Numerically
307 Anchor
308 Obtaining measured cone primitives
308 Extract
309 Probe
311 Fit
312 Extract from polygonal model
314 Creating sphere features
314 Creating nominal sphere primitives
315 Numerically
10
315 Anchor
316 Obtaining measured sphere primitives
316 Extract
317 Probe
319 Fit
321 Extract from Polygonal Models
323 Creating surface features
323 Creating the nominal component of surface features
324 Obtaining the measured component of a surface feature
324 Extract
325 Probe – when aligned to a CAD model
326 Probe – without being aligned to a CAD model
331 Probe existing surface comparison points
333 Probe new surface comparison points
335 From data points
337 Creating slab features
339 Creating polyline features
339 Creating nominal polyline primitives
341 Obtaining measured polyline primitives
341 Probe
342 From Data Error Contours
343 From Tracking
345 Constructing polyline features
347 Creating pattern features
349 Creating distance features
350 Creating distance features on cross-sections
353 Creating angle features
354 Creating angle features on cross-sections
357 Editing feature primitives
357 Selecting data points of measured primitives
358 Editing the measured points of extracted feature primitives
359 Editing the measured points of probed feature primitives
362 Adding points to a probed feature
363 Setting measured feature boundaries using the nominal
component
364 Exporting feature primitives
Cross-sections
366 Inspecting 2D part profiles with cross-sections
366 Introducing cross-sections
11
366 Types of cross-sections
367 Measurement zone
367 Measurement methods
367 Display options
369 Creating standard cross-sections
369 Getting the nominal geometry
370 Along Standard Axis
371 Along Curve
373 Radial
374 Anchor
376 Measuring the geometry on the part
376 Extract the geometry
377 Probe the geometry
380 Creating offset cross-sections
382 Anchor
384 Extracting the geometry on the part
Comparison points
386 Measuring specific locations on a part using comparison points
386 Introducing comparison points
386 Types of comparison points
387 Comparison point creation and measurement methods
387 Understanding key parameters
388 Display options
390 Creating surface comparison points to inspect the surface of a part
391 Anchor
391 Numerically
392 Sample using Grid
392 From Text File
397 Creating trimmed edge comparison points to inspect sharp edges of
a part
398 Anchor
399 Sample Reference Curve
12
405 Creating hemmed edge comparison points to inspect the hemmed
edges of a sheet metal part
406 Anchor
407 Sample Reference Curve
Gauges
414 Measuring part dimensions with gauges
415 Display options
416 Measuring object dimensions with calipers
416 Introducing calipers
416 Caliper types
417 Axis types
417 Caliper tip directions
418 Display options
418 Creation methodology
419 Creating standard calipers to measure distances on objects
420 Anchor
421 Numerically
422 From Text File
424 Extracting the geometry of the part
426 Creating cross-section calipers to measure distances on cross-
sections
427 Anchor
428 Numerically
429 From Text File
433 Measuring object radii with profile gauges
433 Introducing profile gauges
433 Profile gauge families
434 Profile gauge types
434 Visualizing type usage
13
434 Creation methods
435 Display options
436 Creating profile gauges
437 Along Curve
443 Measuring flush and gap with flush & gap gauges
443 Introducing flush & gap gauges
443 Flush & gap gauge families
443 Flush & gap gauge types
444 Visualizing type usage
445 Display options
446 Typical flush and gap analysis
447 Creating flush & gap gauges
448 Along Curve
450 From Text File
456 Measuring airfoil geometry with airfoil gauges
456 Introducing airfoil gauges
456 Airfoil gauge families
457 Airfoil edges
458 Display options
459 Typical airfoil analysis
460 Creating airfoil gauges
462 From Planes
14
Additional tools
468 Measuring displacement during real-time assembly
470 Taking basic measurements interactively
472 Adding quantitative or visual checks
472 Creating custom measurement objects
472 Anchor
473 Numerically
474 Defining the nominal component for the numerical type
474 Defining the measured component
475 Numerical type
475 Qualitative type
477 Measuring when away from the workstation
477 Connecting to Talisman
478 Creating level planes
479 Orienting to gravity
Geometry controls
481 Controlling measurements using geometry controls
482 The Geometry Controls pane
483 The contextual toolbar
485 Using the Geometry Controls
485 Adding and removing controls
486 Editing control tolerances
487 Using control templates
487 Saving a control template
488 Setting controls using a template
489 Managing control templates
489 Managing existing templates
490 Creating and editing a user control template
491 Controlling features
491 Adding dimensional controls
493 Adding and encoding GD&T controls
495 Available GD&T controls by feature type
496 Defining datum features
497 Defining datum targets
498 Defining composite datums
15
499 Creating features from measurement envelopes
500 Controlling cross-sections
501 Controlling comparison points
502 Controlling calipers
503 Controlling profile gauges
505 Controlling flush & gap gauges
506 Controlling airfoil gauges
REPORTING MEASUREMENT RESULTS

509 Annotations
509 Annotation overview
510 The Annotation mini toolbar
511 Repositioning annotations in the 3D scene
511 Interactively
512 Automatically
513 The Annotation Display Options toolbar
515 Editing an object annotation
515 Setting object annotation content
515 From a Template
516 Manually
517 Modifying the appearance of annotations
518 Reviewing measurement results using the
Control Reviewer
518 The Control Reviewer pane
520 The contextual toolbar
522 Using the Control Reviewer
522 Reviewing controls
522 Filtering controls using the Controls list
523 Filtering controls using filters
523 String-based filter
523 Multiple-selection based filter
524 Sorting controls
525 Introducing control views
525 Creating control views from selected controls
527 Editing control views
528 Displaying controls in the 3D scene
528 From a control view
529 From the list of controls
529 Center on All Controls
16
529 Center on Selected Controls
531 Generating snapshots and report tables from control views
533 Viewing measurement results using the object navigator
534 Reviewing feature measurement results
534 Feature dimension results
535 Feature GD&T controls
537 Reviewing cross-section measurement results
539 Reviewing profile gauge measurement results
541 Reviewing flush & gap gauge measurement results
543 Reviewing airfoil gauge measurement results
545 Reporting
546 Working with report tables
546 Creating report tables
548 Setting report table contents using a template
549 Editing report table contents manually
552 Saving a table template
553 Managing table templates
556 Editing the report table format
556 Edit the format of a single report table
556 Specify the formatting options of all new report tables
557 Working with report snapshots
557 Creating report snapshots
558 Editing a report snapshot
560 Working with formatted reports
561 Creating formatted reports
562 Editing formatted reports
562 Move or resize report items in the formatted report
563 Add and edit a text field in the report
564 Add and edit a graphical shape in the formatted report
564 Add a fixed image to the formatted report
565 Add, reorder, or remove pages from the formatted report
566 Generate a PDF file from a formatted report
567 Exporting report items
INSPECTING MULTIPLE PIECES

569 Repeating an inspection on multiple pieces
570 Working with multiple pieces
571 Creating a new piece template
572 Inspecting a new piece using Play Inspection
17
575 Customizing guiding instructions
577 Guided feature probing using measurement points
578 The Measurement Points pane
580 Configuring the guided point acquisition mode
582 Defining measurement points from the nominal component
582 Setting the parameters for line features
583 Setting the parameters for plane features
583 Along Boundary
584 Grid
585 Setting the parameters for circle features
587 Setting the parameters for slot features
589 Setting the parameters for rectangle features
591 Setting the parameters for polygon features
593 Setting the parameters for ellipse features
595 Setting the parameters for cylinder features
596 Setting the parameters for cone features
597 Setting the parameters for sphere features
599 Setting the parameters for polyline features
600 Defining custom measurement points
600 Defining measurement points from probed data points
601 Defining measurement points by anchoring
603 Editing and deleting measurement points
603 Editing measurement points numerically
604 Editing measurement points interactively
605 Editing arcs and sides of measurements points
605 Deleting selected measurement points
605 Deleting measurement points interactively
606 Probing features using measurement points
608 Using measurement points with features probed in multiple device
positions
610 Introducing the Sequence Editor
610 The Sequence Editor pane
616 Using the Sequence Editor
616 Creating a measurement sequence from recorded actions
616 From the autogenerated sequence
617 From recorded actions
619 Customizing a measurement sequence
619 Modifying the order of sequence steps
620 Adding sequence steps
620 Choosing steps from the Insert menu
18
621 Dragging objects from the Tree View
622 Inserting macro script steps
622 Editing sequence steps
623 Defining conditional blocks
625 Evaluating pieces using Statistical Process Control
625 Analyze part dimensions for repeatability using Object Control SPC
627 Sample size
627 Understanding SPC results
630 Analyze part shape for repeatability using Surface Data SPC
WORKING WITH MULTIPLE DEVICE POSITIONS

633 Working with multiple device positions
634 The basic acquisition workflow with multiple device positions using
targets
636 Moving the device or the part by probing targets
638 Bundle adjustment
640 Device position uncertainty
643 The basic acquisition workflow with multiple device positions using
surface information
645 Moving the device or the part using a custom alignment
647 Unifying polygonal Data objects
USING THE OFFLINE SIMULATION MODE

650 Introducing the Offline Simulation mode
650 Activating/deactivating the Offline Simulation mode
651 The workflow when performing an inspection using simulated scanned
data
654 Particularities when acquiring simulated scanned data
654 Scanning options
656 The workflow when performing an inspection using simulated probed
data
659 Simulating multiple device positions
660 Creating a nominal project
APPENDIX
662 Automatic project update
662 Troubleshooting the automatic project update
19
663 Operations that trigger an automatic project update
664 Setting and saving the user configuration
665 Saving a compressed copy of a project
666 PolyWorks keyboard shortcuts
669 Getting help
669 Getting help through the software interface
670 Getting help outside of the software interface
670 The website
670 The Technical Support Zone (TSZ)
670 For direct assistance
20
PREMIUM PACKAGE
PolyWorks|Inspector Premium Package
PolyWorks|Inspector is a powerful
industrial 3D metrology software
solution that uses noncontact point
cloud digitizers and single-point
contact-based probing devices to
acquire and control tool and part
dimensions, diagnose and prevent
manufacturing and assembly issues,
guide assembly building through real-
time measurements, and oversee the
quality of assembled products.
GETTING STARTED
Introducing the Essentials

About
The Essentials guide is intended to be a companion for new users post-training and
throughout their first year of using the PolyWorks Metrology Suite.
Approach
The Essentials content is presented following a workflow-based approach. The document is
divided into sections according to specific workflow steps.
Each section is then organized using a tool-based approach, where each tool pertaining to the
subject is documented following the established presentation layout (recipe).
Generally, the Essentials has been documented using the default configuration and visual
layout with the exception of the background color of the 3D scene and the font size for certain
annotations. Also, in most cases, only the basic parameters are described.
Document conventions
Navigation through the sections
• As mentioned previously, this document has been designed according to the inspection
workflow recommended in the PolyWorks Metrology Suite (see The inspection workflow on
page 30). The structure of the document is clearly identified in the header of each page
using the icon and description corresponding to the workflow step.
• The Table of contents, as well as the first page of each section on measurement objects
(data color maps, features, comparison points, cross-sections, and gauges), offer
hyperlinks to the listed subjects.
A menu-based approach
• In the PolyWorks Metrology Suite, most of the functionalities offered on the menus are
also available through toolbars. In this document, the menu paths are documented in the
procedure. The corresponding toolbar buttons are shown to the right, as shown in the
example below.
1. Choose Align > Feature-Based > Plane, Axis,

Center Point.
Key parameters
• Key parameters, used for the creation of measurement objects, are explained in the
introduction of the section pertaining to the object type, to avoid redundancy. For
example, when creating a feature, it is specified to enter a maximum distance. For
information on this parameter, see the introduction to features.
22
GETTING STARTED
Text formatting
The following text formatting conventions are used throughout the Essentials:
Objective and Required:

For each procedure, the objective is stated and the requirements are listed.
Sections:
Each procedure is organized using the following sections:
• Steps: Present the steps to follow for each tool.

• Results: Present the results in the Tree View (to the left) and the 3D scene (to the right).
For simplification purposes, the in-tolerance status of measurement objects is only
shown in Tree View images when relevant.
• Notes: Present useful additional information on the current tool.
• Tips: Present hints on how to use the current tool in a specific context.
Graphical user interface elements:

• Menu paths are presented in gray and italics, and chevrons are used to show the
sequence.
For example: Align > Best-Fit Data Objects > Data to Reference Objects
• Dialog boxes are capitalized.
For example: The Best-Fit Data to Reference Objects dialog box opens.
• Parameters are presented in bold.
For example: In the Method list, click Fit to Reference Object Surfaces.
23
GETTING STARTED
Introducing the Workspace Manager

When starting the PolyWorks Metrology Suite, the Workspace Manager interface displays.
The Workspace Manager manages a PolyWorks process from beginning to end. This includes
the following tasks:
• Adding software license keys.

• Managing all the incoming data files and the results produced by the PolyWorks
Metrology Suite modules. As work progresses, files and projects are saved to a
container called a “workspace”.
• Offering simple navigation between modules.
Adding license keys

License keys are required to use the PolyWorks Metrology Suite. There are two
types of licenses: node-locked or floating. Both types are managed through the
PolyWorks Metrology Suite License Manager, which is available by choosing Tools >
PolyWorks License Manager in the Workspace Manager.
For information on how to add license keys, choose Help > Reference Guides > License Keys.
24
GETTING STARTED
Introducing the workspace format

The Workspace Manager uses a workspace format which is designed to handle all the results
of a point cloud processing project.
Here is a view of a workspace in the When a workspace is saved, it creates one

Workspace Manager. XML file with the .pwk file and one folder with
the _Files suffix. Both file and folder include
the workspace name. The .pwk file is only an
index – the folder contains all the data.
The .pwk file and associated _Files folder must remain in the same folder.
25
GETTING STARTED
Starting the PolyWorks Metrology Suite modules

The Workspace Manager provides direct access to the PolyWorks Metrology Suite modules.
The main modules are accessible through the Main Modules toolbar. Click a module button to
launch the corresponding module. The present document covers the PolyWorks|Inspector
module.
PolyWorks|Inspector
This module is a software tool that allows performing data alignments to

Reference objects, measuring the deviations of Data point clouds and
polygonal models to Reference surfaces, measuring the dimensions of
specific features, and generating comparison and verification reports. Data
acquisition can be performed in real time by probing and scanning the part.
PolyWorks|Inspector Probing
Accessible through the down arrow, this module is a software tool that allows
performing data alignments to Reference objects, measuring the dimensions
of specific features, and generating comparison and verification reports. Data
acquisition can be performed in real time by probing the part.
PolyWorks|Modeler
This module offers a comprehensive set of advanced editing tools for

polygonal models where NURBS patches can be created to conceive NURBS
models or repair polygonal models. PolyWorks|Modeler also allows creating
parametric sketches, which can be imported into CAD modeling software.
The complete list of modules is offered in Tools and in Tools > Utility Modules:
PolyWorks|Reviewer
This module allows viewing inspection projects and polygonal models.
IMAlign
This module is a software tool that accepts point clouds from all digitizers,
and permits capturing point clouds in real time, and allows aligning these
point clouds using the shape of the points clouds and, if desired, reference
points.
IMMerge
This module allows automatically merging a set of aligned 3D scans of an

object into a high-resolution polygonal model.
26
GETTING STARTED
Setting essential project options

Certain default values and parameters used in the PolyWorks Metrology Suite can be set in
the Workspace Manager. The following procedure presents the options that are most
frequently used. For information on the other options, see the PolyWorks Reference Guide
available from the Help menu.
Objective: Set the units of length, the language, the plug-in(s) available in the module, and
enable the Talisman functionality.
Required: The Workspace Manager is open.
Steps
To set project options, choose Tools > Options.

The Workspace Manager Options dialog box
opens.
Note that changes made to the options do not affect an open module; they apply the next time the
module is launched.
Units of length
On the General page:
1. Select the units of length that will be used by
default for the PolyWorks Metrology Suite
modules.
2. Click Apply.
Regardless of what units of length are set in the
Workspace Manager options, it is always possible
to change the units within a module after opening
it.
Language
On the Display page:
1. Select the language for the user interface.
2. Click Apply.
27
GETTING STARTED
Plug-ins
The PolyWorks Metrology Suite offers a wide choice of plug-ins that allow the capture of 3D
coordinate points by way of line scanning and probing devices.
To use one or more plug-ins, the appropriate option must be selected. Only selected plug-ins
will be loaded when PolyWorks|Inspector is launched.
On the Plug-ins page:

1. Select one or more plug-ins.
2. Click Apply.
For information on a plug-in, see the custom document specific to this plug-in, which is available
from the Help menu of the application.
Talisman functionality
PolyWorks|Talisman™ is a remote control application developed to allow controlling a
probing/scanning session using a mobile device (such as Apple® iPod touch®, iPhone®, and
iPad™ as well as Android mobile devices running Android 4.1 or higher).
To use the Talisman functionality, the appropriate option must be selected.
On the Talisman page:

1. Select PolyWorks server for Talisman.
2. The change applies to all open modules.
For information on PolyWorks|Talisman, see the
Talisman Android or Apple Mobile Device User
Guides and the Talisman Network Security and
Setup Guide, which are available from the Help >
Reference Guides > PolyWorks|Talisman menu
of the application.
3. Click Apply.
Notes
If the Bonjour™ networking technology, a trademark of Apple Inc., is not installed on the
workstation, the user will be prompted to install it.
28
PolyWorks|Inspector
The PolyWorks|Inspector module is a
software tool that allows measuring
the deviations of Data objects to
Reference surfaces, measuring the
dimensions of specific features, and
generating comparison and
verification reports.
PolyWorks|Inspector offers an
object-oriented approach to
comparison and verification tasks. A
global object called the
PolyWorks|Inspector project
encloses all other objects. Inspection
projects describe the list of objects
imported and created within
PolyWorks|Inspector, and preserve
editing operations performed by
users. Within a
PolyWorks|Inspector project,
several categories of objects
can be generated.
GETTING STARTED
The inspection workflow

A basic inspection workflow is illustrated below.
Import
Reference object
Acquire
Data object
Align
Data object
to Reference object
Measure
dimensions and
deviations
Report
measurement results
30
GETTING STARTED
Understanding the workflow
Import Reference object

Import the nominal information of the part
(CAD model) into the inspection project.
Acquire Data object

Acquire or import the data of the actual part
to inspect, as a point cloud or a polygonal
model.
Align Data object to Reference

object
Move the data close to the CAD model. This
allows measuring deviations of the Data
object to the Reference object, and to take
advantage of powerful tools such as
measurement extraction and visual
guidance.
Measure dimensions and

deviations
Perform the inspection of the part. Measure
the deviations between the part and the
nominal, in form, dimension, and position.
Report measurement results

Report the inspection measurement results
using:
• Control views in the Control Reviewer;
• Tables and snapshots in formatted
reports.
31
GETTING STARTED
The probing workflow with a CAD model

Here is the basic inspection workflow when using only a probing device to perform the
inspection and a CAD model of the inspected part is available.
Import
Reference object
Align part
to Reference object
Measure
dimensions and
deviations
Report
measurement results
32
GETTING STARTED

Align part to Reference object
Prealign part to Reference object

Prealign the part to the CAD model to take
advantage of the visual guidance tools.
Refine part alignment to Reference

object
Refine the part alignment to the CAD model
using feature-based alignments, reference
targets, or datum reference frames.

deviations
Perform the inspection of the part by
probing point clouds and/or measurement
objects such as features and comparison
points.
33
GETTING STARTED

using:
reports.
34
GETTING STARTED
The probing workflow without a CAD model

Here is the basic inspection workflow when using only a probing device to perform the
inspection and no CAD model of the inspected part is available.
Acquire
part data
by probing
Position part
Measure
dimensions and
deviations
Report
measurement results
35
GETTING STARTED
Acquire part data by probing

Acquire part data by probing point clouds
and/or measurement objects such as
features and comparison points on the
actual part.
Position part
Align part to standard axes
Align the probed data points to standard
axes (X, Y, Z) to facilitate reporting. Note that
this step is optional.
OR
Create coordinate systems

Create a coordinate system using the probed
features to orient and locate the probed data
points. This facilitates reporting. Note that
this step is optional.

deviations
Complete the part measurement. Enter
object control nominal values and
tolerances, if they are known, into the
Geometry Controls pane.
36
GETTING STARTED

using:
reports.
37
Fundamentals
FUNDAMENTALS
The graphical user interface

The user interface offers a menu bar, toolbars, a status bar, and several main dockable panes.
3 4 5
1
2
8 9 10
1 Menu bar: Access to all PolyWorks|Inspector functionalities.

Quick access to common operations (e.g., Open, Save, and
2 Standard toolbar:
Undo).
3 Main Objects toolbar: Quick access to the most common tools for an inspection.
Used to enter a query and search through Tree View objects or
4 Search box:
menu items.
Multipiece Inspection
5 Quick access to the various multipiece tools.
toolbar:
6 Tree View: Pane where all the objects of the project are stored.
7 3D Scene: 3D rendering window where objects are displayed.
Provides information and allows changing units, layers, and the

8 Status bar:
automatic update status.
9 Selection toolbar: Used to select objects or elements in the project.
Used to navigate in the 3D scene, to change the view, and to

10 3D Scene toolbar:
control the visibility and display of objects.
39
FUNDAMENTALS
Specifying the required plug-ins

Measurement devices can be used for data acquisition in the PolyWorks Metrology Suite. To
do so, the required plug-ins must be specified.
The plug-ins that will be made available in PolyWorks|Inspector depend on the settings in the
Workspace Manager Options. These options are displayed the first time that the
PolyWorks Metrology Suite is opened. They are also available at any time by following these
steps:
1. In the Workspace Manager, choose Tools >

Options. The Workspace Manager Options
dialog box opens.
2. On the Plug-ins page, select the plug-ins that
correspond to the scanning or probing device
that will be used.
3. Click Apply.
4. Start PolyWorks|Inspector.
The options set on the Plug-ins page are automatically saved and are used at the next module
startup.
Connecting to devices
To use a scanning or a probing plug-in, a connection must first be established with the device.
To do so, use the Devices toolbar, which is displayed in the lower left-hand corner of
PolyWorks|Inspector. It offers the following standard functionalities:
Connect to/Disconnect from Device
Connects to or disconnects from the current probing device.
Scan
Opens the Scan dialog box.
Offline Simulation Mode
Activates or deactivates a simulation mode, where operations

can be performed without having to be physically connected to a
device.
40
FUNDAMENTALS
Particularities when scanning

An additional toolbar is offered when scanning. The first step consists in specifying the
appropriate plug-in, then connecting to the device.
Connecting to a scanning device

Proceed as follows to establish a connection with the device:
1. Choose Tools > Plug-ins.

2. Choose a device.
Alternatively, click the arrow next to the Scan
button on the Devices toolbar. Choose the device
from the list, then click the Scan button.
The plug-in dialog box opens and, once the scan operation is launched, a scanning toolbar
appears in the 3D scene. The functions offered through this toolbar depend on the specified
parameters (real-time quality meshing enabled or not) while scanning.
It offers the following buttons:
Delete Last Scan Pass
Deletes the last scan passes of the current scanning session. Offered in both
cases, for scanning using real-time quality meshing or not.
Feature Scanning Guidance
Activates or deactivates feature scanning guidance.
When a clipping plane has been defined, the following button becomes available:
Clipping Plane
Activates or deactivates the use of the clipping plane when surface scanning
is performed.
The following buttons are only offered when real-time quality meshing is used:
Recover Last Deleted Elements
Recovers the last deleted elements of the current scanning session.
41
FUNDAMENTALS
High Scanner-to-Surface-Normal Angle
Activates or deactivates the High Scanner-to-Surface-Normal Angle quality

metric.
Low Scan Density for Mesh Curvature
Activates or deactivates the Low Scan Density for Mesh Curvature quality
metric.
High Noise Level
Activates or deactivates the High Noise Level quality metric.
For information about scanning plug-ins, including real-time quality meshing and quality
metrics, see Scanning a part using a point cloud digitizer plug-in on page 82.
42
FUNDAMENTALS
The graphical user interface specific to probing

When probing, the user interface offers different probing toolbars, probing status
information, and a Digital Readout.
1 2
3 4 5 6 7
1 Probing Status: Displays the progression in capturing points.
Displays real-time information about the position of the probe

2 Digital Readout:
and information related to the object being probed.
3 Devices toolbar: Offers items to connect to the probing device.
Probing Device Offers quick access to set probing device properties.

4
toolbar:
Probing Device Available for specific probing devices, such as laser trackers, to
5
Control toolbar: control the device.
Probing Control Offers items to control the probing session that is being
6
toolbar: performed.
Offers quick access to device-position-related operations such

Device Positions
7 as defining targets, moving the device, and managing device
toolbar: positions and targets.
43
FUNDAMENTALS
Particularities when probing

Additional toolbars are offered when probing. The first step consists in specifying the
appropriate plug-in, then connecting to the device. According to the selected device, one or
more toolbars are added to the user interface.
Connecting to a probing device

To use a probing plug-in, proceed as follows:
1. On the Devices toolbar (located in the lower

part of PolyWorks|Inspector), click the arrow
next to the Connect to Device/Disconnect
from Device button.
2. Choose the device from the drop-down list.
3. Click the Connect to Device/Disconnect from

Device button.
The button changes, as shown to the right.
Probing toolbars are displayed in the lower part of PolyWorks|Inspector. They contain tools
and settings to facilitate the probing session. The tools and settings offered depend on the
current device. In this section, only the most common functionalities are presented. For
information on a functionality specific to a device, see the Plug-in Guide of this device which is
located on the Help menu of the Workspace Manager or the PolyWorks|Inspector module.
Probing Device toolbar
For articulated arms, the Probing Device toolbar contains the following standard
functionalities:
Device Properties
Opens the property sheet of the current probing device.
Tip Diameter
6
Displays the current probe tip diameter.
Probing Mode
Sets the probing mode for the current probing device.
44
FUNDAMENTALS
Probing Options
Provides quick access to options typically located on the Measurement

Mode and Compensation Method pages of the PolyWorks|Inspector
Options dialog box.
For laser trackers, the Probing Device toolbar offers the following standard functionalities:
Device Properties
Opens the property sheet of the current probing device.
Reflector
Sets the reflector used by the current probing device.
Reflector Diameter
38.1
Displays the current reflector diameter or the Reflector
Normal/Tangent offset.
Probing Mode
Sets the probing mode for the current probing device
Probing Options
Provides quick access to options typically located on

the Measurement Mode and Compensation Method
pages of the PolyWorks|Inspector Options dialog box.
Temperature Stability Monitoring
Opens a dialog box used to control temperature

stability monitoring.
45
FUNDAMENTALS
Probing Device Control toolbar
For laser trackers, the Probing Device Control toolbar offers items to control the probing
device. The following standard functionalities are offered.
Go Home
Orders the current probing device to move to, or to target, a location called
"Home".
Go Front
Orders the current probing device to move to, or to target, its front.
Go to Object
Orders the current probing device to move to, or to target, the location of the
selected object.
Go to XYZ
Orders the current probing device to move to, or to target, the specified XYZ
coordinates.
Find Target
Orders the current probing device to find a nearby target.
Probing Device Utilities toolbar
Provides access to specific tracker functionalities.
Orient to Gravity
Measures the inclination of the current probing device in order to orient new
measurements to gravity for the active device position.
46
FUNDAMENTALS
Probing Control toolbar
The Probing Control toolbar offers items to control the probing session that is being
performed. It offers the following standard functionalities:
Undo Last Probed Point
Removes the last probed point of the current acquisition session.
Reprobe Object
Enables an interactive mode to reprobe the last probed object.
Depending on the connected device, two additional functionalities are offered:
Start or Stop Measurement
Starts or stops a measurement session.
End Probing and Process Probed Data
Ends the current acquisition session and attempts to create a new object
using the probed points.
47
FUNDAMENTALS
Shortcuts through the interface

Shortcuts to different functionalities are offered when right-clicking elements or areas of the
user interface.
48
FUNDAMENTALS
Using the Search tool

PolyWorks|Inspector offers a Search tool, used to
quickly find Tree View objects or menu items by entering
text in the appropriate field. It is available in the upper-
right corner of the interface.
Steps
1. Enter text in the Search field (partial terms can

also be entered).
The Search tool is not case-sensitive.
Results appear as soon as the first letter of the
search string is entered.
2. If needed, continue refining the search.

The list of results is displayed under the Search field. The results are organized within the
Tree View and Menus sections which can be collapsed or expanded.
The number of hits for each section is displayed

between parentheses. If a large number of
results are found, they are not all displayed. To
see them all, click Show all or the [...] symbol.
49
FUNDAMENTALS
3. Click the appropriate object or item in the list of search results.

Note the following:
• Right-clicking an object in the Tree View section displays the shortcut menu for the
object, making the operations related to that object easily accessible.
• Hovering the mouse over an item in the Menu section displays a short description of
the corresponding operation.
.
Results
• When clicking a search result for a Tree View object, the object is also selected in the Tree
View and, if applicable, it is centered in the 3D scene.
• When clicking a search result for a menu item, the corresponding operation is launched.
50
FUNDAMENTALS
Moving objects in the 3D scene

The position of objects can be modified in the 3D scene using the mouse. Rotations,
translations, and zoom operations are each mapped to a specific mouse button.
Mouse-based operations:
Rotation
To rotate about the X axis and the Y axis viewing axes, click and hold the left
mouse button in the 3D scene. To constrain rotations to a vertical or a
horizontal viewing axis, press and hold SHIFT before clicking.
Translation
To translate along the X axis and the Y axis, click and hold the middle mouse
button. Translations along the X axis or the Y axis are performed by moving the
mouse in the X or Y directions respectively, in the 3D scene.
Zoom
Translating along the Z axis is equivalent to a zoom operation. Click and hold
the right mouse button, then move the mouse forward and backward. When
the mouse is moved forward, a positive translation is performed on the 3D
object, and the scene moves nearer to the user. When the mouse is moved
backward, a negative translation is performed on the 3D object, and the scene
moves farther away from the user.
Zoom box
Zoom on part of an object by delimiting a rectangular area:
1. Press and hold SHIFT.
2. Middle-click to create a first rectangle corner.
3. Drag the pointer to the opposite rectangle corner.
4. Release the middle mouse button.
Rotation about the viewing axis
To rotate about the viewing axis, press and hold SHIFT, click and hold the right
mouse button, then move the mouse in the right or left direction.
Mouse Button Behavior menu button

Note that the same operation can be assigned to all mouse
buttons by selecting a corresponding button on the
Mouse Button Behavior menu button, available on the
3D Scene toolbar.
51
FUNDAMENTALS
An object-based approach
PolyWorks|Inspector offers an object-oriented approach to measurement and analysis tasks.
Inspection projects describe the list of objects imported and created within
PolyWorks|Inspector and they preserve editing operations performed by users. Several
categories of objects can be generated within an inspection project. They are described in the
subsections that follow.
Objects and their elements

Objects are items found in the Tree View, such as Data and Reference objects. They are made
up of elements, like data points in a point cloud, or surfaces in a CAD model. Both entire
objects and specific elements can be considered for analysis during inspection.
Module Objects Elements
point cloud data points

PolyWorks|Inspector polygonal model vertices
CAD model CAD surfaces
There are two interactive
selection tools, one for
objects and one for elements.
A point cloud contains data points.
A polygonal model contains triangle vertices.
A CAD model contains CAD surfaces.
52
FUNDAMENTALS
As shown below, the list of objects is available in the Tree View.
Reference object
Tools > Reference Objects
Data object
Tools > Data Objects
Data alignment
Align
Data color map

Measure > Deviations of Data Objects
Feature
Measure > Features
Cross-section
Measure > Cross-Sections
Comparison point
Measure > Comparison Points
Gauge
Measure > Gauges
Custom measurements
Measure > Custom Measurements
Interactive measurements
Measure > Interactive Measurements >
Basic
Reference target
Measure > Reference Targets
Coordinate system
Tools > Coordinate Systems
Report
Report
53
FUNDAMENTALS
Selecting objects
Objects can be selected in the Tree View or in the 3D scene by using
the Select Objects Interactively tool. Object selection is needed in
order to apply operations to specific objects.
Objective: Select an object interactively in the 3D scene.
Required: The project contains a Reference or a Data object.
Steps
1. Choose Select > Objects > Interactively.

Alternatively, press CTRL + SHIFT + SPACEBAR to
enable the object selection mode.
2. Pick objects in the 3D scene.

3. Press and hold CTRL to select additional
objects.
IMBlock.pqk
4. Press the Select Objects Interactively button

to exit the object selection mode.
Results
The selected object is highlighted in the

Tree View.
54
FUNDAMENTALS
Notes
• Hold CTRL + SHIFT + middle-click while

dragging to create a rectangular selection
zone. The objects within the zone are selected.
• The type of objects that can be selected can be

specified. Click the arrow next to the Select
Objects Interactively button. Enable or clear
the objects in the menu.
• Additional object selection tools are available on the Select > Objects menu, including
Select > Objects > All, Select > Objects > None, and Select > Objects > Invert.
Selecting elements
It is possible to select a single element or groups of elements,
either on the nearest surface or volumetrically (through the
dataset). Element selection is needed in order to apply
operations to specific elements.
The Select Elements dialog box used to select elements is

available through Select > Elements > Interactively.
55
FUNDAMENTALS
Selection tools
In the Select Elements dialog box, five selection tools are available:
Multiple
Different selection tools can be accessed depending on the mouse button and the
quick access key used:
• Brush: Left-click
• Freeform Contour: Middle-click + hold
• Polygonal Contour: Middle-click + CTRL key
To select a single element: Left-click + CTRL key.
Brush
Used to perform element selection in the 3D scene by dragging the mouse over the
object. Elements within the area defined by the brush tip are selected once the
mouse is released.
Freeform Contour
Used to perform element selection in the 3D scene by dragging the mouse over the
object and defining a free-form contour. Elements within the area defined by the
contour are selected.
Polygonal Contour
Used to perform element selection in the 3D scene by left-clicking to anchor a
polygonal outline until a polygonal contour has been formed. The contour is closed
by left-clicking near the end of the initial line or by simply right-clicking to add a
final point. Elements within the area defined by the contour are selected.
Single Element
Used to perform single element selection in the 3D scene by left-clicking the
element. The type of element selected depends on the object type.
Selection modes
In the Select Elements dialog box, three Selection Modes are available:
Select
Selects elements.
Deselect
Deselects elements. Hold the ALT key as a shortcut.
56
FUNDAMENTALS
Toggle
Inverts the element selection status. It can be used to select elements or deselect
elements that have already been selected.
Selection types
In the Select Elements dialog box, two Selection Types are available:
Surface
Element selection is performed on the visible surfaces of the object.
Volumetric
Element selection continues through the object, including elements behind the
visible surfaces.
Selectable faces
In the Select Elements dialog box, three Selectable Faces can be used to control which
elements are selected:
Front
Selects only elements that are facing up in the 3D scene.
Back
Selects only elements that are facing down in the 3D scene.
Front and Back

Selects elements regardless of orientation.
Global element selection

In the Select Elements dialog box, three buttons give quick access to the global element
selection operations that are available:
All
Selects all elements.
Invert
Inverts the selection of all elements.
57
FUNDAMENTALS
None
Deselects all elements.
Notes
Element selection operations are also available through the Select > Elements menu.
58
FUNDAMENTALS
Selecting elements using the Brush tool

Objective: Select multiple Reference or Data object elements with the brush tool.
Required: The project contains a Reference or Data object with selectable elements.
Steps
1. Choose Select > Elements > Interactively, or press

SPACEBAR to enable the interactive element
selection mode.
The Select Elements dialog box opens.
2. Select the Brush selection tool.
3. In the 3D scene, hold the left mouse button

while dragging the mouse over the object to
select all elements within the brush stroke, such
as:
• CAD model surfaces.
• Polygonal model vertices.
• Point cloud data points.
It is possible to switch to the Deselect mode by

holding the ALT key and performing the same
action.
4. Press ESC or SPACEBAR to exit the selection

mode and close the Select Elements dialog box.
59
FUNDAMENTALS
Results
The selected elements are highlighted in red in

the 3D scene.
Since the selection was performed using the

Surface selection type, none of the elements
behind the visible surfaces were selected.
Point clouds have no surface information, so the

selection type automatically changes to
Volumetric when it is detected that the selection
is being performed on point clouds.
Notes
• The Volumetric selection type continues

through the object, including elements
behind the visible surfaces.
• In the More section, it is possible to change

the shape of the brush tip to Square.
• The brush tip can be resized interactively in
the 3D scene by scrolling the mouse wheel.
60
FUNDAMENTALS
Selecting elements using the Freeform Contour tool

Objective: Select multiple Reference or Data object elements by defining a freeform contour.
Required: The project contains a Reference or Data object with selectable elements.
Steps

selection mode.
2. Select the Freeform Contour selection tool.
3. In the 3D scene, hold the left mouse button

while dragging the mouse over the object to
select elements such as:
• CAD surfaces.
• Polygonal model vertices.
• Point cloud data points.

It is possible to switch to the Deselect mode by
holding the ALT key and performing the same
action.
mode and to close the Select Elements dialog
box.
Results
The selected elements are highlighted in red in

the 3D scene.
61
FUNDAMENTALS
Since the selection was performed using the

Surface selection type, none of the elements
behind the visible surfaces were selected.
Point clouds have no surface information, so the

selection type changes to Volumetric
automatically when it is detected that the
selection is being performed on point clouds.
Notes
• To perform a selection with a polygonal

contour, select the Polygonal Contour
selection tool. Left-click to anchor corners
of the polygonal outline; to close the
contour, left-click near the end of the initial
line or simply right-click to add the last
point.
• The Volumetric selection type continues

through the object, including elements
behind the visible surfaces.
62
FUNDAMENTALS
Selecting a single element

Objective: Select a single element on a Reference or Data object.
Required: The project contains a Reference or Data object.
Steps

selection mode.
2. Select the Single Element selection tool.
3. In the 3D scene, left-click on:

• a CAD surface to select it.
• a polygonal model to select the nearest

vertex.
• a point cloud to select the nearest data

point.

mode and to close the Select Elements dialog
box.
Results
The selected surface, vertex, or data point is

highlighted in red in the 3D scene.
63
Importing
Reference objects
Introducing Reference objects

Reference objects are the nominal objects (typically a CAD model or a polygonal model) to
which the Data objects are measured.
Categories of Reference objects

There are two categories of Reference objects. The following table presents each category:
Icon Type Description
CAD Reference objects All imported CAD formats.
Polygonal models as well as IMAlign projects and

Polygonal Reference
planar grid/mesh point clouds that have been
objects
triangulated.
Once a Reference object is imported, it is displayed in the

Tree View under the Reference branch.
Assigning tolerances
Tolerances are automatically assigned to Reference objects. A tolerance is useful for obtaining
pass/fail inspection results. For example, when a data point is no farther from the surface
than a given tolerance value, the point “passes” the tolerance test. If the data point is farther
from the surface than the same tolerance value, the point “fails” the tolerance test. See
Assigning tolerances to Reference objects on page 72.
65
Controlling CAD model display colors

The color used to display CAD models can be controlled through the properties of the
CAD Reference object.
Three color display modes are offered: Object, By CAD Layer, By CAD Surface.
Objective: Change the color display mode of the CAD model.
Required: The project contains a CAD model with embedded surface color information
imported along with layers.
Steps
1. Select the CAD model in the Tree View.

2. Choose Edit > Object Properties.
3. On the Display tab, choose from the Color
mode list one of the following options:
Object
By CAD Layer
By CAD Surface
4. Click Apply.
Results
Object
The CAD Reference object color is displayed using
the defined color mode. The whole CAD Reference
object is the same color.
The CAD Reference object color can be changed from
its property sheet using the Color button.
66
By CAD Layer
the defined CAD layer colors.
If specific surfaces of the CAD Reference object are

associated to specific CAD layers, each surface is
colored depending on the color definition of its
associated CAD layer.
By CAD Surface
the defined CAD surface colors.
The surface color is defined in the CAD software and

imported automatically in PolyWorks|Inspector.
Notes
The default color mode can be set in the

PolyWorks|Inspector options and saved in the
user configuration.
1. Choose Tools > Options to access the
PolyWorks|Inspector options.
2. Open the Display > Reference/Data page.
3. Choose the Default CAD color mode.
4. Click Apply.
5. Choose Tools > Save User Configuration to save
the user configuration.
67
Using CAD models to describe nominal parts

It is common practice, in the industry, to design the shape of
parts using 3D drawing software, commonly known as
computer-aided design (CAD) software. CAD models greatly
simplify the task of defining nominal geometries and
dimensions, an essential step in the process of inspecting parts.
Importing a CAD model

Objective: Import a CAD model, into the inspection project, as a Reference object.
Required: A CAD file in a neutral format (IGES or STEP file) or a native format (such as CATIA,
NX, Creo, SolidWorks, or Inventor).
Steps
1. Choose File > Import > CAD Models.

A file browser opens.
2. Browse for the CAD file and select it.
3. Click Open.
Results
The CAD model is added to the Tree View, The CAD model is displayed in the 3D scene.
under the Reference branch.
68
Importing Product and Manufacturing Information (PMI) with the

CAD model
Some computer-assisted design platforms have the capability to add geometric dimensioning
and tolerancing controls to the model in order to have this information embedded in the file.
Depending on the CAD file format, the import options may include extracting features and
their feature control frames to import the model with the GD&T control information. The
import options are offered on the CAD Models page of the PolyWorks|Inspector Options.
Objective: Import a CAD model with embedded GD&T control information.
Required: CAD model with embedded GD&T controls in a format such as CATIA V5 and V6,
Creo, JT, NX, SAT, or SolidWorks.
Steps
1. Choose Tools > Options.

The PolyWorks|Inspector Options dialog
box opens.
2. Open the Objects > Reference/Data >

CAD Models > [choose a file format]
page.
3. For each required CAD file format, select
Import features and controls.
4. Click OK.
5. Choose File > Import > CAD Models.

6. Browse for the CAD file and select it.
7. Click Open.
69
Results
The CAD model is imported with the GD&T The CAD model is displayed in the 3D scene,
controls and the nominal feature compo- along with the features.
nents are created automatically.
Notes
• A CAD translator is required to read the native CAD file formats.

• The Features and Controls Import Log is added to the Tree View, under the Reports branch.
It provides information about the operations done by the PolyWorks Metrology Suite
during the import process.
70
Using polygonal models to describe nominal parts

Polygonal models are meshes composed of triangles and vertices
that are the result of a merging process of the data points
acquired by a scanning device. Polygonal models are generally
imported as Data objects, but can also be imported as Reference
objects. For example, the original model can be imported as a
Reference object to monitor wear on a part over time.
Converting a polygonal Data object to a Reference object

Objective: Import a polygonal model as a Data object and convert it to a Reference object.
Required: A polygonal model file in a PolyWorks format (such as POL or PQK), or a neutral
format (such as STL or OBJ).
Steps
1. Choose File > Import > Polygonal

Models.
2. Browse for the file to import.

Common polygonal file formats include
.pol, .pqk, .stl, .obj, and .ply.
3. In the Object Units list, select the
native units of the file then click OK.
The polygonal model is imported as a
Data object.
4. Select the polygonal model in the Tree
View, then choose Tools > Data Objects >
Convert to Reference Objects.
Results
The polygonal model is now added to the The polygonal model is displayed in the 3D
Tree View, under the Reference branch. scene.
71
Assigning tolerances to Reference objects

Tolerances, assigned to Reference objects, define upper and
lower envelopes used by measurement tools to determine
whether a measured value is within tolerance (pass) or out of
tolerance (fail). Tolerances can be assigned to the entire
Reference object at once, or to individual surfaces or areas.
The examples shown in the following subsections use a CAD

model. Note that the procedure is applicable to any type of
Reference object.
Assigning tolerances to the entire Reference object

Objective: Assign tolerances to all the surfaces of the CAD model.
Required: A CAD file, imported as a Reference object.
Steps
1. Select the CAD model in the Tree View.
2. Choose Tools > Reference Objects >

Tolerances.
The Edit Reference/Primitive Tolerances
dialog box opens.
By default, all the CAD surfaces are assigned a

tolerance of +/- 0.5 mm, which is shown in
turquoise.
3. Enter a new value to modify the tolerance.
72
Assigning tolerances to specific surfaces

Objective: Assign tolerances to specific surfaces of the CAD model.
Required: A CAD file, imported as a Reference object.
Steps
1. Choose Select > Elements > Interactively to

enable an interactive picking mode.
2. Left-click the CAD surfaces where a different

tolerance must be assigned.
3. Choose Tools > Reference Objects >

Tolerances.
The Edit Reference/Primitive Tolerances
dialog box opens.
4. In the dialog box, click Add to create a new

tolerance.
5. Enter the values for the new tolerance.
6. Click Assign to Selected CAD Surfaces.
Results
A new tolerance is added and is assigned to

the selected CAD surfaces.
73
Acquiring Data
objects
Introducing Data objects

In a typical inspection process, Data objects represent the objects that will be inspected. They
can be imported from a standard format or created within PolyWorks|Inspector as a result of
line scanning, probing physical objects, or using other operations (e.g., transferring).
Categories of Data objects

There are three types of Data objects covered in this guide. The following table presents each
type:
Icon Type Description
Surface Data objects • Point Clouds (organized and unorganized1, line

(with normals) scans1, planar grid/meshes2, IMAlign projects2,
Surface Data objects and probed surface point clouds1). They are
(without normals) obtained by importing files, scanning, or
probing.
• Polygonal Models2 obtained by importing files or

by scanning.
Boundary Data objects Boundary point clouds obtained by importing

(with normals) unorganized point clouds1, scanning, or probing3.
Boundary Data objects
(without normals)
Probed Data objects Data points obtained when:

(with normals)
• Probing measurement objects (i.e., features,
Probed Data objects comparison points, cross-sections, and gauges).
(without normals)
• Performing a surface point alignment.
1. With or without normal information.

2. Always have normal information.
3. Without normal information.
Data objects are displayed in the Tree View, under the Data
branch.
75
Introducing surface and boundary Data acquisition

PolyWorks|Inspector offers the capability to acquire data through the use of scanning and
probing plug-ins. These plug-ins are only available if they have been selected from the list of
plug-ins, which loads them during module startup such as when starting
PolyWorks|Inspector. For more information, see Specifying the required plug-ins on page 40.
Data acquisition by scanning

When scanning in PolyWorks|Inspector, it is possible to capture
the surface of a part or the outer trim boundaries and the inner
hole boundaries of thin parts. Data is acquired in the form of a
polygonal model or a point cloud.
Scanning plug-ins are offered for various devices, including

articulated arms, trackers, optical systems, photogrammetry-
based systems, robots, custom encoder-based translation and
rotation systems, and so on.
Scan types
Three types of scanning are offered:
Surface scanning
Surface Scanning is the most common scanning

technique. It gathers data points across all the
material within the digitizer acquisition range. If
using the real-time meshing technology, those
data points are converted to a polygonal model.
See Scanning surfaces of a part to obtain a raw point

cloud Data object on page 89.
76
Surface and boundary scanning
Surface and Boundary Scanning combines the

surface scanning behavior with the capability to
delineate the boundaries of the part and of holes.
Surface scanning captures data points across the
part. Boundary scanning detects large gaps
between surface points as part holes and saves
the innermost data points as a boundary scan
Data object. It also detects the end of scanned
lines and saves the end points in the boundary
scan Data object as well.
These boundary points can then be used for data

color maps. This scanning method is commonly
used when dealing with thin parts.
See Scanning surfaces and boundaries of thin parts

on page 93.
Sharp edge scanning
Sharp Edge Scanning calculates the theoretical

sharp edge of any hole or part boundary by
extrapolating from laser readings on the part
surface and sidewall.
See Scanning sharp edges of thin parts on page 96.
77
Using a clipping plane

When scanning a part, oftentimes, a portion of the table on which the part lies is also
scanned. In these situations, a clipping plane is useful to automatically delete points on the
table while scanning.
This reduces the manual clean-up of the scanned data, which makes it easier to scan both
sides of a part.
The data points are shown during the scan pass but are permanently deleted at the end of
the pass.
The same clipping plane can be reused from one piece to another, and from one project to
another, as it is saved in the user configuration.
Objective: Define a clipping plane prior to scanning.
Required: A line scanning device is ready to use. The required plug-in is loaded in
PolyWorks|Inspector.
Steps
1. From the Scan dialog box, enable Clipping

plane.
2. Click Define Clipping Plane to define a

clipping plane.
The Define Clipping Plane dialog box opens.
3. Choose a Method from the following choices.
Probe
This method is used to define the clipping plane by probing a plane.
1. In the Method list, select Probe.

2. Click Probe.
A probing device must be selected in the
probing plug-ins list. The device must be ready
to use.
78
3. Probe the plane, which is typically the table on

which the part is resting.
From Plane
This method is used to define the clipping plane from a plane feature that is already defined in
the Tree View.
1. In the Method list, select From Plane.
Note that the selected plane must be aligned
to the part that will be scanned.
2. Select a Plane from the list.
Alternatively, click the Pick Plane button to the
right of the list box to pick a plane primitive
directly in the 3D scene.
3. Click Define.
Results
The clipping plane is defined.
Notes
• The clipping plane is saved in the user configuration.

• A clipping plane defined using the Probe method does not appear in the Tree View nor is it
displayed in the 3D scene.
• The data points filtered by the clipping plane while scanning are permanently deleted.
79
Scanning parameters
Scanning profiles are offered in the plug-in dialog box. On choosing a profile, the value of
scanning parameters changes accordingly, simplifying the setup of a new laser scanning
session. Four predefined profiles are available, which are adapted to the size of the smallest
details that will be captured:
• Coarse Resolution: for details greater than 2.0 mm in size

• Standard Resolution: for details greater than 1.0 mm in size
• Fine Resolution: for details greater than 0.5 mm in size
• Extra Fine Resolution: for details less than 0.5 mm in size
When the plug-in dialog box is opened, the latest active profile is loaded. If a laser scanning
parameter is modified, the profile in the list box is set to (Custom).
A drop-down menu, to the right of the list box, allows saving the current scanning parameters
to a user scanning profile or deleting the selected user scanning profile.
80
If not saved, (Custom) profiles are lost when another profile is selected.
Once the scan operation is launched, a scanning toolbar appears in the 3D scene. For
information, see Connecting to a scanning device on page 41.
Data acquisition by probing

A probing device (such as a laser tracker or an articulated
arm) can be used directly within the
PolyWorks|Inspector user interface to digitize parts.
Point clouds can be probed on the part surface, or along
its boundaries (edges):
• When probing on the part surface:

• If the probing device is aligned to the Reference
object, the points can be compensated toward the
closest surface.
• If the probe tip has an orientation, that orientation can be used to assign point normals.
• When probing along the part edges, a boundary point cloud is created. This method can be
used to measure the perimeter shape of a thin-walled part, such as a sheet metal part.
For information on the user interface when probing, see Connecting to a probing device on
page 44.
81
Acquiring surface and boundary Data objects
Scanning a part using a point cloud digitizer plug-in

A point cloud digitizer plug-in is used to scan the surfaces and boundaries of a part and obtain
a point cloud Data object or a polygonal Data object.
Meshing point cloud data in real time while scanning

The surfaces of a part can be meshed in real time while
scanning. Creating a mesh while scanning can be done to
obtain optimal surface data quality and highlight areas
where data is missing.
Objective: Scan the surfaces of a part using a laser line

scanner in PolyWorks|Inspector, automatically
producing a polygonal model from scan passes
in real time.
Required: A line scanning device is available and ready to use. The required plug-in is loaded
in PolyWorks|Inspector.
Steps
1. Choose Tools > Plug-ins > [device name].

The plug-in dialog box opens.
2. Select the Surface Scanning scan type.
82
3. In the Surface list, select (Create New) to

create a new Data object or specify an existing
Data object to which data will be added. See
Adding data to a scanned Data object on
page 118.
4. Specify the Name of the new surface Data
object.
5. Select Real-time quality meshing.
6. Select Polygonal model as the final data type.
7. If desired, enable the Clipping plane.
8. Under Scanning options, select the
appropriate Profile based on the size of the
smallest details on the part.
9. In the plug-in dialog box, click Start Scan.

The scanning toolbar appears in the 3D scene,
providing quick access to the quality metrics. See
Analyzing the quality of the digitized polygonal
model using metrics on page 84.
10. In the plug-in dialog box, click End Scan when

scanning is completed.
11. Click Finalize Mesh to complete the polygonal
model.
Once scanning is completed, the mesh must be finalized. The seams that are left visible in the
mesh that is under construction are automatically stitched to produce a high-quality mesh.
Before finalization After finalization
83
Results
The polygonal model is added to the Tree A polygonal model is displayed in the
View, under the Data branch, as a surface 3D scene.
Data object.
Notes
When specifying Point cloud from mesh as the final data type, the point cloud has the same
quality and precision as the polygonal model output of the real-time quality meshing engine,
without the extra computing time required by the mesh finalization phase. The mesh-based
point cloud can be converted into a polygonal model at any time by selecting it in the Tree
View and choosing Tools > Data Objects > Convert Mesh-Based Point Clouds to Polygonal Models.
Analyzing the quality of the digitized polygonal model using metrics

When using real-time quality meshing, the scan quality is monitored and low-quality areas are
detected using four quality metrics: High scanner-to-surface-normal angle, Low scan density
for mesh curvature, High noise level, Detect misaligned scan passes.
The activation state and the parameters for each quality metric can be configured through the
Surface Scan > Real-Time Quality Meshing > Quality Metrics page of the Line Scan Options
dialog box.
The scanning toolbar, displayed at the bottom of the 3D scene when the scanning mode is
launched, provides quick access to the three quality metrics that are computed directly on the
polygonal model as well as to their associated parameters. Click the arrow to the right of the
buttons to modify the default values for each quality metric. All quality metrics can be enabled
simultaneously.
84
When a quality metric is activated in the scanning toolbar, areas of the scanned polygonal
model that are identified as problematic are highlighted using a color specific to each metric.
The four quality metrics are described in the following subsections:
High scanner-to-surface-normal angle

The High scanner-to-surface-normal angle
quality metric controls the angle between the
digitizing vector (direction along which the laser
light is projected) and the normal vector of the
scanned surface. This quality metric is enabled by
default.
The best quality data is acquired when the laser is
normal to the scanned surface.
When the angle between the digitizing vector and

the surface normal vector is greater than the
specified value, the area is highlighted.
When new scan passes are added covering the

same area with an acceptable angle, the
highlighting is automatically removed.
85
Low scan density for mesh curvature

The Low scan density for mesh curvature
quality metric, enabled by default, identifies
problematic areas where the local resolution of
data points is insufficient to properly obtain a
smooth curvature transition.
In low-curvature areas, a low density of scanned

data points is acceptable while in high-curvature
areas a higher density is required. Otherwise, the
problematic area is highlighted.
To increase the density in areas of curvature, scan

at a slower speed, keeping the laser line perpen-
dicular to any fillet or sharp edge, to ensure that
the laser line wraps fillets or radii when possible.
86
High noise level

The High noise level quality metric detects high
noise levels on scanned data, often resulting from
specular reflection (shiny material), dark
materials (less reflected light), or textured
surfaces (output from machining).
Local areas where high deviations are detected
compared to the surroundings are highlighted
indicating the presence of a high noise level.
Note that this quality metric is deactivated by
default because its computational time is more
significant. It is recommended to activate this
metric every few scan passes.
To enable this quality metric, click the High Noise
Level button on the scanning toolbar. Click the
arrow to the right of the button to modify the
Standard deviation threshold value.
Detect misaligned scan passes

The Detect misaligned scan passes quality
metric, enabled by default, analyzes each scan
pass as it is captured.
Certain circumstances, such as incorrect arm
calibrations, part displacements, or temperature
changes can cause the misalignment of incoming
scan passes, becoming unacceptable based on a
specified Max average deviation.
If a scan pass is misaligned, a message appears.
Based on the scanning accuracy requirements,
choose to delete or to keep the scan pass.
In the Behavior when misaligned list, select

Confirm Pass Deletion if a user confirmation is
required prior to deleting misaligned scan passes.
87
Enhancing the quality of the mesh

Once the issues have been identified using the quality metrics, the operator can rescan until
the low-quality areas are no longer highlighted and the polygonal model meets the required
quality criteria. This visual feedback ensures systematic high-quality measurements and
reduces the variability of scanning results.
According to the identified issues, up to four corrective actions can be taken:
• Add new scans using a better technique

• Scanning at a moderate speed.
• Maintaining a good angle between the scanner and the surface.
• Keeping the laser line perpendicular to any fillets or sharp edges.
• Delete scans and rescan
In the following example, a problematic area caused by specular reflection has been
corrected by deleting the area and rescanning it.
• Delete last scan pass

If the last scan pass captured is of low quality,
click the Delete Last Scan Pass button on the
scanning toolbar to delete it and rescan.
• Reject misaligned scans
Reject misaligned scans even before they are
integrated into the polygonal model that is under
construction. Click Delete Pass in the message that
appears.
88
Scanning surfaces of a part to obtain a raw point cloud Data object

Surface scanning is the most common scanning technique. It
gathers data points from all material within the digitizer
acquisition range. As data is captured from different angles, point
density increases in overlapping areas. Each data point location
(x, y, z) is recorded and the point neighborhood is analyzed,
allowing point normals (i, j, k) to be calculated.
Objective: Scan the surfaces of a part using a plug-in to obtain a raw point cloud directly in
Required: A line-scanning device is available and ready to use. The required plug-in is loaded
Steps


create a new surface Data object or specify an
existing surface Data object to which data will
be added.
object.
5. Clear Real-time quality meshing.
8. If required, click Options to set the different

options for the specific device.
9. In the plug-in dialog box, click Start Scan to

scan the surfaces of the part.
89
Typical scanning session
A scanning session involves scanning one or more

passes with the same parameters.
All scan passes are added to the same Data object

in the Tree View (surface scan 1 in this example).
The number of acquired data points is displayed in

the top left corner of the 3D scene.
Second scan pass.
After several scan passes.
Remove unwanted data
To remove unwanted data points at any time while

scanning, use the interactive element selection
mode (choose Select > Elements >
Interactively), then press DELETE. This can be useful,
for example, in removing data from a fixture
holding the part. See Selecting elements on page 55.
90
Results
A surface Data object is added to the Tree The point cloud is displayed in the 3D scene.
View. All scan passes are added to one Data
object.
Best practices
Depending on the scanning device used, various settings and quality parameters may be
available in the plug-in or in the manufacturer’s software. In general, follow the
manufacturer’s recommendations to apply the optimal settings for the specific device and
application. It is recommended, when available, to adjust the scanner intensity as necessary to
capture high-quality measurements on a particular material.
When using a line scanner, the tips below also help maximize point cloud quality.
Scanner-to-surface angle
A surface is best captured when the viewpoint is
normal to the surface.
Orientation of line scan

To best capture part details with a line scanner,
orient each scan pass so that it runs along edges.
Aim directly at the edge detail. This allows more
points to be captured along the edge, capturing
small features better.
Direction of
scan pass
91
Scan passes
Focus on one simple scan pass at a time. Rather
than scanning around the part at multiple angles in
one pass, stop each pass after a straight pass,
change the position or angle, and begin a new scan
pass. This facilitates point cloud organization and
point normal calculations.
Filtering scan lines

Unnecessarily dense and noisy point clouds can be
prevented by using the Filter scan lines point
filtering option, activated by default, to remove
data point outliers during scanning.
The example shown to the right represents the

difference between unfiltered data points (a) and
filtered data points (b).
The Filter scan lines option is found on the (a)

Surface Scan > Filtering page of the Line Scan (b)
Options dialog box.
92
Scanning surfaces and boundaries of thin parts

Surface and Boundary scanning combines the surface
scanning behavior with the capability to delineate the
boundaries of a part and of holes. Surface scanning captures
data points across the part. Boundary scanning detects large
gaps between surface points as part holes and saves the
innermost data points as a boundary scan Data object. It also
detects the end of scanned lines and saves the end points in
the boundary scan Data object as well. These boundary
points can then be used for data color maps.
Objective: Scan the surfaces of a part using a plug-in to obtain both a surface point cloud
and a boundary point cloud, delineating internal and external boundaries.
Steps

2. Select the Surface and Boundary Scanning

scan type.
3. In the Surface list, select (Create New) to create

a new surface Data object, or specify an existing
surface Data object to which data will be added.
object.
5. In the Boundary list, select (Create New) to
create a new Data object, or specify an existing
boundary Data object to which data will be
added.
6. Specify the Name of the new boundary Data
object.
8. Select the Polygonal model as the final data
type.
10. Under Scanning options, select a Profile based
on the size of the smallest details on the part.
11. Click Start Scan.
93
A scanning session involves performing one or

more scan passes with the same parameters.
All scan passes are added to the same Data objects

in the Tree View (surface scan 1 and boundary Direction of scan
scan 1 in this example). pass
Second scan pass.

Direction of scan
pass
Results
A surface Data object and a boundary Data The polygonal model and point cloud are
object are added to the Tree View, under the displayed in the 3D scene.
Data branch.
94
Notes
The Surface and Boundary Scan page of the Line Scan Options dialog box offers:
• an option to control the minimum hole width.

• an option to turn the external boundary
detection on or off. It is enabled by default.
95
Scanning sharp edges of thin parts

The sharp edge scanning method is especially designed for
sheet metal applications. It records data points by calculating
the theoretical sharp edge of any hole or part boundary,
which is obtained by extrapolating edge points from laser
readings on the part surface and sidewall. Boundary data
points can then be used, for example, for part boundary color
maps.
Objective: Scan the surfaces of a part using a plug-in to obtain a boundary point cloud,
delineating holes and part edges.
Steps

2. Select the Sharp Edge Scanning scan type.
3. In the Boundary list, select (Create New) to

create a new boundary Data object, or specify
an existing boundary Data object to which data
will be added.
4. Specify the Name of the new boundary Data
object.
5. Under Scanning options, select a Profile
based on the size of the smallest details on the
part.
Note that the Sharp Edge Scan page of the Line

Scan Options dialog box offers an option to
control the maximum point-to-point distance
for points along a scan line as well as the
maximum thickness of the part.
6. In the plug-in dialog box, click Start Scan.
96
A scanning session involves scanning one or more

passes with the same parameters.
All scan passes are added to the same Data object

in the Tree View (boundary scan 1 in this example).

Since the data points are calculated by extrapolating between the part surface and sidewall,
the scanner must be angled to adequately measure both surfaces.
The laser line should intersect the part edge at a

45 degree angle in order to gather data both on the
material surface and the sidewall.
The part must be thick enough, and the scanner

resolution small enough, so that at least three points for extrapolation
points can be measured on the part surface and
sidewall.
boundary point
97
Results
A boundary Data object is added to the Tree The boundary point cloud is displayed in the
View. All scan passes are added to one Data 3D scene.
object.
98
Guidance while scanning features

When scanning, sometimes there is not enough
scanned data to extract quality features or to even
extract features at all.
Using guidance when scanning features guides the

operator to acquire enough data, based on the feature
coverage, to perform the extraction of the features
downstream in the inspection process.
Guidance is available for all features whose

measurement method is set to Undefined or Extract.
When set to Extract, the guidance takes the extraction parameters of each feature into
account. When set to Undefined, the default extraction parameters are used.
An inspection workflow, using feature scanning guidance to ensure the extraction of features,
is illustrated below.
1. Import Reference object

2. Create features
Create the nominal components of features
and set their parameters before starting the
inspection.
3. Align part to Reference object

Align the part to the CAD model to take
advantage of the visual guidance tools.
4. Acquire Data object by scanning

Acquire point cloud or polygonal model data
from the actual part needing inspection. Use
the feature scanning guidance function to
capture enough data and to ensure that the
extraction of features is of the highest
quality.
99
Objective: Use the guidance function when scanning features.
Required: The required plug-in is loaded in PolyWorks|Inspector. A line-scanning device is

available, ready to use, and prealigned to the CAD model. The project contains
nominal features.
Steps


create a new Data object, or specify an existing
Data object to which data will be added.
4. Specify the Name of the new Data object.
6. Select Polygonal model as the final data type.
8. Under Scanning options, select a Profile
based on the size of the smallest details on the
part.
9. Click Start Scan.
The scanning toolbar appears in the 3D scene,

providing quick access to feature scanning
guidance.
10. Scan the part, making sure that the data

acquired around the features is sufficient to
obtain the measured component.
100
Results
In the 3D scene, pins and guidance zones are

displayed for existing features based on their
extraction parameters. The pins and guidance
zones disappear as soon as the extraction require-
ments are met.
A message in the 3D scene indicates the number of
features left to scan.
Notes
• Guidance is offered for nominal features when

the measurement method is set to Undefined
or Extract.
• The line-scanning device can be aligned using

the Surface Points Alignment.
Understanding the visual cues of the guidance function
• Orange pins indicate the location of features.

Features are viewed from the front side (normal
orientation).
• The orange highlight indicates where additional
data is required in the form of a surface Data
object (polygonal model or point cloud).
• The size and the location of the highlight are
based on the extraction parameters set for
each feature. If the measurement method is set
to Undefined, the default extraction
parameters are used.
101
• A gray pin under an arrow indicates the location

of a feature. However, these features are
viewed from the back side.
• The white highlight indicates where additional

data is required in the form of a boundary Data
object.
102
Probing a part using a probing device plug-in

PolyWorks|Inspector has the capability to use a probing
device directly within its user interface to digitize parts.
Probing devices include equipment such as laser trackers
and articulated arms. Point clouds can be probed on the
part surface, or along its boundaries. The point
coordinates (x, y, z) and optionally, for arms, the normals
(i, j, k) are stored in the current probing session in the Tree
View, as either probed surface or probed boundary Data
objects.
Using the probing device to collect surface points

A probing device can be used to collect a point cloud on the part. The data points are stored in
the current probing session as a probed surface Data object containing the x, y, z point
coordinates of each probed point. If the probing device is aligned to the Reference object, the
points can be compensated toward the closest surface. If the probe tip has an orientation,
that orientation can be used to assign point normals.
Objective: Probe the surfaces of a part using a plug-in to obtain a point cloud directly in
Required: A probing device is available and ready to use, and the required plug-in is loaded
in PolyWorks|Inspector. A CAD model is loaded for point compensation, and the
device is aligned to it.
Steps
1. Choose Tools > Data Objects > Probe Surface

Point Clouds.
The Probe Surface Point Clouds dialog box
opens.
2. Select Compensation and specify the Use

Reference Object method.
The probed points are translated by the probe
radius toward the nearest Reference surface.
3. If it is possible to keep the probe tip orthogonal
to the part, and the tip has an orientation (is not
only a reflector), point normals can be assigned
by selecting Store normal vectors.
4. Click Probe and acquire data points on the part.
103
Results
A probed Data object is added to the Tree The point cloud is displayed in the 3D scene.
View. All probed points are added to one
Data object.
Notes
Many probing modes are available when probing,

the most common being:
• The Single (or Stationary) mode collects one
point each time the device is triggered.
• The Continuous Time mode collects a series of
points when the device is triggered, at equal
time increments.
• The Continuous Distance mode collects a
series of points when the device is triggered, at
equal distance increments.
• The increment values can be edited using the

Probing Options button.
104
Using the probing device to collect boundary points
A probing device can be used to collect a point cloud on the part edges only, creating a
boundary point cloud. This method can be used to measure the perimeter shape of a piece of
sheet metal or a thin-walled part. Either the probe tip or shank can be used.
Objective: Probe the surfaces of a part using a plug-in to obtain a point cloud directly in
Required: A probing device is available and ready to use, and the required plug-in is loaded
in PolyWorks|Inspector. A CAD file is loaded for point compensation, and the
device is aligned to it.
Steps
1. Choose Tools > Data Objects > Probe Boundary

Point Clouds.
The Probe Boundary Point Clouds dialog box
opens.
2. In the Reference object list, select (Closest) to

use the closest Reference object, or specify an
existing Reference object.
3. Select the Project points using closest
surface comparison point parameter to offset
the probed boundary data points by the
measured deviation along the normal of the
closest surface comparison point.
4. If the shank of the probing device is calibrated,
the shank can be used for probing, rather than
the probe tip, by selecting Use shank.
5. Click Probe.
Results
A probed Data object is added to the Tree The probed boundary point cloud is
View. All probed points are added to one displayed in the 3D scene.
Data object.
105
Notes
Many probing modes are available when probing,

the most common being:
• The Single (or Stationary) mode collects one
point each time the device is triggered.
• The Continuous Time mode collects a series of
points when the device is triggered, at equal
time increments.
• The Continuous Distance mode collects a
series of points when the device is triggered, at
equal distance increments.
• The increment values can be edited using the

Probing Options button.
106
Importing surface and boundary point cloud Data

objects
Data objects can be imported from point cloud or polygonal model files, or from other
PolyWorks Metrology Suite projects such as another PolyWorks|Inspector project.
Importing surface Data objects

Surface Data object files contain a set of data points of the actual
part, acquired by a digitizing device. Usually, the points cover the part
surface but sometimes points are collected only around the hole and
edge boundaries of the part. Most point cloud files can only be
imported as Data objects.
Importing IMAlign projects

Objective: Import the acquired data of an actual part as an IMAlign project.
Required: An IMAlign project.
Steps
1. Choose File > Import > Point Clouds.
2. Browse for the IMAlign project that will be

imported and click Open.
Results
The IMAlign project is added to the Tree View, The Data object is displayed in the 3D scene.
under the Data branch.
107
Meshing an IMAlign project

When the data cannot be acquired through a PolyWorks|Inspector digitizer plug-in, or when
the data has previously been acquired through an IMAlign plug-in, it is possible to create a
polygonal Data object from IMAlign projects.
Objective: Create a polygonal Data object from an IMAlign project.
Required: An open PolyWorks|Inspector project.
Steps
1. Choose Tools > Data Objects > Create Polygonal

Models.
The Create Polygonal Data Objects dialog box
opens.
2. Specify the Name of the new polygonal Data

object.
3. In the Method list, select From IMAlign
Project.
4. Browse for the IMAlign project.
5. Specify a Sampling step.
The default value is set to Automatic, which
means the sampling step is obtained from the
IMAlign project.
If desired, specify a Custom sampling step.
6. Click Create.
Results
A new polygonal Data object is added to the The new polygonal Data object is displayed in
Tree View, under the Data branch. the 3D scene.
108
Importing surface Data objects from files

Objective: Import the acquired data of the actual part in the form of a surface point cloud.
Required: A data file in a PolyWorks format (PSL or PIF files), a native format, or a neutral
format (such as IGES or text files).
Steps
2. Browse for the file that will be imported.

To the right is an example of a text file
containing x, y, and z coordinates for each data
point.
The Import Parameters dialog box opens.

3. Specify the required parameters.
The parameters offered depend on the format
of the imported file and the options set in the
PolyWorks|Inspector Options (available by
choosing Tools > Options). For example, for
a .txt file:
• In the Object units list, select the native
units of the file.
• In the Data object type list, select Surface.
• Specify the decimal symbol and field
delimiters of the file.
A preview of how the file is interpreted is

shown in the form of a grid.
4. Click OK.
109
Results
The point cloud is added to the Tree View, The object is displayed in the 3D scene.
under the Data branch, as a surface Data
object.
110
Importing boundary Data objects

Objective: Import the acquired data of the actual part edges in the form of a boundary point
cloud.
Required: A data file in a neutral format (such as IGES or text files).
Steps

To the right is an example of a text file
containing x, y, and z coordinates for each data
point.

3. Specify the required parameters.
The parameters offered depend on the format
of the imported file, and the options set in the
PolyWorks|Inspector Options (available by
choosing Tools > Options). For example, for
a .txt file:
• In the Object units list, select the native
units of the file.
• In the Data object type list, select
Boundary.
• Specify the decimal symbol and field
delimiters of the file.
A preview of how the file is interpreted is

shown in the form of a grid.
4. Click OK.
111
Results
The Data point cloud is added to the Tree The object is displayed in the 3D scene.
View, under the Data branch, as a boundary
Data object.
112
Importing polygonal models

A polygonal model is a mesh composed of triangles and vertices
obtained from data points scanned on the actual part. Polygonal
models are generally imported as Data objects, but can also be
imported as Reference objects.
Objective: Import the acquired data of the actual part in the form
of a polygonal model.
Required: A polygonal model file in a PolyWorks format (such as

POL or PQK), or a neutral format (such as STL or OBJ).
Steps
1. Choose File > Import > Polygonal Models.

3. In the Object units list, select the native units
of the file.
By default, polygonal models are imported as
Data objects. The default behavior can be
changed in the PolyWorks|Inspector Options
(Objects > Reference/Data > Polygonal
Models page). The PolyWorks|Inspector
Options are available by choosing Tools >
Options.
4. Click OK.
Results
The polygonal model is added to the Tree The polygonal model is displayed in the
View, under the Data branch, as a surface 3D scene.
Data object.
113
Editing Data objects

It may sometimes be useful to clean up Data objects by removing unwanted data points or by
dividing the dataset into multiple objects. For example, data points collected on a part fixture
or inspection fixture can be removed from the overall dataset, or particular regions of a part
can be split from the original Data object into a new Data object. Another common operation
consists in adding more data to an existing scanned Data object.
Cleaning scan data

It is possible to select and delete individual data points
from a Data object. This can be done interactively, in
the 3D scene, or by using criteria such as the proximity
to reference surfaces. Data points deleted in the
project can always be recovered, if necessary.
Removing data points interactively

Objective: Remove data points from a Data object by manually selecting and deleting them.
Required: The project contains a Data object.
Steps
1. Choose Select > Elements > Interactively.

Alternatively, press SPACEBAR to enable the
interactive element selection mode.
The selection mode is activated.
2. Use the interactive selection tool to select the
data points that will be removed.
To select point cloud data points, see Selecting
elements on page 55.
3. Press DELETE.
Alternatively, choose Edit > Delete > Elements to
delete the selected data points.
Results
The selected points are removed from the

Data object and are not used for analysis.
114
Removing data points using a CAD model

Objective: Remove selected data points from the Data object. The data points are selected
using a Reference object (CAD model).
Required: A Reference object and a Data object are available in the project. In addition, the
Data object is aligned to the Reference object.
Steps
1. Select the Reference object in the Tree View.

2. Choose Select > Data Points > Using Reference
Object Surfaces.
The Select Data Points using Surfaces dialog
box opens.
3. In the Direction list, select Shortest.
Since a Reference object has been preselected,
Specific is displayed in the Reference objects
list as well as the Reference object name.
It is possible to change the Reference object for
another one, or choose All in the Reference
objects list to use all Reference objects.
4. Specify the Max distance that will be
considered between data points and reference
surfaces.
5. Click the Select button to select the data points.
The selected data points are highlighted red in

the 3D scene.
6. Select the Data object in the Tree View.
7. Right-click and choose Select > Elements > Invert

to select only data points that do not meet the
selection criteria above. New selected data
points are highlighted red.
8. Choose Edit > Delete > Elements to delete the

selected data points.
Alternatively, press DELETE.
115
Results
The selected points are removed from the

Data object and are not used for analysis.
Recovering deleted data points

When data points are deleted, they are not deleted permanently. It is possible to recover
deleted data points at any time, which makes deleting and editing operations safer and
reversible.
Objective: Recover deleted data points.
Required: The project contains a Data object. Data points have been deleted from that
object.
Steps
1. Select the Data object in the Tree View.

2. Choose Edit > Recover Deleted Elements.
Results
Previously deleted data points will be added to the Data object. All deleted data points are
recovered, not just the last data points deleted.
Notes
Recovering deleted data points can be a long operation due to the automatic project update.
116
Purging deleted data points

It is possible to purge deleted data points for surface Data objects of a piece in order to
reduce RAM requirements and accelerate software operations, as well as to reduce project
size on disk.
Objective: Purge deleted data points.
Required: The project contains a surface Data object. Data points have been deleted from
that object.
Steps
1. Choose Edit > Purge Deleted Elements.
Results
Previously deleted data points are permanently deleted.
Notes
• The Edit > Recover Deleted Elements command cannot be used to recover data points that
have been purged.
117
Adding data to a scanned Data object

A common editing operation for Data objects consists in adding more data to an existing
scanned Data object.
Objective: Add data to an existing Data object acquired using a scanning plug-in.
Required: A Data object that was scanned directly in PolyWorks|Inspector and a scanning
device is ready to use and is aligned to the Data object that will be modified.
Steps

2. In the Surface list, select the Data object to

which data will be added.
3. Click Start Scan and scan the required areas.
4. Click End Scan to end the scanning session.
5. If meshing point cloud data in real time, click

Finalize Mesh to complete the polygonal Data
object.
Results
The Data object before adding new data. The Data object after acquiring new data.
Holes have been covered with new data.
118
Splitting a Data object into two objects

Selected data points can be moved or copied from one Data
object to a new object using the Split command. This is useful
in separating scans containing multiple parts. Selection can be
done interactively in the 3D scene, or using criteria such as the
proximity to Reference surfaces.
Objective: Move data points to a new Data object.
Steps
1. Select data points, using one of these methods

for example:
• The interactive element selection tool. See
Selecting elements on page 55.
• Using a Reference object; choose Select >
Data Points > Using Reference Object Surfaces.
2. Choose Edit > Split Objects > Move Elements to

remove the selected data points from the
current Data object and create a new Data
object containing only those data points.
Choose Edit > Split Objects > Copy Elements to
preserve the data points in the original Data
object.
Results
A new Data object is added to the Tree View,

under the Data branch, containing only the
selected data points.
119
Aligning Data objects
to Reference objects
Introducing alignments
An alignment is an object transformation operation that changes the position and orientation
of a Data object to bring it into the coordinate system of a Reference object.
Data object
Reference object
Before alignment After alignment

PolyWorks|Inspector offers a variety of alignment tools to meet a wide variety of scenarios.
Each alignment is represented in the Tree View as a data alignment.
Alignments are available on the Align menu or on the Alignments toolbar.
Alignment tools
Here is a list of common tools offered by PolyWorks|Inspector that are used to align Data
objects to Reference objects:
Surface Points
Match source points probed on
physical objects to matching
destination points picked on
Reference objects or specified
numerically.
Best-Fit Data to Reference

Objects
Best-fit the surface of selected Data
objects to the surface of available
Reference objects.
121
Best-Fit Data to Data

Objects
Aligns Data objects to fixed Data
objects. This tool is useful when
Data objects are acquired in
multiple device positions that are
not aligned to each other.
Best-Fit Measurement
Objects
Align a Data object to a Reference
object by matching the points of
point-reducible measurement
objects (features and comparison
points) and surface features to the
matched nominal component.
Plane, Axis, Center Point

and
Perpendicular Planes
Align Data objects to Reference
objects using pairs of planar,
direction-based, and center-point-
based features (Plane, Axis, Center
Point), or by matching three plane
features (Perpendicular Planes).
Reference Targets
and
Reference Targets by
Probing
Match components extracted from
Data objects, or points obtained on
Data objects, to reference targets
created on Reference objects.
122
Datum Reference Frame

and
Datum Reference Frame by

Probing
Align Data objects (using the
measured components of datum
features) to Reference objects
(using the nominal components of
datum features).
123
Introducing data alignments

Each transformation of a Data object is automatically recorded in the Tree View as a data
alignment. While the latest data alignment is usually the active data alignment, a previous
data alignment can be activated manually. This may be useful in examining inspection results
that use a variety of alignments.
Each data alignment is stored chronologically within an

alignment group. When created, the data alignment is
called original. Data alignments within an alignment group
form an alignment history. The name of each data alignment
states the type of alignment performed.
The active data alignment, often the last one, is shown in

bold. Any data alignment can be activated, and project
contents are updated automatically. Unnecessary data
alignments can be deleted.
Data objects with the same transformations can be contained within the same alignment
group, whereas Data objects requiring different alignments are automatically placed in
separate alignment groups. The latter case is common for assemblies of multiple Data
objects. An alignment performed on any Data object applies to all the Data objects.
The creation of alignment groups and data alignments is automatically managed by

Activating a data alignment

An alignment group can contain multiple data alignments, such as a Best-Fit alignment
followed by a Feature-Based alignment. It is possible to activate any alignment in an
alignment group and results are automatically updated.
Objective: Activate a previous data alignment in an alignment group.
Required: A Data object with at least two data alignments in an alignment group.
Steps
Here, there are two data alignments:

original and best-fit to ref 1.
The best-fit to ref 1 alignment is currently
the active alignment and is shown in bold.
124
1. Select a data alignment in the Tree View

and choose Align > Data Alignments >
Activate.
Alternatively, right-click the selection and
choose Activate.
Measurement objects and results are
updated automatically.
Results
The selected data alignment is activated and The Data objects are transformed by the new
shown in bold in the Tree View. active data alignment.
Notes
When a data alignment is performed incorrectly, it is best to

delete it immediately. First, activate the previous data
alignment, then select the last data alignment in the alignment
group, and choose Edit > Delete > Objects. Deleting an interme-
diate data alignment may have an effect on subsequent data
alignments.
125
Aligning using object surfaces

An alignment is the operation that brings a Data object into the
coordinate system of a Reference object. The Best-Fit operation is a
surface-based alignment tool that iteratively transforms the position
and orientation of a Data object to minimize the deviations of the
data points with respect to the surface of a Reference object. The
Data object must first be prealigned to the Reference object.
Best-fitting Data objects to Reference objects using an

automatic prealignment
For the Automatic prealignment function to work well, the Data object must cover most of
the Reference object, and the Reference object must not have a symmetrical form.
Objective: Align a Data object to a Reference object using a Best-Fit alignment with an
Automatic prealignment.
Required: The project contains a Data object and a Reference object.
Steps
1. Choose Align > Best-Fit Data Objects > Data to

Reference Objects.
The Best-Fit Data to Reference Objects dialog
box opens.
2. In the Method list, click Fit to Reference

Object Surfaces.
3. The Prealignment parameter is enabled by

default and set to Automatic.
4. In the Reference objects list, select All to

consider all the Reference objects.
5. In the Data objects list, select Surface to

consider all the surface Data objects.
Specific considers specific objects.
6. Specify the Max distance used to match data

points to the surface of the Reference object.
If the Data object is highly deviated from the
Reference object, increase the Max distance to
match data points to the surface of the Reference
object.
126
7. In the Subsampling list, select 1/1 to refine the

alignment, but with a longer computing time.
By default, the alignment operation uses one point
out of every four points to speed up calculations.
8. Click Start.
As the alignment converges to a solution, statistics
are displayed in the Statistics section.
Results
The new data alignment is added to the Data The Data object is aligned to the Reference
alignment group of the Data object. object using an automatic prealignment
and is then best-fitted using object
surfaces.
Notes
It is possible to edit a data alignment using its

property sheet. Select the object in the Tree View and
choose Edit > Object Properties, and then change the
parameters.
For example, edit the objects used, the Max distance,
or the Subsampling factor to refine the alignment
result. Then, click Apply and click Close.
127
If the alignment fails, a manual prealignment may be

necessary. In the object properties, click the Set
Prealignment button and choose Prealign using
Point Pairs. Click Close. See the next section for
instructions on using point pairs as a prealignment
method.
Best-fitting Data objects to Reference objects using a

manual prealignment
If a part is partially scanned, or shaped differently from the Reference object, the automatic
prealignment tool may not position the Data object in the optimal position for best-fitting. The
Point Pairs manual prealignment tool (1 Point Pair and N Point Pairs methods) should be used
instead.
Objective: Align a Data object to a Reference object using a Best-Fit alignment with a manual
prealignment.
Required: The project contains a Data object and a Reference object.
Steps

Reference Objects.
The Best-Fit Data to Reference Objects dialog
box opens.
128
2. In the Method list, click Fit to Reference

Object Surfaces.
3. In the Prealignment list, select Point Pairs.
4. In the Reference objects list, select All to

consider all the Reference objects.
5. In the Data objects list, select Surface to

consider all the surface Data objects.
Specific considers specific objects.
6. Specify the Max distance used to match data

points to the surface of the Reference object.
If the Data object is highly deviated from the
Reference object, increase the Max distance to
match data points to the surface of the Reference
object.
7. In the Subsampling list, select 1/1 to refine the

alignment, but with a longer computing time.
By default, the alignment operation uses one point
out of every four points to speed up calculations.
8. Click Start.
The Prealign using Point Pairs dialog box opens.

The Reference object and the Data object are
displayed in separate viewports.
9. Move both the Reference object (left) and the

Data object (right) to give them a similar
orientation. This facilitates the picking of pairs
of points in similar areas.
Just moving the objects does not operate any
transformation of the objects. If the mode is exited
before picking points and aligning, the objects are
still in their original position.
129
10. Click N Point Pairs.
11. Click Pick.
12. Anchor matching points on both objects, using

the same order. A minimum of three pairs of
points is required.
The points are displayed using the same color and
the same number in subscript.
13. Right-click to finish the operation.
The Best-Fit alignment is automatically performed

after the manual prealignment. As the alignment
converges to a solution, statistics are displayed in
the Statistics section.
Results
The new data alignment is added to the data The Data object is aligned to the Reference
alignment group of the Data object. object using a manual prealignment and is
then best-fitted using object surfaces.
Notes
In the Prealign using Point Pairs dialog box, another method is available: the 1 Point Pair
method. This method requires picking only one pair of points. A Best-Fit alignment is
automatically performed after a successful prealignment.
130
Aligning by probing surface points

The Surface Points alignment method is used to align probed points to the same locations on
Reference objects. This prealignment tool greatly facilitates visualization and guidance for
subsequent operations.
Objective: Align by probing surface points.
Required: A Reference object, a physical part, and a probing device.
Steps
1. Choose Align > Surface Points.

The Create Surface Points dialog box opens.
2. In the Method list, specify Anchor.

3. Click Anchor.
4. Anchor six points on the Reference object that

will be used for the alignment.
All six degrees of freedom should be constrained
using a 3-2-1 alignment method, where the
alignment direction of three surface points is
along one reference axis (X axis), the alignment
direction of two other surface points is along a
second reference axis (Y axis), and the alignment
direction of the last surface point is along the
remaining reference axis (Z axis). If all the degrees
of freedom are not constrained, then only a final
N Point Pairs alignment is performed.
The anchored points are listed in the Align Surface
Points pane. A radial tolerance determines how
closely the probed point must match the reference
location.
5. If a probing device is connected, the probing

dialog box opens automatically. Otherwise,
click Probe Source Points in the pane.
6. On the physical part, probe the same six points

using the same order.
As the points are probed, the probing device is
more closely aligned to the Reference object
providing a better visual context.
131
7. If the probed points are not precise enough to

fall within the radial tolerance of the reference
location, a message box offers the possibility of
reprobing the points that are out of tolerance.
Visual and audio guidance are provided to
remeasure those points. The points can be
reprobed in any order.
Results
The new data alignment is added to the The probed data points are aligned to the
alignment group of the Data object. same locations on the Reference object.
132
Best-fitting measurement objects

The Best-Fit Measurement Objects alignment method is
used to improve workflows in the aerospace and
automotive industries. This method aligns the measured
component of a measurement object to the corresponding
nominal component.
The following table indicates the possible alignment

techniques based on the types of measurement objects
used.
Measurement objects Alignment technique
Point-reducible features: Aligns objects by matching the center point of a measured

component to the center point of the corresponding
Circles, slots, ellipses,
nominal component.
spheres, arcs duplicated
in 3D, polygons,
rectangles, points
Surface features Aligns objects by matching the measured data points to

the corresponding nominal component.
Plane features
Cylinder features
Cone features
Pattern features Adds all features of the pattern to the alignment pane and
aligns the objects based on the children feature types.
Comparison points Aligns the data points to the nominal component along the
surface normal (surface comparison points) or along the
edge vector (trimmed edge or hemmed edge comparison
points).
Point-reducible features can also be paired. A number of combinations are possible. They can
be paired with another point-reducible feature, a line feature, a cylinder axis, a cone axis, or a
plane feature.
133
Objective: Align a Data object to a Reference object using a Best-Fit Measurement Objects
alignment.
Required: The Data object should be prealigned to the Reference object. The objects used
for the alignment must contain nominal and measured components.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the objects that will be

used for the alignment.
2. Choose Align > Best-Fit Measurement Objects.

The Best-Fit Measurement Objects dialog box
opens, as well as the Best-Fit Measurement
Objects - Setup and Results pane.
The selected objects are automatically added
in the pane.
3. In the pane, specify the alignment direction

(X, Y, Z) for each object.
4. If necessary, click Add Objects and choose

Add.
An empty line is added, and the edit dialog
opens automatically.
5. In the Measurement object list, choose the

object that will be added.
6. Click elsewhere in the interface.
Alternatively, drag and drop measured
measurement objects from the Tree View into the
pane to add them to the alignment.
134
In the Best-Fit Measurement Objects dialog box:
7. Specify the Max number of iterations. The

alignment stops when this number is reached.
8. Specify the Max displacement target used to
stop the alignment. When all objects move less
than the Max displacement target between
iterations, then the alignment stops.
9. Click Start.
As the alignment converges to a solution,
statistics are displayed in the Statistics section.
As long as the dialog box is not closed, it is

possible to make modifications to the alignment
parameters and objects. The results are updated
automatically.
Once the dialog box is closed, the alignment can
be edited by right-clicking the alignment in the
Tree View, and choosing Edit Alignment (see
Editing the alignment parameters on page 137).
Results
The new data alignment is added to the The Data object is aligned to the Reference
alignment group of the Data object. object using the specified measurement
objects.
Statistics for each object are displayed in the pane.
135
Notes
• Surface features with non compensated points can be used in this alignment.
• Point-reducible cross-section features can be used in this alignment if they are duplicated
in 3D.
• In the More section, the Scale to minimize 3D deviations parameter enables the scaling
of all available Data objects and the measured components in order to minimize the
3D deviations between the nominal components and the measured components used for
alignment. This is useful in compensating for temperature variations when measuring
Data objects that span over 10 meters.
Understanding the Best-Fit Measurement Objects - Setup

and Results pane
The Best-Fit Measurement Objects pane is used to specify the objects that will be used for the
alignment and to set the alignment parameters. It features a vertical toolbar and a table area
to configure the alignment.
Column
header Vertical
toolbar
Table
area
Column header
Names of the different columns displayed in the pane.
136
Vertical toolbar
Add Objects
Menu button that allows adding objects to the alignment or adding objects
already selected in the Tree View to the alignment.
Edit Objects
Menu button that allows modifying the Use axes, Weight, and Use to
compute scaling factor parameters of the selected objects.
Remove Objects
Removes the selected object from the alignment.
Automatic Update
The alignment automatically updates when a change is made in the pane.

This menu button allows disabling the automatic update. It also allows
manually launching the update of the alignment.
Report
Allows creating a report table of the alignment.
Table area
The table area presents the list of objects used for the alignment, their alignment directions
and their statistics (once the alignment is created).
Note
It is possible to customize the pane. For example, it is possible to show more columns and to
reorder them.
Editing the alignment parameters

Objective: Edit the Best-Fit Measurement Objects alignment.
Required: The project contains a Best-Fit Measurement Objects alignment.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the data alignment.
137
2. Right-click and choose Edit Alignment.

The Best-Fit Measurement Objects dialog box
and the Best-Fit Measurement Objects - Setup
and Results pane open.
3. Make the necessary modifications, such as
modifying the axes used for the alignment and
the weight of an object.
4. Click Apply.
Results
The results are updated automatically and displayed in the Best-Fit Measurement Objects -
Setup and Results pane.
Before
After
Changing the objects used for the alignment

It is possible to change the objects used for the alignment. Objects can be deleted, added, or
changed.
In the Best-Fit Measurement Objects - Setup and

Results pane:
• Select an object and remove it using the
Remove Objects button.
138
• Add an object using the Add Objects

button. Alternatively, drag and drop
measured objects from the Tree View into
the pane.
• Replace an object by clicking the edit

shortcut arrow that corresponds to the
object to be modified.
139
Changing the pairing of feature components

By default, this alignment method matches measured components to their nominal
components. It is possible to customize the pairing and align a measured component to
another measured component. This is especially useful for virtual assemblies of parts.
Steps
In the Best-Fit Measurement Objects - Setup and Results pane:
1. Click the edit shortcut arrow adjacent to the

object to be modified.
The contextual dialog box opens.
2. Select Pair of feature primitives.

3. In the Source list, specify the source
component.
4. In the Destination list, specify the destination
component.
Source components are moved to destination
components.
140
Aligning with features

This approach consists in creating features whose nominal primitives are created on the
Reference object, and whose measured primitives are created on the Data object. Then, the
measured primitives are aligned to the nominal primitives, transforming the position and the
in-space orientation of the Data object.
There are several feature-based alignment methods:
Plane, Axis, Center Point
Perpendicular Planes
Alternatively, the Plane, Axis, Center Point and the Perpendicular Planes methods can also
align the Data object to standard axes. Measured primitives created on the Data object are
aligned to standard planes, standard axes, and a coordinate along the axes.
Distinct characteristics of planar features, direction-based features, and center-point-based

features allow using them for alignment methods:
• Planar features: planes, circles, arcs, ellipses, polygons, rectangles, slots, and slabs.
• Direction-based features: circles, arcs, cones, cylinders, ellipses, polygons, rectangles,
slots, and lines, but not planes.
• Center-point-based features: circles, arcs, ellipses, points, polygons, rectangles, slots,
and spheres. They are also called point-reducible features.
141
Aligning using a plane-axis-point approach

The Plane, Axis, Center Point alignment method is used to align Data objects to Reference
objects using pairs of planar, direction-based, and center-point-based features. Generally, the
measured component of a feature is assigned as the source object while its nominal
component is assigned as the destination object.
Objective: Align a Data object to a Reference object using a Plane, Axis, Center Point
alignment.
Required: The project contains a Data object and a Reference object, as well as a planar
feature, a direction-based feature (except planes), and a center-point-based
feature, each containing a nominal and a measured component.
Steps
1. Choose Align > Feature-Based > Plane, Axis,

Center Point.
The Align Plane, Axis, Center Point dialog box
opens.
2. In the Sequence list, select Plane, Axis, Center

Point.
3. Specify a planar feature, a direction-based

feature, and a center-point-based feature that
will be used for the alignment.
The Source object is the measured feature
component, while the Destination is the nominal
feature component. The measured components
are moved to the nominal locations.
Click the Pick button to the right of each list box
to pick the source and destination objects directly
in the 3D scene.
4. Click Confirm.
142
Results
alignment group of the Data object. object using the features.
Notes
• If no nominal feature component has been defined, standard system planes, axes, and
coordinates can be specified in the Destination list box.
• Sometimes, a partial alignment can be performed. If only one or two features are used for
the alignment, the remaining parameters can be left blank. Make sure that the Sequence
chosen begins with the type of feature used for the partial alignment.
143
Aligning using perpendicular planes

The Perpendicular Planes alignment method aligns the Data
object to the Reference object by matching three plane features.
The planes must intersect each other in space.
Objective: Align a Data object to a Reference object using a

Perpendicular Planes alignment.
Required: A Reference object, a Data object and three

perpendicular plane features with nominal and
measured components.
Steps
1. Choose Align > Feature-Based > Perpendicular

Planes.
The Align Perpendicular Planes dialog box
opens.
2. In the lists, select the planes that will be used

for the alignment. The measured components
should be in the Source column.
When a measured component is selected in the

Source column, the corresponding nominal
component is automatically specified in the
Destination list. The user can select another
component in the Destination list, if desired.
The order in which planes are specified is
important. The first plane is the primary plane
and has precedence over the second and third
planes when aligning.
3. Click Align, then click Done.
144
Results
alignment group of the Data object. object using three perpendicular planes.
Notes
When no Destination components exist, the

alignment can be performed using planes
obtained from standard axes and positions.
145
Aligning with reference targets

Reference targets are points or lines that can be used to
constrain an alignment along a specified direction. They are
commonly found in sheet metal part drawings as well as mold
and die drawings, in which specific coordinates on the part are
established and directions along the standard axes are defined
to align the part.
Typically, reference targets are created on the Reference

object. Once they are in the desired position, measurements
for the reference targets are obtained and a reference target
alignment can be performed.
Introducing reference targets

There are two types of reference targets: points and lines.
Reference target points

They are positioned at precise
coordinates, and align the Data
object along the alignment direc-
tions.
Reference target lines

They are created from line
features, and constrain the
alignment along a pin or shank
edge.
146
There are three subtypes of reference target points: surface, feature, and cross-section.
Surface reference target points

coordinates on Reference object
surfaces. When performing the
alignment, the distance from the
measured point on the Data
object to the target is minimized
according to the specified
alignment directions.
Feature reference target

points
They are created from precise
coordinates of the Reference
object, and are associated with
individual features, such as a
circle, a slot, or a plane. When
performing the alignment, the
distance to the feature is
minimized according to the
specified alignment directions.
Cross-section reference target

points

coordinates on Reference object
surfaces, and are associated with
cross-sections. When performing
the alignment, the distance from
a measured point on the cross-
section to the target is
minimized.
147
Creating reference target points
Creating surface reference target points

Objective: Create surface reference target points using specific coordinates on the part.
Required: A Data object, a Reference object, and coordinates for target locations.
Steps
1. Choose Measure > Reference Targets > Create >

Surface Points.
The Create Surface Reference Target Points
dialog box opens.
2. In the Method list, select Numerically to

specify coordinates.
3. Use the coordinates provided on the part
drawing to define the target Point location.
The target can be projected onto the Reference
object surface along an axis. Instead of entering
the third coordinate, select Project and choose
the projection axis.
4. Set the Normal direction of the point. If the
Automatic option is enabled, the normal
direction of the surface point is calculated
automatically from the surface normal of the
Reference object.
5. Set the Alignment direction of the target
point. It can be set to Automatic, Point
Normal, +X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z, -Z, or XYZ direction.
6. Click Create.
148
Results
The new surface reference targets are added The reference targets are displayed in the
to the Tree View, under the Reference Targets 3D scene.
branch.
surf target pt 3 surf target pt 1
surf target pt 2
Notes
The surface reference targets can be set as datum targets and be used as part of a Datum
Reference Frame of a GD&T control. For more information on datum targets, see Defining
datum targets on page 497.
Creating feature reference target points

Objective: Create feature reference target points using features on the part.
Required: A Data object and a Reference object. The part must have measurable features.
Steps
1. Choose Measure > Reference Targets > Create >

Feature Points.
The Create Feature Reference Target Points
dialog box opens.
149
2. In the Method list, select From Feature

Creation to create a new feature for the
reference target.
3. Choose a Feature type, such as a circle feature.
4. Specify the Alignment directions to be

constrained by the feature.
It can be any combination of X, Y, and Z.
5. Click Create.
The feature creation dialog box opens.
6. In the Method list, select a feature creation

method such as Pick on CAD Model.
7. Click Pick.
8. In the 3D scene, pick the feature on the CAD

model.
Result
The new feature reference targets and their The feature reference targets are displayed in
associated features are added to the Tree the 3D scene.
View.
ftr target pt 2
ftr target pt 1
150
Measuring reference targets

Reference targets can be extracted from scanned data. The Data object must be closely
aligned to the Reference object for the reference target measurement to be successful.
Objective: Measure the reference targets by extracting them.
Required: The project contains a Data object, a Reference object, and surface or feature
reference target points. The Data object must be prealigned to the Reference
object.
Steps
1. Select the reference targets in the Tree View.
2. Choose Measure > Extract Measured.

Note the following:
• Feature reference targets are measured by
measuring their associated features.
• Surface reference targets are measured, but
they will also be remeasured throughout the
alignment operation. See Aligning using
reference targets on page 153.
151
Results
The reference targets and features The reference targets show the current
associated to feature reference targets are deviation between the Data object and the
measured. Reference object in the specified alignment
directions.
Notes
• Feature reference targets can also be measured by probing the associated features.
152
Aligning using reference targets

Reference targets can be used in a reference target alignment. A combination of surface and
feature reference targets can be used for the alignment of Data objects.
Surface reference target points can be used as datum targets for use in Datum Reference
Frame alignments (see Defining datum targets on page 497).
Align using surface and feature reference targets

Objective: Align the Data object to the Reference object using reference targets.
Required: The project contains a Data object, a Reference object, and surface or feature
reference target points. The Data object must be prealigned to the Reference
object.
Steps
1. Select the reference targets in the Tree View.
2. Choose Align > Reference Targets > Align.

The Align Reference Targets dialog box opens.
3. The preselected reference targets are

automatically selected in the Reference
targets area.
4. Select or clear reference targets as desired.
Only selected reference targets are used for the
alignment.
5. Click Start.
If there are unmeasured targets, they will be
measured before the alignment starts. As for
surface reference targets, they will be remeasured
throughout the alignment operation.
153
Results
alignment group of the Data object. object using the reference targets.
Align using surface and feature reference targets by probing

Objective: Align the Data object to the Reference object by probing using reference targets.
Required: A Reference object, a physical part, surface or feature reference target points, and
a probing device.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the reference target

points.
2. Choose Align > Reference Targets > Align by

Probing.
The Align Reference Targets by Probing pane
opens.
154
3. The selected reference target points are listed

in the pane.
4. Click the Probe Measured button.
5. Probe the surface reference target points and

features associated to the feature reference
target points, as guided.
Results
The new data alignment is added to the Tree The Data object is aligned to the Reference
View. The reference targets and the features object using reference target points.
associated to the feature reference targets
are measured.
155
Notes
• For point features, a radial tolerance is used; it is possible to reprobe points that are out of
the radial tolerance.
• The feature type can be specified in the Align Reference Targets by Probing pane if not
already linked to a feature.
156
Aligning with Datum Reference Frames

A Datum Reference Frame (DRF) is a reference that serves to
orient and locate objects in space. A DRF can be composed of
datum features with nominal and measured primitives. The
DRF alignment aligns Data objects (using the measured
primitives) to Reference objects (using the nominal
primitives). It can also be composed of datum targets. A DRF
used by a Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T)
control serves to orient and locate tolerance zones.
Align using a Datum Reference Frame

Objective: Align the Data object to the Reference object using a DRF.
Required: The PolyWorks|Inspector project contains a Data object and a Reference object,
as well as datum features and/or datum targets, each containing a nominal and a
measured component.
Steps
1. Choose Align > Datum Reference Frame > Align.

The Align Datum Reference Frame dialog box
opens.
2. Choose an existing DRF from the list.

DRFs used in any GD&T controls are listed
automatically.
3. To add a new DRF, under Creation, select

datum features using the lists.
4. Click Create.
The new DRF is added to the Datum reference
frames list.
5. Select a DRF from the list, then click Align.
To be used in a DRF, a feature must have a datum

feature label. The datum feature label can be
specified on the Feature tab of a features
property sheet.
157
To be used in a DRF, a reference target must have

a datum target label. The datum target label can
be specified on the Reference target tab of a
reference target's property sheet.
Results
alignment group of the Data object. object using the datum features.
Notes
When datum features are specified in a GD&T control, the Datum Reference Frame alignment
is applied virtually for the calculation – the Data object does not need to be actually aligned to
the Reference object. However, the alignment used by a GD&T control can be visualized using
the Feature Navigator tool.
158
Align a Datum Reference Frame by probing

Objective: Align the Data object to the Reference object by probing the datum features and
the datum targets linked to a Datum Reference Frame.
Required: The PolyWorks|Inspector project contains a Data object and a Reference object,
as well as datum features and/or datum targets.
Steps
1. Choose Align > Datum Reference Frame > Align

by Probing.
The Align Datum Reference Frame by Probing
pane opens.
2. Choose an existing DRF from the drop-down

list.
DRFs used in any GD&T controls are listed
automatically.
3. To add a new DRF, click on the Create Datum
Reference Frame button located next to the
drop-down list.
4. The involved datum features and datum targets
are listed in the pane.
5. Click the Probe Measured button.
6. Probe the features and targets, as guided.

The order in which the datums are probed is
based on their order in the Datum Reference
Frame.
159
Results
alignment group of the Data object. The object using the A B C Datum Reference
datum features and datum targets are Frame.
measured.
Notes
• For datum target points, a radial tolerance is used; it is possible to reprobe points that are
out of the radial tolerance.
160
Aligning surface Data objects to each other using

surface information
When scanning a part, it is sometimes impossible to capture all
the surfaces without moving the scanning device or changing the
part position relative to the scanning device. This generates one
surface Data object for each different setup used. If the device
positions are not already aligned, it is possible to align these
surface Data objects to one another. The alignment uses the areas
that overlap with neighboring surface Data objects.
Align Data objects to Data objects one at a time

This method aligns one set of Data objects to a fixed set of Data objects. First, a prealignment
is done by the user by picking matching points. Then, a best-fit alignment is performed using
the surface shape in the overlying regions.
Objective: Align one set of surface Data objects to a fixed set of Data objects.
Required: Two or more surface Data objects with sufficient overlapping data to guarantee a
proper alignment.
Steps

Data Objects.
The Best-Fit Data to Data Objects dialog box
opens.
2. Specify a Name for the data alignment.

3. Select the Align Data Objects method.
4. The Prealign using point pairs check box is
selected by default.
5. In the Data objects to align list, select the Data
objects that will be aligned.
6. In the Fixed data objects list, select Other
Data Objects.
Fixed Data objects do not move for the alignment.
7. Specify a Max distance.
The maximum distance is used by the best-fit
alignment to find overlapping areas.
161
8. In the Subsampling list, select 1/1.

Here, all points are used to refine the best-fit
alignment but with a longer computing time. The
default value is 1/4.
9. Click Start.
The Prealign using Point Pairs dialog box opens.
Fixed Data objects and the Data objects that will
be aligned are displayed in separate viewports.
10. Move both the fixed Data object (left) and the
Data object that will be aligned (right) to give
them a similar orientation.
This facilitates the picking of pairs of points.
11. Choose the N Point Pairs prealignment

method.
12. Click Pick to enable an interactive picking

mode.
13. Anchor at least three matching points on both

objects, using the same order. It is 3 3
1 1
recommended to anchor four or five pairs of
matching points. The matching points are
displayed using the same color and the same
number. 2 2
14. Right-click to finish the operation.
The best-fit alignment is automatically performed

after the prealignment.
As the alignment converges to a solution, results
162
Results
A new data alignment is added to the The surface Data objects are aligned to each
alignment group of the aligned Data objects. other in the 3D scene.
Notes
When there are three Data objects or more, and once they are aligned together using a best-fit
Data to Data Objects alignment, it is possible to optimize the alignment between all the Data
objects, using surface information, through the Globally Optimize Alignments method.
163
Globally optimizing the alignments of all Data objects

When scanning parts in multiple device positions, a new scanned Data object is produced in
each device position and then aligned to the Data objects from previous device positions using
the best-fit Data to Data Objects functionality. When three or more Data objects from different
device positions are present, the alignment of all Data objects can be optimized using the
Globally Optimize Alignments method to ensure the best results in terms of alignment
between the scanned Data objects. Typically, this method should be used in the last device
position.
Objective: Optimize the alignment of all the Data objects.
Required: Three or more Data objects from different device positions are in the project and
already aligned using the Best-Fit Data to Data Objects alignment.
Steps

Data Objects.
The Best-Fit Data to Data Objects dialog box
opens.
2. Specify the Globally Optimize Alignments

method.
3. Specify a Name for the data alignment.
4. In the Data objects to align list, select All.

The maximum distance is used by the best-fit
alignment to find overlapping areas.
6. In the Subsampling list, select 1/1.

Here, all points are used to refine the best-fit
alignment but with a longer computing time.
7. Click Start.
As the alignment converges to a solution, results

164
Results
A new data alignment is added to the The surface Data objects are aligned in the
alignment group of the aligned Data objects. 3D scene, and their alignment is globally
optimized.
165
Coordinate systems
Cartesian
Cylindrical
Spherical
166
Introducing coordinate systems

A coordinate system describes the origin and orientation of an inspection project.
Three types of coordinate systems are supported by PolyWorks|Inspector:
• Cartesian
• Cylindrical
• Spherical
PolyWorks|Inspector projects come with a default coordinate system called “world”. It

corresponds to the standard Cartesian coordinate system (x, y, z), whose origin is located at
0, 0, 0.
Multiple coordinate systems are useful for users who need to work in a specific frame of
reference for the purpose of visualizing and reporting information. New coordinate systems
can be created. They appear under the Coordinate Systems branch of the Tree View, and are
represented in the 3D scene as an origin and three axes. Only one coordinate system can be
active at a time.
In the 3D scene
The active coordinate system is displayed using red,
green, and blue for the X, Y, and Z axes respectively.
The world coordinate system is easily identifiable since
it has a gray cube at its origin.
Coordinate systems that are not active are displayed in

gray.
Using a new coordinate system

When a coordinate system is activated, the following occurs:
• All objects are represented in the new coordinate system, regardless of their status.
• All measurement results are transformed in order to be aligned in the new coordinate
system. Measurement results remain valid.
• The numerical values of object properties related to location and orientation are
expressed in the active coordinate system. Default values, for example in the object
creation dialog boxes, do not change.
• Objects are exported in the active coordinate system.
• The bounding box of the 3D scene is recalculated. This can influence the creation of
certain primitives, like a plane primitive created numerically, or certain dependent
primitives that are created using the bounding box.
167
Understanding the coordinates of a point

Cartesian coordinates of a point are represented by x, y
and z values based on three mutually perpendicular X,
Y, Z axes.
The cylindrical coordinates of a (x, y, z) point are

represented by a trio of radius, azimuthal angle, and
height values calculated according to the following
convention:
The radius value (r) represents the distance from the

origin along the X-Y plane.
The azimuthal angle value (a) represents the angle with

respect to the positive X direction, calculated within the
X-Y plane according to the right-hand rule. This angle
ranges from 0 to 360 degrees.
The height value (h) represents the distance from the

origin along the cylindrical axis (or Z axis).
The spherical coordinates of a (x, y, z) point are

represented by a trio of radius, azimuthal angle, and
inclination angle values calculated according to the
following convention:
The radius value ( ) represents the distance from the

origin.
The azimuthal angle value ( ) represents the angle with

respect to the positive direction, calculated within the
X-Y plane according to the right-hand rule. This angle
ranges from 0 to 360 degrees.
The inclination angle value ( ) represents the angle

with respect to the vertical axis (or positive Z axis). This
angle ranges from 0 to 180 degrees.
168
Creating and activating coordinate systems

PolyWorks|Inspector projects come with a default coordinate
system called “world”. New coordinate systems can be created as
well from feature primitives, from translations and rotations, or
numerically. When a new coordinate system is created, it is
automatically activated.
As shown to the right, the active coordinate system is displayed

using red, green, and blue for the X, Y, and Z axes respectively.
Objective: Create a new coordinate system using feature primitives to define the origin and
orientation.
Required: Features whose geometric properties (ex. center point, normal) can be used to
describe the origin and orientation of the coordinate system.
Steps
1. Choose Tools > Coordinate Systems > Create

Cartesian.
The Create Cartesian Coordinate Systems
dialog box opens.
2. In the Method list, select From Primitives.
3. In the Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary lists,

select the primitives that define the coordinate
system.
Optionally, click the hand icon and pick the
primitives in the 3D scene.
4. In the 3D scene, clicking the colored arrow on

an axis rotates the other axes around it by
90 degrees, thereby changing their direction.
5. In the Create Cartesian Coordinate Systems

dialog box, click Create to confirm the new
coordinate system.
169
Tips
All coordinate systems are listed as objects in

the Tree View. The active coordinate system is
displayed in bold in the Tree View, and in color
in the 3D scene. To activate a coordinate
system, right-click it in the Tree View and
choose Activate.
Results
The new coordinate system is added to the The new coordinate system is displayed in
Tree View, under the Coordinate Systems the 3D scene.
branch. It is named csys by default.
170
Notes
• When the creation method is set to

Numerically, the exact origin and axis of
the coordinate system can be specified. No
Reference object or feature primitives are
required.
• When the creation method is set to From

Translation and Rotation, the origin and
axes can be offset from the active
coordinate system position by entering
specific values. No Reference object or
feature primitives are required.
171
Measuring
dimensions and
deviations
Introducing measurement objects in

PolyWorks|Inspector
PolyWorks|Inspector is an object-oriented analysis and verification environment. All items
imported or created in PolyWorks|Inspector are objects, and PolyWorks|Inspector preserves
the relational correspondence of these objects throughout the inspection process.
Measurement objects
Measurements are done through the use of measurement objects: data color maps, features,
cross-sections, comparison points, and gauges. These objects can be measured, remeasured,
updated, and reported. Measurement objects obtain results by calculating the deviation
between nominal components, derived from a Reference object, and measured components,
derived from a Data object. The components of feature and cross-section measurement
objects can be displayed by expanding the objects in the Tree View, while the components of
comparison points and gauges are contained within the objects themselves. A measured
status icon is displayed in the Tree View for objects that have been successfully measured. For
color maps, the measured status icon indicates that the color map is valid.
A simple feature has a nominal and a The nominal and the measured component
measured component. of a cross-section can be represented by
several children, depending on the number
of Reference and Data objects encountered
by its slicing plane.
Measured status icon

A ruler icon indicates the measured status of objects in the Tree View. The color of the icon
specifies whether or not the controls associated with the object are within tolerance:
All controls are within tolerance.
At least one control is within the warning limit.
At least one control is out-of-tolerance. This status has priority over the warning
status.
173
The in-tolerance status is unknown for at least one control (for example, the
measurement object is not controlled, or one of its controls is in error). This status
has priority over all other statuses.
The Display > Tree View options page offers the Show in-tolerance status on
measurement objects option, used to enable or disable the display of the in-tolerance
status. When disabled, only the measured status is displayed (white ruler).
Automatic project update

The automatic project update is an option that keeps objects up-to-date by recalculating
measured values as related objects are modified. By propagating changes throughout the
inspection project, the coherence of the inspection project is always maintained. For more
information, see Automatic project update on page 662.
174
Data color maps
Surface
Boundary
Primitives
Thickness
Clearance
175
Measuring deviations using data color maps

Data color maps are measurement tools to measure the
deviation of Data objects from the surfaces or boundaries of
Reference objects, or from primitives or other objects. A
deviation is calculated for each data point, or for just
selected data points, of the Data object. The deviations are
displayed in the 3D scene using a color map and can also be
presented in report form (table). Color map display options
are available to configure the color scale and the color
mapping to get a specific result, like a pass/fail
representation.
Data color map types

Data color maps are available on the Measure menu or on the Data Color Maps toolbar:
Data object deviations from

Reference object surfaces

Reference object boundaries

feature primitives
176
Data object thickness
Data object thickness
Understanding key parameters

Parameters are offered for the creation of data color maps. Possible values vary according to
the type of data color map. Here are some key parameters:
Direction
Select a direction along which deviations are measured. Possible values are illustrated below.
They vary according to the type of data color map.
Tangent to Boundary
Along the axis (X axis) Shortest to

Normal to
Boundary
Boundary
Shortest
Along the axis
(Y axis)
177
Reference objects
Choose the Reference objects that are taken into
consideration for the measurement. Possible values
are:
• All: Considers all non-ignored Reference objects.

• Specific: Considers only specific Reference objects; specify them in the list box offered.
• Selected Elements: Considers only the selected elements of Reference objects.
Data objects
Choose which Data objects are taken into
consideration for the measurement. Possible values
are:
• Surface: Considers all surface Data objects, which

includes point clouds and polygonal models.
• Boundary: Considers all boundary Data objects, such as boundary point clouds.
• All: Considers all non-ignored Data objects.
• Specific: Considers only specific Data objects; select them in the list box offered.
• Selected Elements: Considers only the selected elements of Data objects.
Max distance
To speed up calculations, a maximum search distance is
considered to find the deviations of the Data object
from the Reference object. The default value is 4 mm
and no deviation larger than 4 mm is detected. If high deviations occur on a part, ensure that
the Max distance is larger than the expected deviations so as to measure all deviations.
Max angle
In the Filtering section, the Max angle parameter is
enabled by default. This parameter acts as a filter to
ensure that the normal of each considered data
element has a normal compatible with the reference
surfaces or the feature from which the deviations are
measured. The angular deviation between the two
normals must be smaller than the specified Max
angle.
If the part is highly deformed, it may be necessary to

disable this parameter which allows data elements to
be considered regardless of their normal direction.
178
Measuring deviations from surfaces

The deviations of Data objects from Reference object surfaces
can be measured. The results are displayed in the 3D scene by
means of a data color map, as shown to the right.
The procedure used to measure deviations is explained below.

For information on the key parameters, see Understanding key
parameters on page 177.
Objective: Obtain the deviations of a Data object from the

surface of a Reference object.
Required: The project contains a Data object and a Reference object. The Data object must
be aligned to the Reference object.
Steps
1. Choose Measure > Deviations of Data Objects >

From Reference Object Surfaces.
The Measure Deviations from Surfaces
dialog box opens.
2. In the Direction list, select the measurement

direction (Shortest, typically).
3. In the Reference objects and Data objects
lists, select the objects that will be measured.
5. Click Measure.
Results
The data color map is added to the Tree View, The color-mapped object is displayed in the
under the Data Color Maps branch. 3D scene.
179
Notes
• To hide the display of the active data color

map, click Hide Color Map.
• To edit the color scale, choose View > Edit Color

Scale. Conversion to colors, scale type, and
range limits can be edited in the dialog box.
• Once created, it is possible to access and edit the color map creation parameters if needed
using its property sheet. Select the object in the Tree View and choose Edit > Object
Properties.
180
Measuring deviations from boundaries

The perimeter of a Data object (usually boundary Data
type point clouds) can be compared to the perimeter of a
Reference object by measuring each data point to the
open boundary edges of the Reference object. Deviations
can be measured along the shortest, normal or tangent
distance to the boundary. The results are displayed in the
3D scene by means of a data color map, as shown to the
right.
The procedure used to measure deviations is explained below. For information on the key
parameters, see Understanding key parameters on page 177.
Objective: Measure the deviation of the measured data points from the open boundaries of
the Reference object, generating a data color map.
Required: The project contains a Data object as well as a Reference object with open
boundaries. The Data object must be aligned to the Reference object.
Steps
1. Choose Measure > Deviations of Data Objects >

From Reference Object Boundaries.
The Measure Deviations from Boundaries
dialog box opens.
2. In the Direction list, select a direction of

measurement (Shortest to Boundary
typically).
3. In the Reference objects and Data objects

lists, select the objects that will be measured.
4. Specify the Max distance.
5. Click Measure.
181
Results
The new data color map is added to the Tree The color-mapped object is displayed in the
View, under the Data Color Maps branch. 3D scene.
Notes
• A Reference object with open boundaries implies the presence of surface discontinuities in
which case the model does not define a closed volume. In the following examples, a
Reference object is illustrated with both types of boundaries: open and closed.
Open boundaries Closed boundaries


Properties.
182
Measuring deviations from feature primitives

The shape of a Data object can be compared to a geometric
feature, such as a plane or a cylinder, by measuring each data
point to a feature primitive. The results are displayed in the 3D
scene by means of a data color map, as shown to the right.
The procedure used to measure deviations is explained below.

For information on the key parameters, see Understanding key
Objective: Measure the deviations of the measured data points from feature primitives,
which generates a data color map.
Required: The project contains a Data object and a feature primitive, which are aligned.
Steps
1. Choose Measure> Deviations of Data Objects >

From Feature Primitives.
The Measure Deviations from Feature
Primitives dialog box opens.
2. In the Direction list, select the measurement

direction.
3. In the Primitives list, select the primitives that

will be used.
4. In the Data objects list, select the Data objects

that will be used.
6. Click Measure.
183
Results
The data color map is added to the Tree View The color-mapped object is displayed in the
Notes


range limits can be edited in the interface.
Properties.
184
Measuring the thickness of a part

The thickness of thin-walled parts can be measured by matching each data point to an
opposing surface that has an opposite orientation. A data color map is generated on the Data
object to illustrate the deviations. If the project contains a Reference object, it is also possible
to measure the deviation between Data object thicknesses and Reference object thicknesses
at similar locations. The Data object must be aligned to the Reference object.
The procedure used to measure the thickness of a part is explained below. For information on
the key parameters, see Understanding key parameters on page 177.
Objective: Calculate the thickness of a Data object.
Steps
1. Choose Measure > Thickness of Data Objects.

The Measure Thickness of Data Objects dialog
box opens.
2. In the Data objects list, select the Data objects.

The distance should be at least as large as the
width of the thickest wall that will be measured.
4. If the Data object is a point cloud, select
Sampling step which ensures smooth,
continuous shading.
A smaller sampling step results in finer
measurement details, while a larger sampling step
speeds up the operation.
5. Click Measure.
Results
The data color map is added to the Tree View, The color-mapped Data object is displayed in
under the Data Color Maps branch. the 3D scene.
185
Notes


Properties.
• Optionally, a Reference object can be used for thickness comparison purposes. In this
case, the data color map displays either the measured thickness, the nominal thickness, or
the deviation between the two thicknesses. In all cases, the data color map is displayed on
the Data object.
1. In the Measure Thickness of Data Objects

dialog box, select Compute nominal and
deviation.
2. Specify a value for the Reference objects,

Max distance, and Max angle parameters.
3. Click the Object Display Options menu

button on the 3D scene toolbar.
4. In the Thickness color mode list, under Data

color maps, select Nominal, Measured, or
Deviation.
186
Measuring the clearance between parts

When two or more Data objects have been aligned to each other,
the clearance between these objects can then be measured. The
resulting data color map illustrates gaps or interference between
the objects. This information can be used to adjust their position.
The procedure used to measure the clearance between parts is

explained below. For information on the key parameters, see
Understanding key parameters on page 177.
Objective: Measure the clearance between several Data objects.
Required: The project contains two or more Data objects that have been previously aligned
to each other.
Steps
1. Choose Measure > Clearance between Data

Objects.
The Measure Clearance between Data Objects
dialog box opens.
All nonignored polygonal Data objects are
considered for the clearance operation.
2. Choose the measurement method, either for

measuring objects between themselves or to
master objects only.
If a master object is used, it becomes the focus of
the measurement and all other Data objects are
measured only to it.
3. When the thickness of a part is known and only

one side of the part was scanned, specify a
Thickness to take into account the other side
of the part.
4. Specify a Max distance and a Max angle.
5. Click Measure.
187
Results
The data color map is added to the Tree View, The color-mapped object is displayed in the
Notes


range limits can be edited in the interface.
Properties.
188
Changing the color map display

The color scale controls the way measured deviations are converted to colors in color maps.
PolyWorks|Inspector provides many predefined color scales, and an interface that allows
customizing them.
Objective: View a color map using different color scales.
Required: A project contains an active data color map.
Steps
1. Choose View > Edit Color Scale.

The Edit Color Scale dialog box opens.
2. In the Conversion to colors list, select a

method. The following methods are available:
• Auto Range assigns a predefined range of
colors to the range of color map values.
• Use Customized Scale assigns colors based
on a specific range of values.
• Use Object Tolerances assigns colors based
on the pass/fail status of data points.
3. In the Scale type list, select a predefined type.

4. To create a custom color scale, click Add to
create a completely new color scale, or click
Edit to modify an existing color scale.
5. Edit the Range limits parameters, if using the
Auto Range conversion to colors, to display the
desired range of deviation values.
6. Click Apply.
189
Results
If the Auto Range method is specified, the If the Use Object Tolerances method is
range of deviations is displayed as a specified, the deviations are displayed as
continuous map, with minimum and passing or failing the tolerance test, based on
maximum values defined in the Range the tolerance associated with the Reference
limits. object.
Notes

• Choose Tools > Options > Display > Color Maps

for additional color map display settings, such
as the use of deviation vectors and how color
mapping can be applied to both Data and
Reference objects.
• Minimum and maximum deviations can be

displayed on a data color map. To view them,
select Identify min and max values, available
on the Display tab of the property sheet of the
data color map.
190
Displaying data point deviations on a data color map

The deviation value of any data point on a data color map can be displayed using an
annotation. Annotations can be created interactively by clicking the model and then
repositioning them for better viewing. Annotation values can also be reported in a table.
Objective: Place annotations on the data color map, showing individual data point
deviations, and report them.
Required: The project contains a Data object aligned to a Reference object, and an active
data color map.
Steps
1. Choose Tools > Annotations > Create > Color

Map Point Annotations.
An interactive picking mode is launched.
2. Hover the pointer over the color map in the

3D scene to temporarily display the deviation of
the closest data point.
3. Click the color map to create the annotation,

which shows the deviation of the data point.
Right-click to exit the mode.
4. For a clearer display, or for snapshot purposes,

the annotations can be dragged. Choose Tools >
Annotations > Position.
• Press Spacebar to temporarily exit the mode
and perform rotations/translations.
• Press ESC to exit the mode.
5. Choose View > Hide > All Color Map Point
Annotations to control the visibility of the
annotations.
6. Choose Report > Create Tables > From All Color

Map Point Annotations of Active Data Color
Map to report the annotations.
191
Tip
Tools to delete, hide, and restore annotations are also

accessible using the down arrow next to the Create
Color Map Point Annotations button.
Results
Individual data point deviations are displayed Data point annotations are added to a table
using annotations in the 3D scene. for reporting.
192
Features
Points Cylinders
Lines Cones
Planes Spheres
Circles Surfaces
Arcs Slabs
Slots Polylines
Rectangles Patterns
Polygons Distances
Ellipses Angles
193
Defining part geometry using features

Features define geometric characteristics of a part, such as holes and planar surfaces, and are
typically used for part alignment and dimensional inspection purposes.
A feature typically contains a nominal and/or a measured component, also referred to as

primitives. The nominal primitive represents the theoretical or ideal measurement, such as
that found on a CAD model. The measured primitive is created from data points measured on
the actual part being inspected.
Features are available on the Measure > Features menu or on the Features toolbar.
Feature types
Features can be categorized as follows:
Individual features Features containing a nominal and/or a measured primitive.

Individual features can be categorized by their geometrical
properties. The most common categories are:
Surface-based:
Features that have a
surface.
Plane Cylinder Cone Sphere
Curve-based:
Planar curves with a center
point (x, y, z) and a direc-
tional vector (i, j, k). Circle Arc Slot Rectangle Polygon
Ellipse
Other:
Point Line Polyline

*Feature composed of two existing parallel plane
features with opposite orientations and
containing a nominal and/or a measured
Slab* primitive.
194
Composite features
Features composed of two or

more existing features.
Distance Angle Pattern
**Feature composed of CAD surfaces (nominal

component) and data points (measured
component).
Surface**
Feature primitives
A feature typically contains a nominal and/or a measured primitive:
Nominal primitives represent the theoretical or ideal

measurement, such as that found on a CAD model.
Measured primitives are the geometrical entities

found on the actual part being inspected.
The feature creation methodology

A standard dialog box with common and contextual parameters is used for the creation of
individual features and their primitives. Other features (surface, slab, angle, distance, and
pattern) are created using their own creation dialog box, described respectively in each
subsection.
The subsections that follow describe the feature creation methods and their parameters.
195
The feature creation dialog box

1. Choose Measure > Features > Create.
The Create Features dialog box opens.
2. Expand the feature type drop-down menu and

choose which type of feature to create.
3. In the Name text box, specify a name, if

desired.
4. In the Datum feature label list, assign a
datum label, if desired.
5. In the Method list, select a creation method.
6. In the Submethod list, select a creation
submethod, if available.
7. Specify the required Parameters according to
the creation method.
8. Click the appropriate button to launch the
creation.
Key feature creation parameters

The feature creation dialog box offers the following parameters, depending on the feature
type:
Name
A default name is automatically entered in the
Name text box. It can be edited, if desired.
The same name is assigned to the primitive with
the -nom- (nominal) or the -meas- (measured)
suffix according to the primitive status.
Datum feature label

A datum label can be specified for all individual
features, except polylines, to create a Datum
feature. Datum features are used in GD&T controls
(Adding and encoding GD&T controls on page 493).
196
Choose a datum letter in the Datum feature label combo box, or type in a customized
datum label, consisting of one or more letters. Note that datum labels cannot contain the
letters I, O, Q, X, Y, and Z. Once created, the feature is assigned the specified datum label.
Method
The creation methods available vary according to
the type of feature selected.
The Pick on CAD Model, Anchor, Numerically,
Probe, and Fit creation methods follow standard
creation processes which are described later, and
result in a feature object with a nominal or a
measured primitive.
Construction methods, such as From Objects,
From Intersection, and From Projection, create
features using existing objects.
The From Elements construction method creates points from selected elements.
The Empty Feature creation method allows creating an empty geometric feature of a
specific type, to which a nominal and/or measured object can eventually be added.
Parameters
The parameters available in the dialog box vary according to the creation method
specified in the Method list box.
197
Creation methods explained
Pick on CAD model
Features (except arcs, points, polylines, and lines) can be created by picking the CAD geometry.
For instance, a cylinder on the CAD model can be picked to create a nominal cylinder feature.
The Pick on CAD Model creation method offers two submethods for surface-based features:
• Single Surface: Creates a feature by picking a single CAD surface in the 3D scene.
• Multiple Surfaces: Creates a feature by picking multiple CAD surfaces in the 3D scene.
To create different types of features without

opening separate tools, choose Measure >
Features > Create.
Choose Multiple types from the feature type

drop-down menu.
Most standard features can be picked using this

interface.
• To create curve-based features, such as circles

and slots, two approaches can be used:
• Move the mouse cursor on a CAD model
surface to select the closest curve-based
feature and pick the one desired when it is
highlighted.
• Move the mouse cursor in the void within a
hole to select the first found primitive based
on the current 3D scene view and pick.
198
Anchor
Features can be created by anchoring their primitives on visible Data and Reference objects.
The Anchor creation method enables an interactive mode used to anchor primitives.
Each type of feature is created using a specific anchoring method. The How to button displays
a diagram illustrating how to anchor points to create the specified feature type.
When finished anchoring the required number of points, a primitive passing through the
picked points is automatically created and added to the Tree View.
Numerically
Features can be created numerically using mathematical definitions.
The Numerically creation method offers parameters specific to the type of primitive being
created.
Point, Center, Origin, or Apex coordinates can be provided by manually entering the (x, y, z)
coordinates or by dragging a center-point-based primitive (arc, circle, ellipse, point, polygon,
rectangle, slot, and sphere) and dropping it over the x, y, or z text box.
A Radius value can be provided manually or by dragging a primitive with a radius (arc, circle,
polygon, rectangle, slot, cylinder, and sphere) and dropping it over the text box.
Orientation or Normal coordinates can be provided by manually entering the (i, j, k)

coordinates or by dragging a direction-based primitive (arc, circle, cone, cylinder, ellipse,
plane, polygon, rectangle, slot, and line) and dropping it over the i, j, or k text box.
Probe
Features can be created by probing a primitive directly using a measuring device.
The Probe method offers several parameters that allow users to customize the probing
session.
199
Thin material
It is recommended to enable this parameter when
probing curved-based features on an object made
of a thin material like sheet metal. It takes the
thickness of the material and the constraining
plane into consideration to calculate the
compensation correctly, even when the probe is in
contact with the edge instead of the sidewall.
Compensation method
By default, the Compensation Method is
generally set to From Device. This method uses
the Compensation Method value of the probing
device specified on the Probing Device >
Compensation Method page of the
PolyWorks|Inspector Options dialog box. The
following values are available:
Compensation Point: using this method, a final

probed point is used to identify the compensation
direction. The probe is positioned away from the
part material, and the probing session is ended.
Probe Orientation: the probe orientation is used

to identify the compensation direction. The first
point must be gathered with the probe oriented
normal to the contact surface.
Fixed number of points

In order to more strictly control the way each
feature is probed, it is possible to set the number
of probed points required to define it. When Fixed
number of points is selected, any number of
points greater than or equal to the mathematical
minimum can be specified. The fixed number of
points can also be set for constraining planes.
200
Constraining planes
A constraining plane helps control the orientation of two-dimensional curve-based features
like circles and slots. Since points probed around the feature perimeter may have different
heights, the constraining plane prevents the feature from fitting at a tilt.
When a curve-based feature, such as a circle, is

probed, the exact height of each probed point
will vary slightly.
If a constraining plane is specified, the probed

points will be projected onto that plane,
removing the height variation.
While an unconstrained circle could be tipped

compared to the part surface, a constrained
circle will lie exactly on the surface plane.
Fit
When creating or extracting features from a point cloud or a polygonal model, the user can
specify how the feature should be fit. Three items are available: Best-fit, Min, and Max. The
method specified will determine where, within the data elements with the qualifying distance
and angle, the feature primitive will be positioned. The Fit creation method allows creating
features by fitting their primitives to selected Data or Reference object elements or to picked
points.
201
If the Best-fit fit type is selected, a standard best-fit algorithm is applied, using a pure least-
squares approach to generate a feature that is an average fit within the eligible data elements.
Best-fit is the default fit type for many feature types, such as planes. It is a reasonable choice
in regions where the point cloud is expected to generally define a smooth surface and any
digitizer noise is equally distributed above and below the surface.
If the Min fit type is selected, the feature is fit such that no points are enclosed by the
primitive. For a circular hole, the circle feature would fit to the innermost eligible data points,
while for a planar surface, the plane would fit to the bottom eligible data points. It is a
reasonable choice when defining a hole in the piece, because it describes the largest mating
diameter possible without interference.
If the Max fit type is selected, the fitting algorithm applied creates the smallest primitive that
encloses all considered data points. For a cylindrical pin, the cylinder would fit to the
outermost eligible data points, while for a planar surface, the plane would fit to the top
eligible points. The Max fit type is a reasonable choice when defining a physical pin or a
diffuse surface like a honeycomb, because it describes the actual mating surface without
interference.
A Best-fit, Min, and Max circle feature, fit to a

selection of data points.
A Best-fit, Min, and Max plane, fit to a selection

of data points.
202
Constructing features
When creating features using construction methods, such as From objects or From
Intersection, the creation method section of the creation dialog box offers a submethod
selection list box. If the objects required for the construction are preselected in the Tree View,
a corresponding construction submethod is automatically specified according to the type of
objects selected.
When constructing features using existing features, the primitives of the selected features are
divided into two separate groups, nominal and measured, and the desired construction
operation is performed on each group. Note the following:
• If all the source features contain a nominal primitive, the resulting features also contain a
nominal primitive.
• If all the source features contain a measured primitive, the resulting features also contain
a measured primitive.
• The nominal primitive and the measured primitive created using the same source feature
belong to the same resulting feature.
If both the nominal and the measured primitives could not be created, and the Create
dependencies check box was selected in the More subsection of the creation dialog box,
corresponding empty features will be created. Otherwise, no feature is created.
Creating features from files
Commands on the Measure > Features > Create from Files submenu can be used to import
same-type primitives from text files as well as to import one or more types of primitives from
specific file types (for example, IGES files).
Each new primitive is assigned to a new feature of the primitive type. For example, importing a
circle results in the creation of a circle feature that contains the circle primitive. The status of
the new primitives (nominal or measured) can be specified when imported.
Feature dependencies
When a feature is constructed using existing objects in the project, for example, when using
the From Objects method, the newly created features are dependent on the parent objects
used to create them. This means that any changes made to the parent objects will result in the
recalculation of the dependent features.
Dependent features can easily be identified in the

Tree View, by a red chain icon next to the feature
icon.
To remove the dependencies of a feature, select it in

the Tree View and choose Measure > Features > Remove Dependencies.
203
Creating features on cross-sections for 2D inspection

Inspecting in 2D along cross-sections is useful for parts that are too flexible or deformed, such
as plastic parts and castings, or for measuring geometry types that are difficult to measure in
3D, like fillet radius and wall thickness. Points, lines, circles, arcs, slots, angles, and distances
can be directly created on nominal cross-section components and then extracted on
measured cross-section components. A cross-section object must exist and be specified upon
creation of these features.
The following methods can be used to create features on cross-sections:
• Pick on CAD Model: Circles, arcs, slots, and lines can be created on cross-sections using
this creation method. This method enables an interactive mode that has the same
behavior as the existing mode for creating features. The only difference is that features are
created by picking on the nominal cross-section components extracted from a CAD model.
A preview of the feature that will be created is displayed.
• Anchor: Circles, arcs, slots, lines, and points can be created on cross-sections using this
creation method. This method enables an interactive mode used to anchor primitives on
nominal or measured cross-section components.
• Numerically: Circles, arcs, slots, lines, and points can be created on cross-sections using
this creation method. Features that are created numerically are automatically projected
onto the cross-section plane.
• From Objects, From Intersection, and From Projection: Circles, slots, lines, and points
can be created on cross-sections using a construction method. Features created from
other features are automatically projected onto the cross-section plane, while always
preserving their form. For example, when creating a cross-section feature from the
intersection of a plane and a cylinder, the circle resulting from the intersection is first
computed in space. Then its center point is projected onto the cross-section plane and its
axis orientation is forced to be the same as the cross-section normal vector while keeping
the same radius.
Empty Feature
To create features on cross-sections, the

On cross-section parameter, located under
the parameters section of the feature
creation dialog box, must be selected and a
cross-section must be specified.
204
Once the feature creation is launched, a

special display mode is enabled. Only the
specified cross-section is displayed in the
3D scene. As the cross-section features are
created, they are also highlighted in the
3D scene.
A link associates the features with the

specified cross-section by automatically
placing them in a cross-section feature group
named after the cross-section object and
displaying them in the Tree View, under the
Features branch.
Duplicating cross-section features in 3D

Features created on a cross-section for 2D inspection can be duplicated in 3D for other
purposes.
The resulting duplicated feature is dependent on its cross-section feature counterpart: the
nominal primitive, on the one hand, is identical to the cross-section feature, except for arc
features, which are duplicated as circles; the measured primitive, on the other hand, can
deviate from the cross-section feature, since it is extracted in the active alignment instead of
the alignment used to extract the cross-section.
205
To duplicate cross-section features in 3D,

select the feature in the Tree View and
choose Edit > Duplicate Cross-Sections Features
in 3D.
Duplicated features are created outside of

the cross-section feature group but are
associated to their corresponding cross-
section feature by a dependency link.
206
Analyzing measured point deviations

Deviation information of measured points for a feature can be displayed in the 3D scene at
any time, without having to create a data color map. This information is available when
features are measured and the appropriate option is enabled.
Objective: Display the measured point deviations for a feature.
Required: The project contains a measured feature.
Steps
1. Select a feature in the Tree View.
2. Choose View > Restore > Feature Measured Point

Deviations.
Alternatively, right-click the selected feature in
the Tree View and choose View > Measured
Point Deviations > Restore.
Results
The deviations are displayed according to predefined options (see Feature measured point
deviation display options on page 208 for information).
• Deviation display for points measured by
extraction.
• Deviation display for points measured by

probing.
207
Notes
The deviation display can also be enabled/

disabled from the property sheet of each
feature. Select a feature, choose Edit > Object
Properties, then click the Display tab.
Feature measured point deviation display options

A number of display options are available to modify the way measured point deviations are
represented for features.
1. Click the Object Display Options menu

button on the 3D Scene toolbar.
The Feature measured point deviations

section contains different options to configure
the deviation display.
• Considered feature component:

The deviations can be displayed from the
Nominal component or the Measured
component.
208
• Deviation vectors:
It controls whether deviation vectors are
displayed. The default value is set to
Automatic, which lets the application decide
whether the vectors are shown or not based
on the number of point deviations that are
displayed in the 3D scene. The deviation vector
display can also be set to Show or Hide.
The measured point deviations are displayed

as colored points, based on the active color
scale.
Scaling factor:
Increases the length of deviation vectors for
better viewing.
Show deviation values when possible:

Values can be displayed as 3D text by enabling
this option.
Notes
Additional options are found on the Display >

Features page of the PolyWorks|Inspector
Options (available by choosing Tools > Options).
209
Creating point features

Point features are typically created with a nominal primitive, using different creation methods.
The measured primitive is subsequently added to the feature using specific methods.
The creation procedures are explained in the following subsections. For information on the
creation methods and their key parameters, see The feature creation methodology on page 195.
Creating nominal point primitives

Objective: Create a nominal point primitive interactively or using mathematical definitions.
Required: The project contains at least a Reference object, a Data object, a surface-based
feature, a curve-based feature, or a cross-section-based object, or the information
that defines the nominal primitive is available.
Steps


choose Point.
3. Choose one of the following methods.
Numerically
1. In the Method list, select Numerically.
2. Specify the Point coordinates to define the
feature.
3. Click Create.
210
Anchor
1. In the Method list, select Anchor.
The interactive anchoring mode is automati-
cally activated. If not, click Anchor.
2. In the 3D scene, anchor a point at the desired
location.
Press and hold SHIFT when anchoring to pick the
closest vertex on a polygonal model.
3. Right-click to exit the anchoring mode.
Results
The point feature and its nominal primitive The nominal primitive is displayed in the 3D
are added to the Tree View, under the scene.
Features branch.
Obtaining measured point primitives

To obtain the measured primitive of a point feature, the most typical method available is
Probe. The method is explained in the following subsection.
Probe
Objective: Create the measured point primitive by probing it.
Required: The project contains a nominal point primitive. A probing device is ready to use.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the features that will be

probed.
211
2. Choose Measure > Features > Define Measured.

Alternatively, right-click the selected features in
the Tree View and choose Probe Measured.
The Define Measured Feature Components
dialog box opens.

4. In the Submethod list, select
Uncompensated.
5. Click Probe.
6. Probe the measured point primitive.
Results
The probed measured primitive is added to The primitives are displayed in the 3D scene.
the point feature, under the Features branch
of the Tree View.
Notes
To probe a measured primitive without a nominal

primitive:

choose Point.
212
Constructing point features

Objective: Construct a point feature using existing objects.
Required: The project contains objects.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the objects to use for

the construction.

choose Point.
4. Select one of the following methods.
From Objects
1. In the Method list, select From Objects.
2. In the Submethod list, select a submethod.
A corresponding construction submethod is
automatically specified according to the type of
selected objects.
3. Specify the required parameters, if necessary.
4. Click Create.
Example 1: The Circle Centers submethod
creates a point at the center point of each
selected circle. This submethod is available for
all curve-based features.
213
Example 2: The Profile Gauges submethod

creates characteristic points related to the
profile gauge, such as tangency points.
From Intersection
1. In the Method list, select From Intersection.
selected objects.
4. Click Create.
Example: The Plane and Cylinders
submethod creates a point at the intersection
of the selected plane and the axis of each
selected cylinder.
Results
The constructed point feature is added to the The point feature is displayed in the
Tree View, under the Features branch. A chain 3D scene.
overlays the icon, indicating its dependent
status.
214
Notes
These methods generate dependent point features, which means that if something affects the
source objects, it affects the dependent point feature as well. For example, if the source object
becomes measured, the dependent point feature becomes measured as well.
Creating point features on cross-sections

Point features can be created on cross-sections for 2D inspection purposes. Nominal point
primitives are created on nominal cross-section components. The measured primitives are
subsequently extracted on measured cross-section components. A cross-section object must
exist and be specified upon creation of these features.
For more information, see Creating features on cross-sections for 2D inspection on page 204.
The creation procedures are explained in the following subsections.
Creating nominal cross-section point primitives

Objective: Create a nominal cross-section circle primitive.
Required: The project contains a nominal cross-section component created on a CAD

Reference object.
Steps


choose Point.
215
Numerically
2. Enable the On cross-section parameter and
choose a cross-section from the list.
3. Specify the Point coordinates to define the
feature.
4. Click Create.
The point is automatically projected onto the
cross-section.
Anchor
3. The interactive anchoring mode is
automatically activated. If not, click Anchor.
4. In the 3D scene, anchor a point on the cross-
section contour at the desired location to
create a point.
closest vertex on a cross-section component.
Results
The point feature created on a cross-section,

and its nominal primitive, are added to the
Tree View, under the Features branch, and
also grouped in a cross-section feature
group.
Extracting measured cross-section point primitives

Objective: Extract the measured primitive of a cross-section circle using its nominal
primitive.
Required: The project contains a cross-section point feature with a nominal primitive, and its
linked cross-section is measured. For more information about obtaining cross-
section measured components, refer to Measuring the geometry on the part on
page 376.
216
Steps

extracted.
Results
The measured primitive is added to the

cross-section point feature, under the
Features branch.
Constructing cross-section point features

Objective: Construct a cross-section point feature using existing objects.
Steps

construction.

choose Point.
217
From Objects and From Intersection

1. In the Method list, select From Objects or
From Intersection.
5. Click Create.
Cross-section point features created from other
features are automatically projected onto the
specified cross-section. In this example, point 1
was constructed from the center of circle 1.
For more information, see Constructing point
features on page 213.
Results
The cross-section point feature is created and

added to the Tree View, under the Features
branch. A chain overlays the icon indicating
its dependent status.
Notes
These methods generate dependent point features, which means that if something affects the
source objects, it affects the dependent point feature as well. For example, if the source object
becomes measured, the dependent point feature becomes measured as well.
218
Creating line features

Line features are typically created with a nominal primitive using different creation methods.
Creating nominal line primitives

Objective: Create a nominal line primitive interactively or using mathematical definitions.
Required: The project contains at least a Reference object, a Data object, a surface-based
feature, a curve-based feature, a cross-section-based object, or the information
that defines the nominal primitive is available.
Steps


choose Line.
Numerically
2. In the Submethod list, select Origin and
Orientation.
3. Specify the required values to define the
feature Origin, Orientation, and Length.
4. Click Create.
219
Anchor
2. In the Submethod list, select Pick 2.
3. In the 3D scene, anchor two points at the
desired location.
Results
The line feature and its nominal primitive are The nominal primitive is displayed in the
added to the Tree View, under the Features 3D scene.
branch.
220
Obtaining measured line primitives

To obtain the measured primitive of a line feature, the most typical method available is Probe.
Probe
Objective: Create the measured line primitive by probing it.
Required: The project contains a nominal line primitive. A probing device is ready to use.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the line features to

probe.

dialog box opens.

4. In the Submethod list, select Standard.
5. Constrain the feature to a plane.
• Select Use Plane Feature to use an existing
plane in the Tree View, or to probe a new
one that will appear in the Tree View. This
method is useful when the constraining
plane will be used for several objects, for
example, thick objects.
• Select Probe Local Plane to probe a new
plane. Note that this plane is probed near
the feature. It is stored within the feature
and does not appear in the Tree View. This
method is useful, for example, when
probing thin material, such as sheet metal,
that could have a significant deviation from
a feature to another.
6. Click Probe.
7. Probe the constraining plane, if (Probe New)
or Probe Local Plane is specified.
8. Probe the measured line primitive.
221
Tips
• If a feature contains a nominal primitive, it is

highlighted and centered in the 3D scene for
guidance.
• A minimum number of points must be probed
to fit a valid primitive.
• The probed primitive is compensated
according to the specified compensation
method set in the More section.
• Click the How to button in the dialog box to
view the steps required to probe the feature.
Results
the line feature, under the Features branch of
the Tree View.
222
Notes
A nominal primitive offers guidance when probing the measured primitive, but is not
necessary. To probe a measured primitive without a nominal primitive:
• Choose Measure > Features > Create.
• Expand the feature type drop-down menu

and choose Line.
• In the Method list, select Probe.
When probing, probed points are collected

at the center of the probe tip.
Compensation is necessary to offset the

measured points to the point of contact.
When using Compensation point as the
compensation method, the line is compen-
sated by moving the probe slightly off the
surface and ending the probing.
223
Constructing line features

Objective: Construct a line feature using existing objects.
Required: The project contains existing objects.
Steps

the construction.

choose Line.
From Objects
selected objects.
4. Click Create.
Example: The Cylinder Axes submethod
creates a line using the axis of each selected
cylinder.
224
From Intersection
selected objects.
4. Click Create.
Example: The 2 Planes submethod creates a
line at the intersection of two selected planes.
Results
The constructed line feature is added to the The line feature is displayed in the 3D scene.
Tree View, under the Features branch. A chain
overlays the icon indicating its dependent
status.
Notes
These methods generate dependent line features, which means that if something affects the
source objects, it affects the dependent line feature as well. For example, if the source object
becomes measured, the dependent line feature becomes measured as well.
To make the line features independent, choose Measure > Features > Remove Dependencies.
225
Creating line features on cross-sections

Line features can be created on cross-sections for 2D inspection purposes. Nominal line
Creating nominal cross-section line primitives

Objective: Create a nominal cross-section line primitive.

Reference object.
Steps


choose Line.
Pick on CAD Model

1. In the Method list, select Pick on CAD Model.
2. In the Cross-section list, select a cross-section.
3. Click Pick to launch the interactive picking
mode.
226
4. In the 3D scene, move the mouse cursor over

the cross-section to select the closest line
highlighted.
Numerically
5. Click Create.
The line is automatically projected onto the cross-
section.
Anchor
5. In the 3D scene, anchor two points on the
cross-section contour at the desired location to
create a line
227
Results
The line features created on cross-sections,

and their nominal primitives, are added to
the Tree View, under the Features branch,
and also grouped in a cross-section feature
group.
Extracting measured cross-section line primitives

Objective: Extract the measured primitive of a cross-section line using its nominal primitive.
Required: The project contains a cross-section line feature with a nominal primitive, and its
page 376.
Steps

extracted.
Results

cross-section line feature, under the Features
branch.
228
Constructing cross-section line features

Objective: Construct a cross-section line feature using existing objects.
Steps

the construction.

choose Line.

From Intersection.
5. Click Create.
Cross-section line features created from other
specified cross-section, while always preserving
their form. In this example, line 1 was
constructed from the center points of circle 1 and
circle 2.
For more information, see Constructing line
229
Results
The constructed line feature is added to the

Tree View, under the Features branch, and
grouped in the cross-section feature group. A
chain overlays the icon indicating its
dependent status.
Notes
These methods generate dependent line features, which means that if something affects the
source objects, it affects the dependent line feature as well. For example, if the source object
becomes measured, the dependent line feature becomes measured as well.
230
Creating plane features

Plane features are typically created with a nominal primitive using different creation methods.
Creating nominal plane primitives

Objective: Create a nominal plane primitive interactively using Reference object elements or
a mathematical definition.
Required: The project contains a Reference object or the information that defines the
nominal primitive is available.
Steps


choose Plane.
Pick on CAD Model

mode.
3. In the 3D scene, pick a CAD surface to create
the plane.
4. Right-click to exit the picking mode.
231
Numerically
2. In the Submethod list, select Point and
Normal.
feature Point and Normal.
4. Click Create.
Anchor
3. In the 3D scene, anchor three points on the
surface to create a plane.
Results
The plane feature, and its nominal primitive, The nominal primitive is displayed in the
are added to the Tree View under the 3D scene.
Features branch.
232
Obtaining measured plane primitives

To obtain the measured primitive of a plane feature, the most common methods used are
Extract, Probe, Extract from Polygonal Models, and Fit. Each method is explained in the
following subsections.
Extract
Objective: Extract the measured plane primitive using the nominal primitive.
Required: The project contains a feature with a nominal primitive and an aligned Data
object.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the plane feature that

will be extracted.
Results
The measured primitive is added to the plane The primitives are displayed in the 3D scene.
feature in the Tree View, under the Features
branch.
233
Probe
Objective: Create the measured plane primitive by probing it.
Required: The project contains a nominal plane primitive. A probing device is ready to use.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the plane feature that

will be probed.

dialog box opens.

5. Click Probe.
6. Probe the measured plane primitive.
Tips
guidance.
234
Results
the plane feature, under the Features branch
of the Tree View.
Notes

and choose Plane.
If the probing device is already aligned to a

CAD model, the nominal primitive can be
extracted at the same time by activating the
Extract nominal primitive from CAD
model option.
235

at the center of the probe tip. Compen-
sation is necessary to offset the measured
points to the point of contact.
compensation method, a plane is compen-
sated by lifting the probe slightly off the
Fit
Objective: Create measured plane primitives interactively using data elements.
Steps


choose Plane.
3. In the Method list, select Fit.
4. In the Submethod list, select Pick, then Fit.
5. Specify the Max distance.
6. Select a Fit type.

mode.
236
8. In the 3D scene, anchor three points.

A preview plane is shown as points are
anchored. If the preview plane does not look
oriented as desired, restart the picking session
by pressing ESC to cancel the current picking
session and click Pick to start a new picking
session.
9. After picking the third point, a plane is fitted to
the Data object using the anchored plane as an
initial guess to start the fitting process.
Tips
To use the Fit method to define the measured primitive of an existing feature, select the
feature in the Tree View and choose Measure > Features > Define Measured.
Results
The measured primitive is added to the plane The primitive is displayed in the 3D scene.
feature, under the Features branch of the
Tree View.
Extract from Polygonal Models

Objective: Create measured plane primitives interactively using a polygonal model.
Required: The project contains a polygonal model.
Steps
1. Choose Measure > Features > Extract from

Polygonal Models.
The Extract Primitives from Polygonal Models
dialog box opens.
237
2. Specify the feature Type.

The Automatic type is specified by default,
which automatically determines the feature
type that adjusts better to the area selected.
3. Specify the Method.
The Single Detection Zone method is selected
by default. The Multiple Detection Zones
method is useful when all areas that can be
used to extract the feature primitive are not
contiguous.
4. In the 3D scene, using the circular detection

zone around the mouse pointer, click an area
on the polygonal model that is part of the
desired feature.
It is possible to increase or decrease the size of
the detection zone at any time in the Parameters
subsection, or using the mouse wheel.
5. Click Confirm.
Results
The plane feature, and its measured The primitive is displayed in the 3D scene.
primitive, are added to the Tree View under
the Features branch.
Notes
The Extract from Polygonal Models method can also be used to create nominal primitives
when using a polygonal model as the Reference object.
238
Constructing plane features

Objective: Construct a plane feature using existing objects.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the objects required for

the construction.

choose Plane.
From Objects
selected objects.
4. Click Create.
Example: The Average of Planes submethod
creates a plane by averaging the selected
planes.
239
Results
The constructed plane feature is added to the The plane feature is displayed in the
Tree View, under the Features branch. A chain 3D scene.
overlays the icon indicating its dependent
status.
240
Creating circle features

Circle features are typically created with a nominal primitive using different creation methods.
Creating nominal circle primitives

Objective: Create a nominal circle primitive interactively using Reference object elements or
Required: The project contains a Reference object, or the information that describes the
Steps


choose Circle.
Pick on CAD Model

2. The interactive picking mode is automatically
activated. If not, click Pick.
3. In the 3D scene, pick a circle. Two approaches
can be used:
• Move the mouse cursor on the CAD model
surface to select the closest circle feature
and pick the one desired when it is
highlighted.
• Move the mouse cursor in the void within
the hole to select the first found circle based
on the current 3D scene view, then pick.
241
Numerically
feature Center, Orientation, and Radius.
3. Click Create.
Anchor
2. In the 3D scene, anchor three points on a hole
boundary to create a circle.
Results
The circle feature and its nominal primitive The nominal primitive is displayed in the
are added to the Tree View, under the 3D scene.
Features branch.
242
Obtaining measured circle primitives

To obtain the measured primitive of a circle feature, the most common methods used are
Extract, Probe, and Fit. Each method is explained in the following subsections.
Extract
Objective: Extract the measured circle primitive using the nominal primitive.
Required: The project contains a circle feature with a nominal primitive and an aligned Data
object.
Steps

extracted.
Results
The measured primitive is added to the circle The primitives are displayed in the 3D scene.
Tree View.
243
Probe
Objective: Create the measured circle primitive by probing it, along with its constraining
plane, if required.
Required: The project contains a nominal circle primitive. A probing device is ready to use.
Steps

probed.

the Tree View and choose Probe Measured. The
Define Measured Feature Components dialog
box opens.

5. Specify a constraining plane.
one that will appear in the Tree View.
and does not appear in the Tree View.
6. Click Probe.
8. Probe the measured circle primitive.
Tips
guidance.
244
Results
the circle feature, under the Features branch
of the Tree View.
Notes

and choose Circle.

model item.

245


compensation method, a circle is compen-
sated by moving the probe inward (hole) or
outward (pin) from the feature boundary,
then ending the probing.
Fit
Objective: Create measured circle primitives interactively using data elements.
Steps


choose Circle.
246

4. In the Submethod list, select Fit to Elements.
5. Select the Fit type.
It is recommended to set the Fit type to Min for a
hole and Max for a pin.
6. Under Constraints, select Plane, then select a
constraining plane, if required.
It is recommended to use a constraining plane to
create a feature that is correctly oriented in
space. The plane should be created prior to the
fitting.
7. Under Filtering, adjust the filters based on the
element selection.
It is recommended to remove the Max angle
filter if no data is selected on the walls of the
hole.
9. In the 3D scene, select the elements that will

be used to fit the circle.
See Selecting elements on page 55 for
information on how to select elements
interactively.
10. Click Create to fit a primitive to the selected
elements.
Tips
247
Results
The measured primitive is added to the circle The primitive is displayed in the 3D scene.
Tree View.
Constructing circle features

Objective: Construct a circle feature using existing objects.
Steps

the construction.

choose Circle.
248
From Objects
1. In the Method list, select From Objects
selected objects.
4. Click Create.
Example: The Cylinders submethod creates a
circle at each end of the selected cylinder,
having the orientation of the cylinder.
From Intersection
selected objects.
4. Click Create.
Example: The Plane and Cylinders
submethod creates a circle centered at the
intersection of a selected plane and the axis of
each selected cylinder, oriented using the
normal of the plane and with a radius equal to
the radius of the cylinder.
249
Results
The constructed circle features are added to The circle features are displayed in the
the Tree View, under the Features branch. A 3D scene.
chain overlays the icon, indicating its
dependent status.
Notes
These methods generate dependent circle features, which means that if something affects the
source objects, it affects the dependent circle feature as well. For example, if the source object
becomes measured, the dependent circle feature becomes measured as well.
To make the circle features independent, choose Measure > Features > Remove Dependencies.
250
Creating circle features on cross-sections

Circle features can be created on cross-sections for 2D inspection purposes. Nominal circle
Creating nominal cross-section circle primitives

Objective: Create a nominal cross-section circle primitive.

Reference object.
Steps


choose Circle.
Pick on CAD Model

choose from the list of cross-sections.
the cross-section to select the closest circle
highlighted.
251
Numerically
feature Center and Radius.
4. Click Create.
The circle is automatically projected onto the
cross-section.
Anchor
create a circle.
Results
The circle feature created on a cross-section,

and its nominal primitive, are added to the
Tree View under the Features branch, and
group.
252
Extracting measured cross-section circle primitives

Objective: Extract the measured primitive of a cross-section circle using its nominal
primitive.
Required: The project contains a cross-section circle feature with a nominal primitive, and its
page 376.
Steps

extracted.
Results

cross-section circle feature, under the
Features branch.
Constructing cross-section circle features

Objective: Construct a cross-section circle feature using existing objects.
Steps

the construction.
253

choose Circle.

From Intersection.
5. Click Create.
Cross-section circle features created from other
specified cross-section, while always preserving
their form. In this example, circle 6 was
constructed from the average of circle 1 to
circle 5.
For more information, see Constructing circle
Results
The constructed cross-section circle is added

to the Tree View, under the Features branch,
in the cross-section feature group. A chain
overlays the icon, indicating its dependent
status.
254
Notes
These methods generate dependent circle features, which means that if something affects the
source objects, it affects the dependent circle feature as well. For example, if the source object
becomes measured, the dependent circle feature becomes measured as well.
255
Creating arc features

An arc consists of a subsection of a circle. Arc features can only be created on cross-sections,
typically with a nominal primitive, using different creation methods. The measured primitive is
subsequently added to the feature using specific methods.
Creating nominal arc primitives

Objective: Create a nominal arc primitive interactively using a Reference object or a
mathematical definition.
Required: The project contains a cross-section, a Reference object, or the information that
describes the nominal primitive is available.
Steps


choose Arc.
Pick on CAD Model

4. In the 3D scene, move the mouse pointer over
the cross-section contour, close to the area
that defines an arc, and pick when it is
highlighted.
256
Numerically
feature Center, Radius, Angle reference axis,
Start angle, and End angle.
4. Click Create.
Anchor
cross-section contour, at the desired location,
to create an arc.
257
Results
The arc feature and its nominal primitive are The nominal primitive is displayed in the
branch.
Notes
Creating arcs numerically requires the following information:
• Angle reference axis: Axis used as a reference for specifying the start and end angles of
the arc. This axis is projected onto the cross-section plane.
• Start angle: Start angle of the arc, measured counterclockwise from the angle reference
axis.
• End angle: End angle of the arc, measured counterclockwise from the angle reference
axis.
258
Obtaining measured arc primitives

To obtain the measured primitive of an arc feature, the method used is Extract from Cross-
Section. The measured primitive of the arc is extracted from the vertices of the measured
components of its linked cross-section.
Objective: Extract the measured arc primitive using the nominal primitive.
Required: The project contains an arc feature with a nominal primitive and its linked cross-
section is measured.
Steps

extracted.
Results
The measured primitive is added to the arc The primitives are displayed in the 3D
feature, under the Features branch of the Tree scene.
View.
259
Creating slot features

Slot features are typically created with a nominal primitive using different creation methods.
Creating nominal slot primitives

Objective: Create a nominal slot primitive interactively using Reference object elements or a
mathematical definition.
Required: The project contains a Reference object, or the information that defines the
Steps


choose Slot.
Pick on CAD Model

3. In the 3D scene, pick a slot. Two approaches
can be used:
surface to select the closest slot feature and
pick the one desired when it is highlighted.
the hole to select the first found slot based
on the current 3D scene view, then pick.
260
Numerically
2. Specify the values to define the feature Center,
Axis orientation, Length orientation,
Length, and Width.
3. Click Create.
Anchor
2. In the 3D scene, anchor three points on one arc
boundary and two points on the other arc
boundary.
Results
The slot feature and its nominal primitive are The nominal primitive is displayed in the
branch.
261
Obtaining measured slot primitives

To obtain the measured primitive of a slot feature, the most common methods used are
Extract
Objective: Extract the measured slot primitive using the nominal primitive.
Required: The project contains a slot feature with a nominal primitive and an aligned Data
object.
Steps

extracted.
Results
The measured primitive is added to the slot The primitives are displayed in the 3D scene.
branch.
262
Probe
Objective: Create the measured slot primitive by probing it, along with its constraining plane
if required.
Required: The project contains a nominal slot primitive. A probing device is ready to use.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the slot feature that will

be probed.

dialog box opens.

4. In the Submethod list, select Arcs Only.
5. Specify a constraining plane.
6. Click Probe.
8. Probe the measured slot primitive.
263
Tips
guidance.
for each arc to fit a valid primitive.
Results
The probed measured slot primitive and its The probed slot feature components are
constraining plane are added to the Tree displayed in the 3D scene.
View, under the Features branch.
Notes

and choose Slot.
264

model item.



compensation method, a slot is compen-
Fit
Objective: Create measured slot primitives interactively using data elements.
Steps

265

choose Slot.

constraining plane from the list.
create the feature so that it is correctly oriented in
fitting.
element selection.
hole.
266

be used to fit the slot.
interactively.
elements.
Tips
Results
The measured primitive is added to the slot The primitive is displayed in the 3D scene.
feature, under the Features branch of the Tree
View.
267
Creating slot features on cross-sections

Slot features can be created on cross-sections for 2D inspection purposes. Nominal slot
Creating nominal cross-section slot primitives

Objective: Create a nominal cross-section slot primitive.

Reference object.
Steps


choose Slot.
Pick on CAD Model

the cross-section to select the closest slot
highlighted.
268
Numerically
3. Specify the values to define the feature Center,
Length orientation, Length, and Width.
4. Click Create.
The slot is automatically projected onto the cross-
section.
Anchor
create a circle.
define the first arc, then two points to define
the second arc to create a slot.
Results
The slot feature created on a cross-section

and its nominal primitive are added to the
Tree View, under the Features branch, and is
group.
269
Extracting measured cross-section slot primitives

Objective: Extract the measured primitive of a cross-section slot using its nominal primitive.
Required: The project contains a cross-section slot feature with a nominal primitive, and its
page 376.
Steps

extracted.
Results

cross-section slot feature, under the Features
branch.
270
Creating rectangle features

Rectangle features are typically created with a nominal primitive using different creation
methods. The measured primitive is subsequently added to the feature using specific
methods.
Creating nominal rectangle primitives

Objective: Create a nominal rectangle primitive interactively using Reference object
elements or a mathematical definition.
Steps


choose Rectangle.
271
Pick on CAD Model

3. In the 3D scene, pick a rectangle. Two
approaches can be used:
surface to select the closest rectangle
highlighted.
the hole to select the first found rectangle
based on the current 3D scene view, then
pick.
Numerically

feature Center, Axis orientation, Length
orientation, Length, Width, and Corner
radius.
To create a rectangle with sharp corners, set the
Corner radius to zero.
3. Click Create.
272
Anchor
Rectangle with
The interactive anchoring mode is automati- sharp corners
2. Enable the Rounded corners parameters, if
required.
3. In the 3D scene, anchor the required number
of points on a rectangle boundary to create a
rectangle. Rectangle with
Press and hold SHIFT when anchoring to pick the rounder corners
Results
The rectangle feature and its nominal The nominal primitive is displayed in the
primitive are added to the Tree View, under 3D scene.
273
Obtaining measured rectangle primitives

To obtain the measured primitive of a rectangle feature, the most common methods used are
Extract
Objective: Extract the measured rectangle primitive using the nominal primitive.
Required: The project contains a rectangle feature with a nominal primitive and an aligned
Data object.
Steps

extracted.
Results
The measured primitive is added to the The primitives are displayed in the 3D scene.
rectangle feature in the Tree View, under the
Features branch.
274
Probe
Objective: Create the measured rectangle primitive by probing it, along with its constraining
plane if required.
Required: The project contains a nominal rectangle primitive. A probing device is ready to
use.
Steps

probed.

dialog box opens.

5. Specify a constraining plane:
6. Click Probe.
8. Probe the measured rectangle primitive.
275
Tips
guidance.
for each side to fit a valid primitive.
Results
The probed measured primitive and the The probed feature components are
constraining plane are added to the Tree displayed in the 3D scene.
276
Notes

and choose Rectangle.

model item.



compensation method, a rectangle is
compensated by moving the probe inward
(hole) or outward (rectangular shaped pin)
from the feature boundary, then ending the
probing.
277
Fit
Objective: Create measured rectangle primitives interactively using data elements.
Steps


choose Rectangle.

hole and Max for a rectangular shaped pin.
constraining plane from the list.
fitting.
element selection.
hole.
278

be used to fit the rectangle.
interactively.
elements.
Tips
Results
The measured primitive is added to the The primitive is displayed in the 3D scene.
rectangle feature, under the Features branch
of the Tree View.
279
Creating polygon features

Polygon features are typically created with a nominal primitive using different creation
methods.
Creating nominal polygon primitives

Objective: Create a nominal polygon primitive interactively using Reference object elements
or a mathematical definition.
Steps


choose Polygon.
280
Pick on CAD Model

3. In the 3D scene, pick a polygon. Two
surface to select the closest polygon feature
highlighted.
the hole to select the first found polygon
pick.
Numerically

feature Center, Axis orientation, Vertex
direction, Diameter, and Number of sides.
3. Click Create.
Anchor
2. Specify the Number of sides for the polygon.
3. In the 3D scene, anchor three points at the
corners of the hole to create a polygon.
281
Results
The polygon feature and its nominal primitive The nominal primitive is displayed in the
Features branch.
Obtaining measured polygon primitives

To obtain the measured primitive of a polygon feature, the most common methods used are
Extract
Objective: Extract the measured polygon primitive using the nominal primitive.
Required: The project contains a polygon feature with a nominal primitive and an aligned
Data object.
Steps

extracted.
282
Results
polygon feature in the Tree View, under the
Features branch.
Probe
Objective: Create the measured polygon primitive by probing it, along with its constraining
plane if required.
Required: The project contains a nominal polygon primitive. A probing device is ready to
use.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the feature that will be

probed.

dialog box opens.
283

6. Specify the Number of sides for the polygon.
7. Click Probe.
9. Probe the required number of sides for the
measured polygon primitive.
Tips
guidance.
for each side to fit a valid primitive.
Results
The probed measured primitive and The primitives are displayed in the 3D scene.
constraining plane are added to the Tree
284
Notes

and choose Polygon.

model option.


285

compensation method, a polygon is
(hole) or outward (polygonal shaped pin)
from the feature boundary, then ending the
probing.
286
Fit
Objective: Create measured polygon primitives interactively using data elements.
Steps


choose Polygon.

hole and Max for a polygonal shaped pin.
fitting.
element selection.
hole.
287

be used to fit the polygon.
interactively.
elements.
Tips
Results
polygon feature, under the Features branch
of the Tree View.
288
Creating ellipse features

Ellipse features are typically created with a nominal primitive using different creation
methods.
Creating nominal ellipse primitives

Objective: Create a nominal ellipse primitive interactively using Reference object elements
Steps


choose Ellipse.
289
Pick on CAD Model

3. In the 3D scene, pick an ellipse. Two
surface to select the closest ellipse feature
highlighted.
the hole to select the first found ellipse
pick.
Numerically

feature Center, Axis orientation, Major
orientation, Major diameter, and Minor
diameter.
3. Click Create.
Anchor
2. In the 3D scene, anchor five points on a hole
boundary to create an ellipse.
290
Results
The ellipse feature and its nominal primitive The nominal primitive is displayed in the
Features branch.
Obtaining measured ellipse primitives

To obtain the measured primitive of an ellipse feature, the most common methods used are
Extract
Objective: Extract the measured ellipse primitive using the nominal primitive.
Required: An ellipse feature with a nominal primitive and an aligned Data object.
Steps

extracted.
291
Results
ellipse feature in the Tree View, under the
Features branch.
Probe
Objective: Create the measured ellipse primitive by probing it, along with its constraining
plane, if required.
Required: The project contains a nominal ellipse primitive. A probing device is ready to use.
Steps

probed.

dialog box opens.
292

6. Click Probe.
8. Probe the measured ellipse primitive.
Tips
guidance.
Results
the ellipse feature, under the Features
branch in the Tree View.
293
Notes

and choose Ellipse.

model item.


294

compensation method, an ellipse is
(hole) or outward (pin) from the feature
boundary, then ending the probing.
Fit
Objective: Create measured ellipse primitives interactively using data elements.
Steps


choose Ellipse.

fitting.
element selection.
hole.
295

be used to fit the ellipse.
interactively.
elements.
Tips
Results
ellipse feature, under the Features branch of
the Tree View.
296
Creating cylinder features

Cylinder features are typically created with a nominal primitive using different creation
methods.
Creating nominal cylinder primitives

Objective: Create a nominal cylinder primitive interactively using Reference object elements
Required: A Reference object or the information that defines the nominal primitive is
available.
Steps


choose Cylinder.
Pick on CAD Model

3. In the 3D scene, move the mouse cursor on
the CAD model surface to select the closest
cylinder feature and pick the one desired when
it is highlighted.
297
Numerically
2. Specify the required parameter values to
define the feature Origin, Orientation,
Radius, and Height.
3. Click Create.
Anchor
2. In the 3D scene, anchor four points on the
surface to create a cylinder.
Results
The cylinder feature and its nominal primitive The nominal primitive is displayed in the
Features branch.
298
Obtaining measured cylinder primitives

To obtain the measured primitive of a cylinder feature, the most common methods used are
Extract, Probe, Extract from Polygonal Models and Fit. Each method is explained in the
Extract
Objective: Extract the measured cylinder primitive using the nominal primitive.
object.
Steps

extracted.
Results
cylinder feature in the Tree View, under the
Features branch.
299
Probe
Objective: Create the measured cylinder primitive by probing it.
Required: The project contains a nominal cylinder primitive. A probing device is ready to use.
Steps

probed.

dialog box opens.
5. Click Probe.
6. Probe the measured cylinder primitive.
Tips
• If a feature contains a nominal primitive, it will
be highlighted and centered in the 3D scene
for guidance.
300
Results
the cylinder feature, under the Features
branch of the Tree View.
Notes

and choose Cylinder.

model option.

301

compensation method, a cylinder is
(hole) or outward (pin) from the feature
boundary, then ending the probing.
Fit
Objective: Create measured cylinder primitives interactively using data elements.
Steps

choose Cylinder.
302

be used to fit the cylinder.
interactively.
elements.
Tips
Results
cylinder feature, under the Features branch of
the Tree View.
303
Extract from polygonal models

Objective: Create measured cylinder feature components interactively using a polygonal
model.
Required: A polygonal model is available in the project.
Steps

Polygonal Models.

The Automatic type is specified by default,
type that adjusts best to the area selected.
contiguous.

desired feature.
the detection radius at any time in the
Parameters subsection, or by using the mouse
wheel.
5. Click Confirm.
Results
The measured cylinder feature primitive is The measured feature primitive is displayed
added to the Tree View, under the Features in the 3D scene.
branch.
304
Notes
305
Creating cone features

Cone features are typically created with a nominal primitive using different creation methods.
Creating nominal cone primitives

Objective: Create a nominal cone primitive interactively using Reference object elements or
Steps


choose Cone.
Pick on CAD Model

cone feature and pick the one desired when it
is highlighted.
306
Numerically
feature Apex, Orientation, Slope (degrees),
Distance from apex, and Height.
3. Click Create.
Anchor
surface to create a cone.
Results
The cone feature and its nominal primitive The nominal primitive is displayed in the
Features branch.
307
Obtaining measured cone primitives

To obtain the measured primitive of a cone feature, the most common methods used are
Extract
Objective: Extract the measured cone primitive using the nominal primitive.
object.
Steps

extracted.
Results
The measured primitive is added to the cone The primitives are displayed in the 3D scene.
branch.
308
Probe
Objective: Create the measured cone primitive by probing it.
Required: The project contains a nominal cone feature. A probing device is ready to use.
Steps

probed.

dialog box opens.
5. Click Probe.
6. Probe the measured cone primitive.
Tips
guidance.
309
Results
the cone feature, under the Features branch
of the Tree View.
Notes

and choose Cone.

model item.

310

compensation method, a cone is compen-
Fit
Objective: Create measured cone primitives interactively using data elements.
Steps

choose Cone.
311

be used to fit the cone.
interactively.
elements.
Tips
Results
The measured primitive is added to the cone The primitive is displayed in the 3D scene.
Tree View.
Extract from polygonal model

Objective: Create a measured cone primitive interactively using a polygonal model.
Steps

Polygonal Models.
312

The Automatic method is specified by default,
contiguous.

desired feature.
the detection radius at any time in the
Parameters subsection, or by using the mouse
wheel.
5. Click Confirm.
Results
The measured primitive is added to the cone The measured primitive is displayed in the
feature, under the Features branch. 3D scene.
Notes
313
Creating sphere features

Sphere features are typically created with a nominal primitive using different creation
methods.
Creating nominal sphere primitives

Objective: Create a nominal sphere primitive interactively using Reference object elements
Steps


choose Plane.
Pick on CAD Model

sphere feature and pick the one desired when
it is highlighted.
314
Numerically

feature Center and Radius.
3. Click Create.
Anchor
surface to create a sphere.
Results
The sphere feature and its nominal primitive The nominal primitive is displayed in the
Features branch.
315
Obtaining measured sphere primitives

To obtain the measured primitive of a sphere feature, the most common methods used are
Extract
Objective: Extract the measured sphere primitive using the nominal primitive.
object.
Steps

extracted.
Results
sphere feature in the Tree View, under the
Features branch.
316
Probe
Objective: Create the measured sphere primitive by probing it.
Required: The project contains a nominal sphere primitive. A probing device is ready to use.
Steps

probed.

dialog box opens.

4. Click Probe.
5. Probe the measured sphere primitive.
Tips
guidance.
317
Results
the sphere feature, under the Features
branch of the Tree View.
Notes

and choose Sphere.
• In the Method list, select the Probe creation

method.

model item.

318

compensation method, a sphere is compen-
sated by moving the probe inward (concave
surface) or outward (convex surface) from
the feature boundary, then ending the
probing.
Fit
Objective: Create measured sphere primitives interactively using data elements.
Steps

choose Sphere.
319

be used to fit the sphere.
interactively.
elements.
Tips
Results
sphere feature, under the Features branch of
the Tree View.
320
Extract from Polygonal Models

Objective: Create measured sphere primitives interactively using a polygonal model.
Steps

Polygonal Models.

The Automatic method is specified by default,
contiguous.

desired feature.
the detection zone at any time in the Parameters
subsection, or by using the mouse wheel.
5. Click Confirm.
Results
The measured sphere feature primitive is The measured feature primitive is displayed
added to the Tree View, under the Features in the 3D scene.
branch.
321
Notes
322
Creating surface features

Surface features are created with a nominal component using different creation methods. The
measured component is subsequently added to the feature using specific methods described
in the following subsections.
Creating the nominal component of surface features

Objective: Create the nominal component of a surface feature interactively using Reference
object elements.
Required: The project contains a Reference object in the form of a CAD model.
Steps
2. In the 3D scene, select the CAD surfaces used

to create the nominal component of the
surface feature.


choose Surface.
5. In the Method list, choose From Reference
Elements.
6. Click Create.
323
Results
The surface feature is added to the Tree View, The feature is displayed in the 3D scene.
under the Features branch.
Obtaining the measured component of a surface feature

To obtain the measured component of a surface feature, the most common methods used
are Extract, Probe, and From Data Points. Each method is explained in the following
subsections.
Extract
Objective: Extract the measured surface component by detecting it near the nominal
component.
Required: The project contains a feature with a nominal component and an aligned Data
object.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the features to extract.
324
Results
The measured component is extracted and a The feature is displayed in the 3D scene.
measured status icon is added to the surface
feature icon in the Tree View, under the
Features branch.
Probe when aligned to a CAD model

Objective: Create the measured surface component by probing data points and
compensating them.
Required: The project contains nominal surface components. A probing device is ready to
use and is aligned to a CAD model.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the surface feature that

will be probed.

Alternatively, right-click the selected feature in
dialog box opens.

4. Select Compensate when probing ends to
compensate the probed data points using the
normal orientation of the surface.
5. Click Probe.
6. Probe the measured surface feature.
325
Results
The measured component is probed and a The feature is displayed in the 3D scene.
measured status icon is added to the surface
branch.
Probe without being aligned to a CAD model

Sometimes, large parts need to be measured in a short period of time for reasons as diverse
as part availability, safety reasons, or temperature variations. The measured component of
the surface feature can be probed without having a nominal component and without the
need to be aligned to a CAD model. The data points of the measured surface feature can later
be compensated using the nominal components of surface features.
The procedure involves the following steps, which are detailed hereafter:
1. Probe the surface feature

Probe the surface feature on the
part. The probed data points are
stored in a “probed surface” Data
object.
2. Import the CAD model

Import the CAD model into the
inspection project.
326
3. Align the probed data to the CAD

model
Align the probed data to the CAD
model using one of the available
methods, including the Best-Fit Data
to Reference Objects alignment or
the Best-Fit Measurement Objects
alignment.
4. Define the nominal component

of the surface feature
Define the nominal component of
the surface feature. It will be used to
compensate the probed data points
and subsequently used to calculate
the deviations.
5. Compensate the data points

Compensate the probed data points
to obtain the measured component
of the surface feature. Once the data
points are compensated, the
deviations of the measured
component to the nominal
component are obtained.
Probe the surface feature

Objective: Measure a surface feature by probing it.
Required: A probing device is ready to be used.
Steps

327

choose Surface.
3. Set the Method to Probe.
4. Click Probe.
5. Probe the surface feature.
Results
The surface feature is created and measured, but not yet compensated. It is added to the Tree
View, under the Features branch. A warning icon indicates that the probed points are not yet
compensated.
Define the nominal component of surface features

Once the CAD model is imported and the probed data points are aligned to the CAD model,
define the nominal component of the surface feature.
When uncompensated probed data points are available and are aligned to the CAD model,
Reference elements can be found automatically using the measured component of the
surface feature. An option is available to quickly select Reference elements.
For information on how to import CAD models and proceed with an alignment, see Importing
a CAD model on page 68 and Introducing alignments on page 121.
Objective: Define the nominal component of a surface feature.
Required: The measured component is probed (uncompensated data points), and the
probed points are aligned to the CAD model.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the surface feature.
328
2. Choose Measure > Features > Define Nominal.

The Define Nominal Feature Components
dialog box opens.
3. In the Method list, select From Reference
Elements.
4. Click the Preselect reference elements from

data points button to select Reference
elements matching the data points of the
measured components.
If desired, modify the selection of elements
using the interactive selection mode.
5. Click Create.
Results
The nominal component of the surface The feature is displayed in the 3D scene.
feature is created.
Compensate data points

Once the probed data points are aligned to the CAD model, it is possible to compensate them
to obtain the correct measured values of the surface feature.
Objective: Compensate a measured surface feature.
Required: The nominal component of the surface feature has been defined.
329
Steps
1. Select the surface feature in the Tree View.

2. Right-click and choose Compensate Probed
Data Points.
Results
The surface feature is now correctly The probed data points are compensated
measured. A measured status icon confirms using the normal orientation of the nominal
the measured status of the surface feature. component of the surface feature. The
surface feature annotation shows the
measured values for controls.
Notes
• The data alignment context in which a surface

is compensated is saved to the Measurement
tab of its property sheet.
To view the data alignment context, choose

Edit > Object Properties, then click the
Measurement tab.
330
• It is possible to change the data alignment

used for compensation. When it is changed,
select the surface feature in the Tree View,
right-click, then choose Compensate Probed
Data Points.
Probe existing surface comparison points

Surface features also support Probe Surface Comparison Points as a measurement method
for probing. This method consists in probing surface comparison points linked to the surface
feature in order to measure the surface feature. In this context, the same guidance
mechanism offered when probing surface comparison points provides guidance when
measuring the surface feature.
Objective: Measure a surface feature by probing existing surface comparison points linked
to the surface feature.
Required: The project contains a Reference object and a surface feature, and the probing
device must be aligned to the Reference object.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select a surface feature.
2. Choose Measure > Comparison Points > Create >

Surface Points.
The Create Surface Comparison Points dialog
box opens.
331
3. In the Method list, select Sample using Grid.
4. Specify the Sampling step.

Here, the value is specific to the part.
5. Specify the Projection axis.
6. Specify the Radius.
7. In the Link to object list, select Surface

Feature.
8. Click Create.
The surface comparison points are created on

the surface feature and added to the Tree View
in a group named according to the surface
feature.
Each surface comparison point is automatically
linked to the surface feature upon creation.
9. In the Tree View, select the surface feature to

measure.
10. Right-click and choose Probe Measured

Comparison Points.
The Probe Measured Comparison Point
Components dialog box opens.
332
11. Click Probe to probe the surface comparison

points following the guidance.
Results
The surface feature and the surface comparison points are displayed as measured in the Tree
View and in the 3D scene.
Probe new surface comparison points

Objective: Measure a surface feature by probing new surface comparison points in real time.
Required: The project must contain a Reference object and a surface feature, and the
probing device must be aligned to the Reference object.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select a surface feature.

2. Right-click and choose Probe New Comparison
Points.
333

box opens. The Method is set to Probe and the
Link to object information is automatically set.
3. Specify the Radius.
4. Click Probe.
5. Probe new surface comparison points on the
corresponding surface.
The surface feature is automatically highlighted

in the 3D scene to guide the probing of the
surface comparison points.
Results
The surface feature is measured. The surface comparison points are created, measured,
linked to the surface feature and added to the Tree View in a group named according the
surface feature.
334
From data points

Objective: Create measured surface components interactively using data elements.
Steps


choose Surface.
3. In the Method list, select From Data Points.

be used to fit the surface.
interactively.
6. Click Create to create the feature using the
selected elements.
Tips
To define the measured component of an existing feature, select the feature in the Tree View
and choose Measure > Features > Define Measured.
335
Results
The surface feature is added to the Tree View,

under the Features branch. Surface features
created from data points have no display in the
3D scene.
336
Creating slab features

Use slab features to obtain measurements on grooves or keyways with parallel sides.
Objective: Create a slab between two parallel planes.
Required: The project contains two parallel plane features having opposite orientations.
Steps

The Create Slab Features dialog box opens.

choose Slab.
3. Specify a Name and assign a Datum feature

label, if needed.
4. Choose a 1st plane and a 2nd plane, between
which the slab will be created.
If two features are selected prior to accessing
the creation dialog box, the fields are
automatically populated.
The nominal planes must be parallel and have
opposite orientations.
5. Click Create.
337
Results
The slab feature is added to the Tree View, The slab feature is displayed in the
under the Features branch. 3D scene.
Notes
The slab feature is dependent on the two source features. If, for any reason, they are
modified, the slab feature is automatically updated.
If the source features contain only nominal components, the slab feature therefore only
contains a nominal component. If both source features contain measured components, the
slab feature therefore contains a measured component.
338
Creating polyline features

Polyline features are typically created using existing objects or by data acquisition and they
generally contain a measured primitive. The nominal primitive is rarely used for the
measurement operations.
Creating nominal polyline primitives

Objective: Create a nominal polyline primitive interactively using a Reference object or a
Data object.
Required: The project contains a Reference object, a Data object, or a plane feature.
Steps

choose Polyline.

4. Specify whether the Polyline type is Open or
Closed.
5. If required, select Constraining plane and
specify a standard plane or an existing plane
primitive to constrain the anchored points to a
plane.
339
Left-click to anchor a point, middle-click to delete

the last anchored point, and right-click to end the
interactive picking mode.
Results
The polyline feature and its nominal primitive The primitive is displayed in the 3D scene.
are added to the Tree View, under the
Features branch.
340
Obtaining measured polyline primitives

To obtain the measured primitive of a polyline feature, the most common methods used are
Probe, From Data Error Contours, and From Tracking. Each method is explained in the
Probe
Objective: Create the measured polyline primitive by probing it.
Required: A probing device is ready to use.
Steps

choose Polyline.

4. Specify whether the Polyline type is Open or
Closed.
5. Click Probe to probe the measured polyline
primitive.
Click the How to button in the dialog box to view
the different steps required to probe the polyline.
Results
The probed measured primitive is added to the The polyline is displayed in the 3D scene.
Tree View, under the Features branch.
341
Notes
• When probing, probed points are collected

at the center of the probe tip. It is not
possible to compensate as the polyline is
being probed.
• It is possible to project the polyline onto a
plane or offset it to apply a compensation
on 2D polylines.
From Data Error Contours

Objective: Create the measured polyline primitive from data error contours.
Required: The project contains an active data color map on a polygonal model colored using
the Enhanced coloring option with a color scale that has 25 colors or less.
Steps

choose Polyline.
3. In the Method list, select From Data Error

Contours.
4. Click Create.
342
Results
The measured polyline primitives are added to The polylines are displayed in the 3D scene.
the Tree View and are automatically grouped,
under the Features branch.
From Tracking
Objective: Create the measured polyline primitive from tracking.
Steps

choose Polyline.
3. In the Method list, select From Tracking.

343
5. In the 3D scene, pick three points on the Data

object to define the tracking start point, search
direction, and search radius.
Results
The measured polyline primitive is added to The polyline feature is displayed in the
the Tree View, under the Features branch. 3D scene.
344
Constructing polyline features

Objective: Construct a polyline feature using existing objects.
Required: The project contains existing objects required by the specified submethod.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the objects required for

the construction.
choose Polyline.

6. Click Create.
Example: The Cross-Sections submethod
creates a polyline for each segment of the
selected nominal and measured cross-section.
345
Results
The constructed polyline features are added The polyline features are displayed in the
to the Tree View, under the Features branch. 3D scene.
If the objects used have nominal and
measured components, the corresponding
polylines are created separately.
346
Creating pattern features

Patterns are created by grouping together features of the same type. The pattern is necessary
when a GD&T control is assigned to a group of features, such as it is often the case on a
Position control for holes.
Objective: Create a pattern of holes.
Required: The project contains at least two features of the same type.
Steps

used.

choose Pattern.
4. Specify a Name and assign a Datum feature

label, if required.
5. Click Create.
347
Results
The pattern feature is added to the Tree View, The pattern feature is displayed in the
under the Features branch. The features are 3D scene and the annotation is attached to
grouped under the pattern feature. one of its features.
348
Creating distance features

Use distance features to measure the distance between two existing features.
Objective: Create a distance dimension between two features.
Required: The project contains two valid features.

2. Select Distance.
3. Choose a Reference feature and a Feature

between which the distance will be measured.
Click the hand symbol adjacent to the list boxes
to pick features in the 3D scene. If two features
are selected prior to accessing the creation dialog
box, the fields are automatically populated.
When necessary, the Reference feature is
considered to be extended to infinity.
4. Click Create.
Results
The distance feature is added to the Tree The distance feature is displayed in the
View, under the Features branch. 3D scene.
349
Notes
• When the pick tool (hand symbol) or the list boxes are used to specify the features to use,
a third left-click is possible to position the distance annotation in the 3D scene.
Depending on the position of the pointer with respect to the features used, different
controls are activated.
Once the third left-click is performed, the distance is automatically created.

• The controls shown in the 3D scene are the ones activated in the Geometry Controls pane
for the distance feature that was created.
• The distance feature is dependent on the source features and is automatically updated if
the source features are modified.
• If the source features have a nominal component, the resulting distance feature also has a
nominal component. If all the source features have a measured component, the resulting
distance feature also has a measured component.
Creating distance features on cross-sections

Distance features can be created on cross-sections for 2D inspection purposes. A cross-
section object must exist and be specified upon creation of these features.
Objective: Create a cross-section distance feature.
Required: The project contains a valid cross-section and two valid features.
Steps

2. Select Distance.
350

4. Choose a Reference feature and a Feature
between which the distance will be measured.
considered to be extended to infinity.
5. Click Create.
Results
The distance feature is added to the Tree The distance feature is displayed in the
View, under the Features branch, and is also 3D scene.
grouped in a cross-section feature group.
Notes
• When the pick tool is used (hand symbol) to specify the features to use, a third left-click is
required to position the distance annotation in the 3D scene.
351
Once the third left-click is performed, the distance is automatically created.

for the distance feature that was created.
352
Creating angle features

Use angle features to measure the angle between two existing features.
Objective: Create an angle dimension between two features.
Required: The project contains two features.
Steps

2. Select Angle.
3. Choose a Reference feature and a Feature,

between which the angle will be measured.
considered to be extended to infinity. The
measurement is calculated from the Reference
feature to the Feature.
4. Click Create.
Results
The angle feature is added to the Tree View, The angle feature is displayed in the 3D
under the Features branch. scene.
353
Notes
• When the pick tool (hand symbol) or the list boxes are used to specify which features to
use, a third left-click is possible to position the angle annotation in the 3D scene.
Once the third left-click is performed, the angle is automatically created.

for the angle feature that was created.
• The angle feature is dependent on the source features and is automatically updated if the
source features are modified.
• If the source features have a nominal component, the resulting angle feature also has a
nominal component. If all the source features have a measured component, the resulting
angle feature also has a measured component.
Creating angle features on cross-sections

Angle features can be created on cross-sections for 2D inspection purposes. A cross-section
object must exist and be specified upon creation of these features.
Objective: Create a cross-section angle feature.
Required: The project contains a valid cross-section and two valid features.
Steps

354
2. Select Angle.

4. Choose a Reference feature and a Feature,
between which the angle will be measured.
considered to be extended to infinity. The
measurement is calculated from the Reference
feature to the Feature.
5. Click Create.
Results
The angle feature is added to the Tree View, The angle feature is displayed in the
under the Features branch, and is also 3D scene.
grouped in a cross-section feature group.
355
Notes
• When the pick tool is used (hand symbol) to specify which features to use, a third left-click
is required to position the angle annotation in the 3D scene.
Once the third left-click is performed, the angle is automatically created.

for the angle feature that was created.
356
Editing feature primitives

Once a measured primitive has been extracted or probed, it
can be reviewed and edited to refine the measured value. For
example, it is possible to select the measured data points used
to create the primitive, edit the measured data points to see
the coordinates and fitting errors of each point, add probed
data points to an existing primitive or set measured primitive
boundaries using the nominal primitive.
Note that other feature editing tools are available on the Measure > Feature Primitives menu. A
feature can also be edited by adjusting parameters on the Measurement tab of its properties.
Selecting data points of measured primitives

It is useful to highlight the data points used in calculating a
measured primitive or its local constraining plane. The
selection shows whether unwanted data points have been
included. This allows making adjustments and recalculating
the measured primitive.
Objective: View the points used to fit the measured feature component.
Required: The project contains a Data object and a measured feature.
Steps
1. Select a feature in the Tree View and choose

Select > Data Points > Measured Data Points.
2. To view the points used for the local

constraining plane of a curve-based feature,
choose Select > Data Points > Measured Data
Points of Local Planes.
357
Results
The data points used to calculate the If specified, the data points used to calculate
measured primitive are selected in the 3D the local constraining plane of the measured
scene. primitive are selected in the 3D scene.
Circle 1 Circle 1 local constraining plane
Editing the measured points of extracted feature primitives

Using the Edit Measured Points interface, the exact fitting statistics of each data point used in
the extracted measured primitive can be reviewed. If necessary, individual points can be
removed from the solution to improve the overall result.
Objective: Review measured feature point fitting statistics and remove unwanted data
points.
Required: The project contains a Data object, and an extracted measured feature
component.
Steps

Measure > Feature Primitives > Edit Measured
Points.
358
Each point used in the measured feature

component fit is listed, with its coordinates and
deviation. They can be sorted by column value
by clicking on the column header.
2. Under Fit statistics, a summary of current and

initial fitting values is displayed.
3. In the Fit parameters section, the fitting

parameters specified during the feature
extraction are shown.
4. To remove points from the fitting solution,

clear them from the list or right-click and
choose Ignore. The current fit statistics will
update.
5. Click Apply.
Results
The Fit statistics are updated to display the

current fitting summary, and the measured
feature component is updated.
Editing the measured points of probed feature primitives

The Edit Measured Points interface can be used to review the
exact fitting statistics of each point probed for the measured
feature component. If necessary, individual points can be
removed from the solution to improve the overall result.
Additionally, the interface allows for the review and correction
of probing compensation and constraints.
Objective: Review probed feature point fitting statistics, remove unwanted points, and
correct compensation errors.
Required: The project contains a Data object and a probed measured feature component.
359
Steps

Measure > Feature Primitives > Edit Measured
Points.
Points tab:
2. Each point used in the probed feature
component fit is listed, with its coordinates and
deviation. Points can be sorted by column
value, by clicking on the column header.
3. Under Fit statistics, a summary of current and

initial fitting values is displayed.
4. In the Fit parameters section, the fitting

parameters used for probing are shown.
5. To remove points from the fitting solution,

clear them from the list or right-click and
choose Ignore. The current fit statistics will be
updated.
6. Click Apply.
Probing parameters tab:
7. The Probe tip diameter can be adjusted if

incorrect.
8. The Constraining plane parameter, and the

plane used for curve-based features, can be
redefined.
9. The Compensation, if incorrectly performed,

can be reversed.
10. Click Apply.
360
Results
The Fit statistics are updated to display the The probed feature component is updated.
current fitting summary.
361
Adding points to a probed feature

If a probed feature contains too few points for the desired
inspection, more points can be added and incorporated into
the probed feature fitting solution. Adding probed points is
useful in creating a more robust feature fit, or to continue
defining a very large feature from a later device position.
Objective: Add additional probed points to a measured feature component.
Required: The project contains a Data object, and a probed feature.
Steps
1. Select the feature in the Tree View and choose

Measure > Feature Primitives > Add Probed Data
Points.
2. Specify the required Point acquisition

parameters.
3. Click Probe.
Results
The probed feature component is updated to

include the newly-probed points.
362
Setting measured feature boundaries using the nominal component

In some cases, a measured feature component cannot have
the same extent as the nominal component. For instance, a
pin is used to define a nominal hole, so the measured
component is above the nominal hole boundary. It is then
useful to adjust the measured feature component to fit within
the nominal component boundaries. This functionality is
available for surface-based features.
Objective: Set the measured feature extent to match the nominal feature component extent.
Required: A Data object; a surface feature with a nominal and measured component.
Steps

Measure > Features > Set Measured Boundaries
using Nominal.
Alternatively, right-click the feature in the Tree
View and choose Edit > Set Measured Boundaries
using Nominal.
Results
The measured feature originally had the After processing, it is extended to the
extent of the probed data points. boundaries of the nominal feature
component.
363
Exporting feature primitives

Most nominal and measured primitives can be exported for
use outside of the PolyWorks Metrology Suite. All features,
except for angles, distances, surfaces, and slabs, can be
exported as an IGES file. Points, lines, planes, circles, and
polylines can also be exported in text format.
Objective: Export primitives as an IGES file.
Required: The project contains features.
Steps

exported and choose File > Export > Features.
2. Click Options.
3. Specify which feature primitives to export,
either Nominal, Measured, or both.
4. Click OK.
5. Navigate to the desired file-saving location.

6. Name the file.
7. Click Save.
Results
The selected primitives are saved to an IGES

file and can be opened in another software
package.
364
Cross-sections
Standard cross-sections
Offset cross-sections
365
Inspecting 2D part profiles with cross-sections

Cross-sections are measurement tools used for 2D inspection
of surfaces. They allow calculating deviations along profiles
obtained from slicing planes.
Introducing cross-sections
Cross-sections are used to inspect a profile of a part along a
cross-sectional plane using the nominal geometry and the geometry of the part in order to
produce results determined by geometry controls. The nominal geometry and the part
geometry are captured by intersecting aligned Reference and Data objects with a slicing plane.
Cross-sections can be created along an axis, around an axis (radially), along a curve, or using
several other methods.
Cross-sections are available on the Measure > Cross-Sections menu or on the Cross-
Sections toolbar.
Types of cross-sections
There are two types of cross-sections:
Standard cross-sections
A standard cross-section is created by
intersecting aligned Reference and
Data objects with a slicing plane
delimited by a measurement zone.
Offset cross-sections
An offset cross-section is created by
intersecting aligned Reference and
Data objects with parallel slicing
planes to produce a single multistep
cross-section. Offset cross-sections
are useful in controlling 2D dimen-
sions defined between features
situated on different slicing planes.
366
Measurement zone
The measurement zone defines the 3D limits of the slicing
process, delimiting a slicing plane. As shown to the right, it
is represented by a blue rectangle with red corners. The
dimensions of the measurement zone are defined during
cross-section creation, and can be edited by dragging
rectangle sides.
Measurement methods
There are two main measurement methods used to obtain the part geometry. Extract obtains
the part geometry by slicing an aligned Data object, while Probe involves probing the part
geometry on the part that is within the measurement zone.
Display options
A number of display options are available to visualize cross-sections with captured nominal
and part geometry.
They are offered in the Object Display Options.
Under Cross-sections, several display options are

offered. They are only available when Color map is
selected.
Color map
Displays the deviation of the measured
geometry to the nominal geometry. Note that
the color map display can be customized. For
information, see Changing the color map display
on page 189.
Tolerance curves
Displays the cross-section with respect to the
tolerances of the Reference object, allowing a
pass/fail representation.
367
Deviation vectors
Displays the direction and amplitude of the
deviations.
Increasing the Scaling factor increases the
length of the deviation vectors for better
visibility.
368
Creating standard cross-sections

A cross-section is a measurement object. It is created to obtain
the deviation along a cross-sectional plane. The geometry of
the part can be obtained by extracting it from an aligned Data
object, or by probing the geometry on the part.
Getting the nominal geometry

In PolyWorks|Inspector, the nominal geometry of a measurement object is called its nominal
component, and the geometry obtained from the part is called its measured component.
Objective: Start inspecting a part along a 2D profile by creating a cross-section to capture the
nominal component.
Required: The project contains a Reference object. If the project also contains a Data object,
the Data object must be aligned to the Reference object.
Steps
1. Choose Measure > Cross-Sections > Create >

Standard Cross-Sections.
The Create Cross-Sections dialog box opens.
2. Choose a creation Method.

The creation of cross-sections using the most
frequently used methods follows.
All of the possible creation methods are shown
to the right.
369
Along Standard Axis
This method allows creating a cross-section perpendicular to a standard system axis, such as
the X axis. It is recommended to have a properly oriented coordinate system to obtain the
anticipated results.
1. In the Method list, select Along Standard
Axis.
2. Under Axis, select X, Y, or Z.

The cross-section will be positioned along and
perpendicular to the axis.
3. Under Mode, select Individual to create a

single cross-section.
The Multiple mode allows creating evenly
spaced cross-sections at a specified step either
within a range or by slicing whole objects.
4. Under Position, specify a position along the
axis using one of these methods:
• Numerically, by typing a value.
• Manually, by clicking Anchor Point, then
picking a location on an object in the 3D
scene.
5. Click Preview.
A preview of the measurement zone of the
cross-section is displayed in the 3D scene.
The preview is displayed automatically when
anchoring a point.
Right-click to exit the anchoring mode.
6. To resize the measurement zone to include
only the area of interest, drag the blue
borders.
7. Click Create.
370
Along Curve
This method allows creating a cross-section perpendicular to a curve. It involves specifying the
type of curve to use, and then specifying the location of the cross-section along the curve.
1. In the Method list, select Along Curve.
2. Under Curve, select From reference object

curves.
The cross-section will be positioned along and
perpendicular to a curve on the Reference
object.
From polyline allows cross-sections to be
located either along an existing polyline feature,
or by interactively anchoring a polyline.

4. Under Position, click Anchor Point.

An interactive anchoring mode is launched.
5. Anchor a point along the curve by picking a

point on the Reference object in the 3D
scene. Right-click to exit the anchoring mode.
If At intersection with plane is selected, only
the location of the intersection of the curve and
the chosen standard plane can be picked.
A measurement zone is displayed.

borders.
7. Click Create.
371
Tips
Cross-sections can be created along a whole curve or just using a portion of the curve. When
the Mode is set to Multiple, two anchoring modes become available:
• Whole curve: Cross-sections are created along the entire length of the curve.
• Partial curve: Cross-sections are created between the specified start and end point on the
curve. Click a first point on the curve to indicate the start point and click a second point to
indicate the end point.
372
Radial
This method allows creating a cross-section that radiates from an axial primitive, such as a
cylinder or cone.
1. In the Method list, select Radial.
2. Under Rotation axis, select in the Axial

primitive list a feature with an axis, such as a
cone or a cylinder.
The cross-section will be positioned radially,
originating from the selected axis.
3. Set the mode to Individual to create a single

cross-section.
spaced cross-sections at a specified angular
step either within a range or by slicing whole
objects.
4. Under Position, specify a position using one

of these methods:
• Numerically, by typing a value.
• Manually, by clicking Anchor Point, then
picking a location on an object in the 3D
scene.
5. Click Preview.
cross-section is displayed in the 3D scene.
The preview is displayed automatically when
anchoring a point.
borders.
7. Click Create.
373
Anchor
This method allows creating a cross-section by anchoring a line in the 3D scene.

3. Under Position, click Anchor Line and click

two locations in the 3D scene. Right-click to
exit the anchoring mode.
A measurement zone is displayed in the 3D
scene.

borders.
5. Click Confirm.
Results
The new cross-section, with a nominal The cross-section is displayed in the 3D scene
component, is added to the Tree View under along with a color scale showing the
the Cross-Sections branch. deviations (requires both the nominal and
the measured component to obtain results).
Notes
• If a Data object is available and aligned when the cross-section

is created, then the measured component is extracted.
374
• The measurement zone of a cross-section can be edited post creation by following these
steps:
1. Select the cross-section in the Tree View.

2. Choose Measure > Cross-Sections > Edit
Measurement Zones.
3. The measurement zone is displayed in the

3D scene and can be edited by dragging the
borders.
4. Press ESC to exit the editing mode.
375
Measuring the geometry on the part

For an existing cross-section, the corresponding geometry on the part can be obtained by
extraction on an aligned Data object or by probing a physical part. If proceeding by probing,
the digitizing device must be aligned to the Reference object. In PolyWorks|Inspector, the
geometry obtained on the part is called the measured component of the measurement object.
Extract the geometry

When there is a Data object available in the project at cross-section creation, the measured
component is extracted automatically. Otherwise, when the Data object becomes available
and is aligned, a manual extraction operation must be performed using the cross-section.
Objective: Finish inspecting the profile for an existing cross-section by extracting the
corresponding profile geometry on the part to obtain the measured component
of the cross-section.
Required: The project contains a Reference object, an aligned Data object, and a cross-
section with a nominal component.
Steps
1. Select a cross-section in the Tree View.
Results
The measured component is added to the Deviations are calculated using the nominal
cross-section. The measured status icon and the measured components and are
indicates its measured status. displayed in the 3D scene using a color scale.
376
Notes
The extraction parameters of a cross-section are saved to the Measurement tab of its
property sheet. They can be edited post creation by selecting the cross-section in the Tree
View, choosing Edit >Object Properties, opening the tab, and making other specifications.
Probe the geometry

The geometry for a profile on the part can be obtained by probing the measured component
of a cross-section. The probed points are projected onto the plane defined by the
measurement zone of the cross-section. Subsequently, the projected points are joined by a
polyline to define the measured component of the cross-section.
Objective: Finish inspecting the profile for an existing cross-section by probing the
corresponding part geometry to obtain the measured component of the cross-
section.
Required: The project contains a Reference object and a cross-section with a nominal
component. The probing device is aligned to the Reference object.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the cross-section.

2. Choose Measure > Cross-Sections > Probe
Measured.
377
The Probe Measured Cross-Section

Component dialog box opens.
3. Under Sectioning plane, click Use and
By default, the probe Compensation is
calculated using the closest Reference object.
4. Under Probing method, select Projection.
All points acquired within the specified
projection Distance of the plane are used to
create the measured cross-section component.
The Max point-to-point distance determines
how close the probed points must be spaced to
be used to generate the measured cross-section.
5. Click Probe.
Use the visual and audio guidance to move the
probe to the cross-section location. Once within
the cross-section projection distance, probing is
allowed.
Tip
Use the Continuous Time or Continuous
Distance probing mode to facilitate the probing.
Results
The measured component is added to the The cross-section is displayed in the 3D scene
cross-section. The measured status icon along with a color scale showing the
indicates its measured status. deviations.
378
Notes
• Probing can also be done without an existing cross-section by using the Probe 2 points
method to define the location of the sectioning plane.
• The Zig-zag probing method is another way to probe the geometry of the part.
Each probed point must be captured on alternating sides of the sectioning plane. The
plane changes color from blue to orange to indicate which side of the plane the probe is
currently on. The intersection of the sectioning plane with the line connecting the currently
probed point and the last probed point determines the acquired point.
• Additional probed points can be added to the probed measured

component of a cross-section to better capture the part
geometry. Select the cross-section in the Tree View and choose
Measure > Cross-Sections > Add Probed Data Points.
379
Creating offset cross-sections

Occasionally, a profile must be inspected along offset parallel
segments along the part. An offset cross-section is a
measurement object that is useful for measuring deviations
from the nominal contour located on different parallel slicing
planes. The contour of the part can be obtained by extracting
it from an aligned Data object.

Objective: Start inspecting the form of a part along discontinuous cutting planes by creating
an offset cross-section, thereby obtaining its nominal component.
Required: The project contains a Reference object. In the example presented below, two
circle primitives are in the project to position each segment of the offset cross-
section.
If the project contains a Data object, it should be aligned to the Reference object.
Steps
1. Choose Measure > Cross-Sections > Create >

Offset Cross-Sections.
The Create Offset Cross-Sections dialog box
opens.
2. Choose a creation Method.

The creation of cross-sections using the most
frequently used methods follows.
All of the possible creation methods are shown to
the right.
380
Along Standard Axis
This method allows creating an offset cross-section as discontinuous cross-section segments

perpendicular to a standard system axis, such as the X axis. It is recommended to have a
properly oriented coordinate system to obtain the anticipated results.
1. In the Method list, select Along Standard Axis.

The cross-section segments will be positioned
along and perpendicular to the axis.
3. Under Position, click Pick Primitives.

An interactive picking mode is launched.
Two circle primitives are already in the project.
4. In the 3D scene, click the primitive by which the
first segment of the cross-section will pass.
The cross-section offset passes by the center of
the picked primitive.
5. In the 3D scene, click the second primitive by

which the second segment passes.
The new cross-section segment is parallel to the
other segments and does not overlap another
segment.
Repeat as many times as necessary.
6. Right-click to exit the mode.

only the area of interest, drag the blue borders
of the desired measurement zone.
The other measurement zones resize themselves
to avoid any overlap of segments.
8. If other segments are needed, click Add Step.
The measurement zone of the preceding segment
is displayed.
9. Click Confirm to create the offset cross-section.
381
Anchor
This method allows creating an offset cross-section by anchoring discontinuous cross-section

segments in the 3D scene.
2. Under Position, click Anchor Lines.

3. In the 3D scene, click a start and end point for

the first segment of the cross-section.
4. Click again to define the end point for the

second segment of the cross-section.
The new cross-section segment is parallel to the
other segments and does not overlap another
segment.
The measurement zone of the preceding segment
is displayed.
Repeat as many times as necessary.
5. Right-click to finish.

only the area of interest, drag the blue borders
of the desired measurement zone.
The measurement zones of other segments resize
themselves as consecutive segments never
overlap.
7. Click Confirm.
382
Results
The new offset cross-section, with a nominal The offset cross-section is displayed in the
component, is added to the Tree View under 3D scene.
the Cross-Sections branch.
Notes
To adjust the measurement zones of an offset cross-section post creation:

1. Select the cross-section in the Tree View.
2. Choose Measure > Cross-Sections > Edit

Measurement Zones.
3. The cross-section extent of each segment is

displayed in the 3D scene and can be edited by
dragging the borders.
The size of the measurement zone of neighboring
segments is automatically adjusted to avoid
segment overlap.
383
Extracting the geometry on the part

When there is a Data object available in the project at cross-section creation, the measured
and is aligned, a manual extraction operation must be performed using the offset cross-
section.
Objective: Finish inspecting the profile for an existing offset cross-section by extracting the
corresponding profile geometry on the part to obtain the measured component
of the cross-section.
Required: The project contains a Reference object, an aligned Data object, and an offset
cross-section with a nominal component.
Steps
1. Select an offset cross-section in the Tree View.
Results
The measured component is added to the The offset cross-section is displayed in the
offset cross-section. The measured status 3D scene along with a color scale showing
icon indicates its measured status. nominal-to-measured deviations.
Notes
The extraction parameters of a cross-section are saved to the Measurement tab of its
property sheet. They can be edited post creation by selecting the cross-section in the Tree
View, choosing Edit > Object Properties, opening the tab, and making other specifications.
384
Comparison points
Surface comparison points
Trimmed edge comparison points
Hemmed edge comparison points
385
Measuring specific locations on a part using

comparison points
A comparison point contains an exact coordinate, usually located on a CAD object, at which
the data deviation is to be measured. These coordinates can be entered numerically, or
generated by anchoring, sampling the CAD object, imported from a text file, or created by way
of several other methods. Comparison points can be positioned on a part surface or curve, or
along cross-sections or polylines. Surface comparison points are the most common.
Introducing comparison points

There are five types of comparison points, each one tailored to calculate deviations in a
specific context. The following sections explain the types of comparison points that are most
frequently used.
Comparison points are available on the Measure > Comparison Points menu or on the
Comparison Points toolbar.
Types of comparison points

Each type of comparison point is identified by a specific icon.
Surface comparison points
Trimmed edge comparison

points
Hemmed edge comparison

points
386
Cross-section comparison
points
Polyline comparison points
Comparison point creation and measurement methods

A comparison point is a measurement object that contains nominal and measured
information in order to obtain results.
• The nominal component contains the exact coordinate at which the deviation is measured.
It is created using different creation methods. The sections that follow explain the most
frequently used methods.
• The measured component is created by measuring the part, either by extracting the
measured value using predefined parameters, or by probing. By default, the measured
component of a comparison point is extracted from available Data objects. If not
automatically extracted, comparison points can be measured later. The Extract and Probe
measurement methods are presented in the sections that follow.
Understanding key parameters
Radius
Each comparison point has a measurement zone, cylindrical by default, within which
measurements will be collected. The measurement zone has a radius, which is the radius of
the cylinder, and a maximum distance, which is the height of the cylinder.
The radius is specified during comparison

point creation, and can be edited in the
properties for that object. The Max
distance, 4 mm by default, can also be
edited in the object properties, along with
other filtering criteria and tolerances.
387
Note that the measurement zone is different for trimmed edge comparison points. In this
case, the radius of the measurement zone is the height of the cylinder, while the maximum
distance is the radius of the cylinder.
Display options
A number of display options are available to modify the way comparison points are
represented.
They are offered in the Object Display Options.
Under Comparison points, several display options

are offered.
• Select Color map, then Color measured data

points to display the deviation values of every
data point used to calculate the measured
comparison point. Note that the color map
display can be customized. For information, see
Changing the color map display on page 189.
• By default, Disc or line is selected to allow

specifying the size of the displayed reference
disc or line. If cleared, only the center
coordinate is displayed. Disc
Line
• Select Deviation vector to view the direction of

deviation. Increasing the Scaling factor
increases the length of the deviation vector for
better visibility.
388
In the PolyWorks|Inspector Options dialog box

(choose Tools > Options, click Display, then
Comparison Points):
• Select Measurement zone to display in 3D the

measurement zone.
389
Creating surface comparison points to inspect the surface

of a part
A surface comparison point is a measurement object. It is created
to obtain the deviation on a surface, at specific coordinates. The
geometry of the surface can be obtained by extracting it from an
aligned Data object, or by probing the measured component of
the surface comparison point.
If creating by probing, the nominal component is automatically

extracted on the closest Reference object. The digitizing device
must be aligned to the Reference object.

Objective: Create surface comparison points to capture the nominal component.
Steps

Surface Points.
box opens.
2. Choose a Method among the following.
The creation of surface comparison points using

the most common methods follows.
All creation methods are shown to the right.
390
Anchor
This method allows creating surface comparison points by anchoring on surfaces.

2. Enter the Radius of the measurement zone for
each comparison point. See Understanding key
3. If required, select Link to object to bind
surface comparison points to a Reference
object or a surface feature. Then, specify
whether the comparison points are linked to
the closest object/feature or to a specific one.
4. Click Anchor.
5. In the 3D scene, click a location on the model to
place the comparison point.
6. Right-click to exit the anchor mode.
Numerically
This method allows creating surface comparison points by entering values for certain
geometrical properties.
2. Under Point, enter the coordinates of the point
to create.
If one coordinate is missing, select the Project
option to get the missing coordinate. The
coordinate is calculated by projecting the point
onto the Reference surface along the axis corre-
sponding to the missing coordinate.
3. Specify the Surface normal information of the
point.
By default, Automatic is selected. It extracts
the normal information from the closest point
on the surface of the reference object. To
specify values manually, the option must be
disabled.
6. Click Create.
391
Sample using Grid

This method allows creating uniformly spaced surface comparison points by sampling a virtual
grid that covers the selected or visible surfaces of Reference objects.
1. In the Method list, select Sample using Grid.

2. Specify the Sampling step that determines the
comparison point spacing.
3. Specify the Projection axis, which means the
direction in which the comparison points will be
projected on the model.
5. Under Link to object, specify whether surface
comparison points will be bound to a Reference
6. Under Considered reference surfaces, select
whether the grid is to be sampled on all of the
visible surfaces of the Reference object or on
the selected surfaces only.
7. Click Preview.
A preview of the comparison point layout is
presented in the 3D scene.
8. Click Confirm.
From Text File

This method allows creating surface comparison points from values contained in text files. If
the new comparison points are not located on a Reference object, they can be projected onto
the nearest linked Reference object.
1. In the Method list, select From Text File.

4. Click Browse.
392
5. Navigate to a text file containing the x, y, z

coordinates of the desired measurement
locations.
6. In the file browser, select a Template that
corresponds to the file structure. A preview of
the file is presented giving feedback if the
chosen template is incorrect.
7. Click OK.
Results
The new comparison points, with a nominal The comparison points are displayed in the
component, are added to the Tree View 3D scene.
under the Comparison Points branch.
393

For an existing surface comparison point, the corresponding geometry on the part can be
obtained by extraction on an aligned Data object or by probing a physical part. If proceeding
by probing, the digitizing device should be aligned to the Reference object. In
PolyWorks|Inspector, the geometry obtained on the part is called the measured component of
the measurement object.

When creating a surface comparison point and a Data object is available in the project, the
measured component is extracted automatically. Otherwise, when the Data object becomes
available and is aligned, a manual extraction operation must be performed using the surface
comparison point.
Objective: Extract the corresponding geometry on the part to obtain the measured
component of the comparison point.
Required: The project contains a Reference object, an aligned Data object, and a surface
comparison point with a nominal component.
Steps
1. Select the surface comparison point in the

Tree View.
394
Results
A measured status icon indicates the The surface comparison points are displayed
measured status of the surface comparison in the 3D scene with a solid measurement
points. zone. The color of the comparison points
corresponds to the defined color scale.
Probe the geometry

The geometry of the surface on the part can be obtained by probing the measured
component of a surface comparison point.
Objective: Probe the corresponding geometry on the part to obtain the measured
Required: The project contains a Reference object and a surface comparison point with a
nominal component. A probing device is available and ready to use. The probing
device is aligned to the Reference object.
Steps
1. Select the surface comparison points to

probe in the Tree View.
2. Choose Measure > Comparison Points > Define

Measured.
The Define Measured Comparison Point
395
3. Specify the probing mode:

• Specific: Allows probing the selected
comparison points following the Tree View
order.
• Auto-detect: Allows probing the
comparison point closest to the probing
device. Only the selected comparison
points will be detected.
4. Click Probe.
Tips
When probing comparison points, visual and audio feedback are provided. If the probe is out
of the measurement zone, the display color of the comparison point disc is red and the
farther the probe is from the comparison point the slower the sound is. Moving towards the
comparison point will accelerate the sound. Once the measurement zone is reached, the
display color of the comparison point disc will change to green and the sound will change to a
higher pitch which eventually stops indicating the location of the probing device is good
enough to acquire data.
Results
A probing session Data object is added to the The surface comparison points are displayed
Tree View and a measured status icon in the 3D scene with a solid measurement
indicates the measured status of the surface zone. The color of the comparison points
comparison points. corresponds to the defined color scale.
396
Creating trimmed edge comparison points to inspect

sharp edges of a part
A trimmed edge comparison point is a measurement
object. It is created to obtain the deviation on an
edge, at specific coordinates. The geometry of the
part can be obtained by extracting it from an aligned
Data object, or by probing the measured component
of the trimmed edge comparison point.
If creating by probing, the nominal component is automatically extracted on the closest

Reference object. The digitizing device must be aligned to the Reference object.

Objective: Create trimmed edge comparison points to capture the nominal component.
Steps

Trimmed Edge Points.
The Create Trimmed Edge Comparison Points
dialog box opens.
The creation of trimmed edge comparison points

using the most common methods follows.
397
Anchor
This method allows creating trimmed edge comparison points by anchoring on a Reference
object curve.

2. Specify the Radius of the measurement zone
for each comparison point. See Understanding
key parameters on page 387.
3. Click Anchor.
4. In the 3D scene, click an edge curve to anchor

the trimmed edge comparison points
398
Sample Reference Curve

This method allows creating uniformly spaced trimmed edge comparison points by sampling
curves of Reference objects using a step.
1. In the Method list, select Sample Reference

Curve.
2. Specify the Sampling step. This parameter sets
the distance between comparison points along
the reference curve.
4. Select the Range:
• Whole Curve: This option, selected by
default, enables creating comparison points
along the whole curve.
• Partial Curve: This option enables creating
comparison points along a portion of the
curve.
5. In the 3D scene, click the reference curve to
select it. A preview is displayed to show where
the comparison points will be located.
If the Partial Curve range option is selected,
two clicks are required: the start and the end
point of the range.
6. Click Confirm.
399
Results
Notes
By default, when creating trimmed edge

comparison points, a back point is created.
The back point is a surface comparison point
offset from the part edge.
The back point locates the actual part surface

before extracting the edge measurement,
ensuring that deformation of the actual part
shape does not prevent edge inspection.
If back points are not desired, the option can

be disabled under the More section of the
creation dialog box.
400

For an existing trimmed edge comparison point, the corresponding geometry on the part can
be obtained by extraction on an aligned Data object or by probing a physical part. If
proceeding by probing, the digitizing device should be aligned to the Reference object. In

When there is a Data object available in the project at trimmed edge comparison point
creation, the measured component is extracted automatically. Otherwise, when the Data
object becomes available and is aligned, a manual extraction operation must be performed
using the trimmed edge comparison point.
Note that when a trimmed edge comparison point is extracted, the corresponding back point
is also automatically extracted.
Required: The project contains a Reference object, an aligned Data object, and a trimmed
edge comparison point with a nominal component.
Steps
1. Select the trimmed edge comparison point in

the Tree View.
Tips
If a trimmed edge comparison point cannot be extracted, make sure that there is enough data
to perform the extraction. Also, modifying the extraction parameters could make a difference.
In the Tree View, select the trimmed edge comparison point, choose Edit > Object Properties,
then click the Measurement tab to access the extraction parameters.
401
Results
A measured status icon indicates the The trimmed edge comparison points and
measured status of the trimmed edge their back points are displayed in the 3D
comparison points and their corresponding scene with a solid measurement zone. The
back points. color of the comparison points corresponds
to the defined color scale.
Probe the geometry

The geometry of the sharp edge on the part can be obtained by probing the measured
component of a trimmed edge comparison point.
Required: The project contains a Reference object as well as a trimmed edge comparison
point with a nominal component and its back point. The probing device is aligned
to the Reference object.
Steps
1. Select the trimmed edge comparison points

to probe in the Tree View.
402

Measured.
Alternatively, right-click the selected
comparison points in the Tree View and
choose Probe Measured.
The Defined Measured Comparison Point

order.
Regardless of the probing mode, you will always
be prompted to probe the back point first and
then the trimmed edge comparison point.
5. Click Probe.
Two points must be probed: first probe the
back point, then the corresponding trimmed
edge comparison point.
403
Tips
farther the probe is from the comparison point, the slower the sound is. Moving towards the
higher pitch which eventually stops, indicating the location of the probing device is good
Results
A probing session Data object is added to the The trimmed edge comparison points and
Tree View and a measured status icon their backpoints are displayed in the 3D
indicates the measured status of the scene with a solid measurement zone. The
trimmed edge comparison points and their color of the comparison points corresponds
corresponding back points. to the defined color scale.
404
Creating hemmed edge comparison points to inspect the

hemmed edges of a sheet metal part
A hemmed edge is typically found in sheet metal parts as
the result of a hemming process which consists in folding
an edge until it is flush to itself. A hemmed edge
comparison point is a measurement object. It is created to
obtain the deviation on a hemmed edge, at specific
coordinates. The geometry of the part can be obtained by
extracting it from an aligned Data object, or by probing the
measured component of the hemmed edge comparison
point.

Objective: Create hemmed edge comparison points to capture the nominal component.
Steps

Hemmed Edge Points.
The Create Hemmed Edge Comparison Points
dialog box opens.
The creation of hemmed edge comparison points

using the most common methods follows.
405
Anchor
This method allows creating hemmed edge comparison points by anchoring on a Reference
object curve.

3. Specify how the Hemmed edge radius is
measured, either by extracting the radius from
the Reference object, or by manually entering it
in the Custom field.
4. Click Anchor.
5. In the 3D scene, click the tangency curves of the

hemmed edge to anchor the hemmed edge
comparison points.
406
Sample Reference Curve

This method allows creating uniformly spaced hemmed edge comparison points by sampling
curves of Reference objects using a step.
1. In the Method list, select Sample Reference

Curve.
2. Specify the Sampling step. This parameter sets
the distance between comparison points along
the reference curve.
4. Specify how the Hemmed edge radius is
measured, either by extracting the radius from
the Reference object, or by manually entering it
in the Custom field.
5. Select the Range:
• Whole Curve: this option, selected by
default, enables creating comparison points
along the whole curve.
• Partial Curve: this option enables creating
comparison points along a portion of the
curve.
6. In the 3D scene, click the reference curve to
select it. A preview is displayed to show where
the comparison points will be located.
If the Partial Curve range option is selected,
two clicks are required: the start and the end
point of the range.
7. Click Confirm.
407
Results
Notes
By default, when creating hemmed edge

comparison points, a back point is created. The
back point is a surface comparison point offset
from the part edge.
The back point locates the actual part surface

before extracting the edge measurement, ensuring
that deformation of the actual part shape does not
prevent edge inspection.
If back points are not desired, the option can be

disabled under the More section of the creation
dialog box.
408

For an existing hemmed edge comparison point, the corresponding geometry on the part can
be obtained by extraction on an aligned Data object or by probing a physical part. If
proceeding by probing, the digitizing device should be aligned to the Reference object. In

When there is a Data object available in the project at hemmed edge comparison point
creation, the measured component is extracted automatically. Otherwise, when the Data
object becomes available and is aligned, a manual extraction operation must be performed
using the hemmed edge comparison point.
Note that when a hemmed edge comparison point is extracted, the corresponding back point
is also automatically extracted.
Required: The project contains a Reference object, an aligned Data object, and a hemmed
edge comparison point with a nominal component.
Steps
1. Select the hemmed edge comparison points

in the Tree View.
Tips
If a hemmed edge comparison point cannot be extracted, make sure that there is enough
data to perform the extraction. Also, modifying the extraction parameters could make a
difference. In the Tree View, select the hemmed edge comparison point and choose Edit >
Object Properties, then click the Measurement tab to access the extraction parameters.
409
Results
A measured status icon indicates the The hemmed edge comparison points and
measured status of the hemmed edge their back points are displayed in the 3D
comparison points and their corresponding scene with a solid measurement zone. The
back points. color of the comparison points corresponds
to the defined color scale.
Probe the geometry

The geometry of the hemmed edges on the sheet metal part can be obtained by probing the
measured component of a hemmed edge comparison point.
Required: The project contains a Reference object as well as a hemmed edge comparison
point with a nominal component and its back point. The probing device is aligned
to the Reference object.
Steps
1. Select the hemmed edge comparison points

in the Tree View.
410

Measured.
Alternatively, right-click the selected
comparison points in the Tree View and
choose Probe Measured.
The Defined Measured Comparison Point

order.
Regardless of the probing mode, you will always
be prompted to probe the back point first and
then the hemmed edge comparison point.
4. Click Probe.
Two points must be probed: first probe the
back point, then the corresponding hemmed
edge comparison point.
Tips
farther the probe is from the comparison point the slower the sound is. Moving towards the
higher pitch, which eventually stops indicating the location of the probing device is good
411
Results
A probing session Data object is added to the The hemmed edge comparison points, and
Tree View and a measured status icon their backpoints, are displayed in the 3D
indicates the measured status of the scene with a solid measurement zone. The
hemmed edge comparison points and their color of the comparison points corresponds
corresponding back points. to the defined color scale.
412
Gauges
Calipers
Profile gauges
Flush & gap gauges
Airfoil gauges
413
Measuring part dimensions with gauges

In PolyWorks|Inspector, common physical measurement tools such as calipers, radius
gauges, and step gauges are simulated using Gauge objects. Gauges are used to measure the
deviations of the part geometry with respect to the nominal geometry.
There are four types of gauges:
Caliper
A gauge that is similar to a physical
caliper used to measure distances.
Profile gauge
Profile gauges are used to measure
the radii, distances, or heights on the
fillets or rounds of a part on a cross-
sectional plane.
Flush & gap gauge

Flush & gap gauges are used to
measure the flush and gap between
parts of an assembly on a cross-
sectional plane.
Airfoil gauge
Airfoil gauges are used to measure
airfoil profiles on a cross-sectional
plane.
Gauges, except for calipers, are measured on linked cross-sections which are automatically
created on gauge creation. Calipers calculate distances either on a 3D surface or at locations
on a cross-section.
414
Display options
There are display options for the visualization of the results.
1. Click Object Display Options.
2. Under Gauges:
• Select Color map to display the deviation of
the measured geometry to the nominal
geometry. Note that the color map display
can be customized. For information, see
• Select the component that will be displayed:
Nominal or Measured.
415
Measuring object dimensions with calipers

A caliper is a measurement instrument widely used in the manufacturing industry to measure
the distance between two opposite sides of an object by adjusting its tips to fit the points to
be measured. The gap between the tips reports the distance between the sides directly, if the
caliper has a built-in scale, or indirectly, if another measurement instrument must be used to
measure the gap.
Introducing calipers
In PolyWorks|Inspector, the caliper tool is a software simulation of a physical caliper. It has
similar behavior and applications. For example, it has two customizable tips.
Calipers are used to inspect distances using the nominal geometry and the geometry of the
part in order to produce results determined by geometry controls. The nominal geometry and
the part geometry are captured by intersecting the surface of aligned Reference and Data
objects with the caliper tips.
Calipers are available on the Measure > Gauges menu or on the Gauges toolbar.
Caliper types
There are two types of calipers:
Standard caliper
Calculates distances on a
3D surface.
Cross-section caliper
Calculates distances on cross-
sections.
416
Axis types
There are two axis types for both types of calipers:
Single axis
Allows creating calipers using one single
axis for both endpoints.
Offset axes
Allows creating calipers using one axis for
each endpoint.
Caliper tip directions

Calipers can have one or both tips facing inward along the direction of measurement,
outward along the direction of measurement, or be anchored.
Inward
An inward tip points towards the other tip.
Outward
An outward tip points away from the other
tip.
Anchored
An anchored tip is fixed and it does not
move from where it is created.
417
Display options
There are display options for the visualization of the results.
2. Under Gauges:
• Select Color map to display the deviation of
the measured geometry to the nominal
geometry. Note that the color map display
can be customized. For information, see
• Select the component that will be displayed:
Creation methodology
A standard dialog box with common and contextual parameters is used for the creation of
calipers.
1. Choose Measure > Gauges > Create > [any

caliper type].
A creation dialog box opens.
2. Specify a Name, if desired.
3. In the Axis type list, click Single Axis or Offset

Axes.
5. In the Submethod list, select a creation

submethod.
This list is not offered for some methods.
6. In the Parameters section, configure the

caliper creation.

creation.
418
Creating standard calipers to measure distances on

objects
it is possible to measure distances between surfaces
using the standard caliper tool, which simulates a
physical caliper. While standard calipers created
using default settings may meet many needs, they
are fully configurable in the creation dialog box or
post creation using their property sheet.
A caliper is a measurement object. It is created to

obtain a) the nominal geometry of the Reference
object, and b) the geometry of the part by extracting
it from an aligned Data object using an existing
caliper. When both geometries have been obtained,
geometry controls are applied to produce the desired results.

Objective: Start inspecting a distance on a part by creating a standard caliper to capture the
nominal component.
Required: The project contains a Reference object.
Steps
1. Choose Measure > Gauges > Create > Standard

Calipers.
The Create Calipers dialog box opens.
2. Select the Axis type:

• Single Axis allows creating calipers that use
one single axis for both endpoints.
• Offset Axes allows creating calipers using
one axis for each endpoint.
3. Choose a Method from those that follow.

The creation of calipers using the most frequently
used methods follows.
All of the possible creation methods are shown to
the right.
419
Anchor
This method allows anchoring caliper endpoints interactively.
2. In the Submethod list, select Two Endpoints.

This allows creating a caliper by specifying the
two endpoints.
If using offset axes, this is the only submethod.
3. Select a Tip direction:

• Automatic specifies the tip direction to
automatically point toward the surface
where the endpoints are located.
• Custom allows configuring the tip direction
to face inward, outward, or be anchored in
space.
4. Specify the Axis orientation.

The caliper axis can be normal to the surface,
follow a system axis, a custom vector, or be
defined by the endpoints.
5. Click Anchor.
An interactive anchoring mode is launched:
• Press the SPACEBAR to interrupt the mode
and rotate the model.
• Pick the endpoints of the caliper on the
Reference object.
• Repeat if desired.
• Right-click to exit the mode.
420
Numerically
This method allows entering numerical values for the coordinates of the caliper endpoints.

This allows creating a caliper by specifying the two
endpoints. If using offset axes, this is the only
submethod.

space.
4. Under 1st endpoint and 2nd endpoint, enter

the (x, y, z) coordinates of the endpoints.
5. If using offset axes, specify the Axis

orientation.
follow a system axis, a custom vector, or be
6. Click Create.
421
From Text File
This method allows creating calipers by importing information from a text file. While the file
must contain the coordinates of one or both endpoints, other information such as vectors,
nominal lengths, and names can also be imported.

submethod.

space.
4. If offset axes are used, specify the Axis

orientation.
follow a system axis or a custom vector, or be
5. Click Browse.
6. Navigate to a text file containing the (x, y, z)

coordinates of the endpoints.
7. In the import dialog box, under Text files,

select a Template that corresponds to the file
structure.
A preview of the file is presented to verify that the
chosen template is correct.
8. Click OK.
422
Results
The new calipers, with a nominal component, A caliper with a single axis and one with
are added to the Tree View under the offset axes are displayed in the 3D scene.
Gauges > Calipers branch.
Notes
• By default, if a Data object is available and aligned when the caliper is created, the
measured component is extracted automatically.
• The One Endpoint submethod allows

creating calipers by specifying only the
first endpoint. The second endpoint is
automatically computed using the
specifications in the Parameters section.
The parameters are slightly different than
the ones for the Two Endpoints
submethod, but the creation workflow is
the same.
423
Extracting the geometry of the part

For an existing caliper, the corresponding geometry of the part can be obtained by extraction
on an aligned Data object. In PolyWorks|Inspector, the geometry obtained on the part is
called the measured component of the measurement object.
When there is a Data object available in the project at caliper creation, the measured
and is aligned, a manual extraction operation must be performed using the caliper.
Objective: Finish inspecting the surface location for an existing caliper by extracting the
corresponding geometry of the part to obtain the measured component of the
caliper.
Required: The project contains a Reference object, an aligned Data object, and a caliper with
a nominal component.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the calipers.
Results
A measured status icon indicates the A caliper with a single axis and one with
measured status of the calipers. offset axes are displayed in the 3D scene. The
color of the calipers corresponds to the
defined color scale and it reflects, by default,
the deviation of the measured component
from the nominal component.
424
Notes
• The extraction parameters of a caliper are saved to the Measurement tab of its property
sheet. They can be edited post creation by selecting the caliper in the Tree View, choosing
Edit > Object Properties, opening the tab, and making other specifications.
• Caliper endpoints can be moved inward or outward after creation.
To do so, select the caliper in the Tree View and choose Measure >
Gauges > Drag Caliper Endpoints.
425
Creating cross-section calipers to measure distances on

cross-sections
Cross-sections allow the 2D analysis of a part at
specific locations. A cross-section caliper allows
further 2D analysis by measuring distances using
only the contours of cross-sections.
A cross-section caliper is a measurement object. It is

created to obtain a) the nominal geometry of the
Reference object, and b) the geometry of the part by
extracting it from an aligned Data object. When both
geometries have been obtained, geometry controls
are applied to produce the desired results.

Objective: Start inspecting a distance on a cross-section by creating a cross-section caliper to

capture the nominal component.
Required: The project contains a Reference object and a cross-section with a nominal
component.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the cross-section and

choose View > Object Navigator > Cross-Sections.
The Cross-Section Navigator dialog box opens,
and the selected cross-section is displayed in
2D in the 3D scene.
2. Choose Measure > Gauges > Create > Cross-
Section Calipers.
The Create Cross-Section Calipers dialog box
opens.
3. Select an Axis type:
• Single Axis allows creating calipers using
one single axis for both endpoints.
• Offset Axes allows creating calipers using
one axis for each endpoint.
The creation of cross-section calipers using the
most frequently used methods follows. All of the
possible creation methods are shown to the right.
426
Anchor
This method allows anchoring cross-section caliper endpoints interactively.

This allows creating a caliper by specifying the
two endpoints. If using offset axes, this is the only
submethod.

to face inward, outward, or to be anchored in
space.
4. Specify the Axis orientation.

follow a standard axis, a custom vector or be
5. Click Anchor.
An interactive anchoring mode is launched:
• Pick the endpoints of the caliper on the
nominal component of the cross-section.
• Repeat if desired.
• Right-click to end the anchoring operation.
427
Numerically
This method allows entering numerical values for the coordinates of the cross-section caliper
endpoints.

submethod.

• Automatic specifies the tip direction to point
automatically toward the surface where the
endpoints are located.
space.
4. Under 1st endpoint and 2nd endpoint, enter

the (x, y, z) coordinates of the endpoints.

orientation.
follow a system axis, a custom vector or be
6. Click Create.
428
From Text File
This method allows creating calipers by importing information from a text file. While the file
must contain the coordinates of one or both endpoints, other information such as vectors,
nominal lengths, and names can also be imported.

submethod.

• Automatic specifies the tip direction to point
automatically toward the surface where the
endpoints are located.
space.

orientation.
follow a system axis, a custom vector or be
5. Click Browse.
6. Navigate to a text file containing the (x, y, z)

coordinates of the endpoints.
7. In the import dialog box, under Text files,

select a Template that corresponds to the file
structure.
A preview of the file is presented, which allows
verifying that the chosen template is correct.
8. Click OK.
429
Results
The new cross-section calipers, with a Single axis and offset axis cross-section
nominal component, are added to the Tree calipers are displayed in the 3D scene.
View under the Gauges > Calipers branch.
Notes
• By default, if the cross-section has a measured component when the cross-section caliper
is created, the measured component of the caliper is extracted automatically.
• The One Endpoint Submethod allows

creating cross-section calipers by only
specifying the first endpoint. The second
endpoint is automatically computed
using specifications in the Parameters
section.
The parameters are slightly different than
the ones for the Two Endpoints
submethod, but the creation workflow is
the same.
430

For an existing cross-section caliper, the corresponding geometry of the part can be obtained
by extraction on an aligned Data object. In PolyWorks|Inspector, the geometry obtained on
the part is called the measured component of the measurement object.
When there is a Data object available in the project at caliper creation, the measured
and is aligned, a manual extraction operation must be performed using the cross-section
caliper.
Objective: Finish inspecting the distance for an existing cross-section caliper by extracting
the corresponding geometry of the part to obtain the measured component of
the caliper.
Required: The project contains a cross-section caliper with a nominal component and its
linked cross-section, and an aligned Data object.
Steps
1. Select a cross-section caliper in the Tree View.

Extracting the cross-section calipers triggers
the extraction of measured component of
their linked cross-section.
Results
A measured status icon indicates the Single axis and offset axis cross-section
measured status of the cross-section calipers calipers are displayed in the 3D scene. The
and the linked cross-section. color of the calipers corresponds to the
defined color scale and reflects, by default,
the deviation of the measured component
from the nominal component.
431
Notes
• The extraction parameters of a caliper are saved to the Measurement tab of its property
sheet. They can be edited post creation by selecting the caliper in the Tree View, choosing
Edit > Object Properties, opening the tab, and making other specifications.
• A caliper’s endpoints can be moved inward or outward after
creation. To do so, select the caliper in the Tree View and choose
Measure > Gauges > Drag Caliper Endpoints.
432
Measuring object radii with profile gauges

The profile gauge is a useful tool to inspect radii on a part on
a cross-sectional plane.
Introducing profile gauges

The profile gauge is used to inspect a profile along a cross-
sectional plane using the nominal geometry and the
geometry of the part in order to produce results determined
by geometry controls.
Several profile gauge types are available that allow inspecting one radius at a profile, or two
radii and the distance between them.
Profile gauges are available on the Measure > Gauges menu or on the Gauges
toolbar.
Profile gauge families

There are three families of profile gauges.
One radius
This family type computes measurements
only for one radius.
Two radii
This family type computes measurements for
two radii.
Design lines
This family type detects one variable radius
representing a feature line. Feature lines are
characteristic lines creased into the side of a
car to give it visual distinction.
433
Profile gauge types

There are several types of profile gauges offered for each family, and certain types obtain
more accurate results in certain applications. To help choose the correct type of profile gauge,
the Visualize type usage section in the creation dialog box offers an interactive display of the
different scenarios where the selected type works.
The selection of gauges for each family meets the needs of most users. In addition, users can
program their own gauges using special creation tools; this advanced subject is not presented
in this document.
Visualizing type usage

1. In the creation dialog box, expand the
Visualize type usage area.
2. A display of the current gauge type is shown.
3. Use the vertical scroll bar to interactively
change the display, showing the possible
scenarios supported by the selected gauge
type. If the two radii families are selected, two
scroll bars are available, one for each radius.
Creation methods
Profile gauge measurements are calculated on a
linked standard cross-section, which is created at
the same time as the profile gauge. This is why
profile gauges share the same creation methods
as standard cross-sections. The methods most
frequently used are presented in this document.
434
1. Choose Measure > Gauges > Create > Profile
Gauges.
The Create Profile Gauge dialog box opens.
2. Specify an object Name, if desired.
3. Specify the gauge Family and Name.

Use the Visualize type usage to display the
possible scenarios supported by the selected
profile gauge type.
5. Specify the required parameters according to

Method-specific parameters may include
browsing for a text file or entering point
coordinates manually.
6. Click Preview to view the measurement zone

of the profile gauge.
7. Click the appropriate button to launch or

confirm the creation of the gauges.
Display options
Display options are available for the visualization of the results.
2. Under Gauges, in the Component list, choose

PolyWorks|Inspector also offers a visualization mode called Profile Gauge Navigator that
displays a single profile gauge in 2D mode, making it easier to understand the results. See
Reviewing profile gauge measurement results on page 539.
435
Creating profile gauges

A profile gauge is a measurement object. It is created to obtain, along a cross-sectional plane,
a) the nominal geometry on the Reference object, and b) the geometry of the part, by
extracting it from an aligned Data object, or by probing the geometry on the part. When both
geometries have been obtained, geometry controls are applied to produce the desired results.

Objective: Start inspecting a profile along a cross-sectional plane by creating a profile gauge
to capture the nominal component.
Required: A Reference object. If there is a Data object in the project, it must be aligned to the
corresponding Reference object.
Steps
1. Choose Measure > Gauges > Create > Profile

Gauges.
The Create Profile Gauges dialog box opens.
2. Choose a gauge Family type and Name.

To better understand how to choose the type, the
Visualize type usage section can be expanded.
In this section, all operations that the selected
type can perform are illustrated. This is for
visualization purposes only, and does not affect
the creation process.

The creation of profile gauges, using the most
frequently used methods, follows.
All of the creation methods are shown to the
right.
436
Along Curve
This method allows creating profile gauges perpendicular to a curve. It involves specifying
the type of curve to use, and then specifying the location of the gauge along the curve.

curves to use the curves of a Reference
object.
3. Under Mode, select Individual.

If multiple profile gauges are needed, the
Multiple mode allows gauges to be spaced
evenly at a specified step along the curve.


point in the 3D scene. Right-click to exit the
anchoring mode.
If At intersection with plane is selected, only
the location of the intersection of the curve and
the chosen standard plane can be picked.
The measurement zone is displayed.

borders.
7. Click Confirm.
Tips
Profile gauges can be created along a whole curve or just using a portion of the curve. When
the Mode is set to Multiple, two anchoring modes become available:
• Whole curve: Profile gauges are created along the entire length of the curve.
• Partial curve: Profile gauges are created between the specified start and end point on
the curve. Click a first point on the curve to indicate the start point and click a second
point to indicate the end point.
437
Along Standard Axis
This method allows creating profile gauges perpendicular to a standard system axis, such as
the X axis. It is recommended to have a properly oriented coordinate system to obtain the
anticipated results.
1. In the Method list, select Along Standard
Axis.

If multiple profile gauges are needed, the
Multiple mode creates gauges evenly spaced at
a specified step, either within a range or by
slicing whole objects.
4. Under Position, specify the coordinate of a

point on the selected standard axis.
The value can be entered in the text box or by
clicking Anchor Point, which allows picking a
point on the Reference object in the 3D scene.
5. Click Preview.
profile gauge is displayed in the 3D scene.
The preview is automatically displayed when
anchoring a point.

borders.
7. Click Confirm.
438
Results
The new profile gauge, with a nominal The profile gauge is displayed in the
the Gauges > Profile branch.
Notes
• By default, if a Data object is available and aligned when the

profile gauge is created, the measured component is extracted
automatically.
• Since a profile gauge is a 2D analysis, a linked cross-section is
automatically extracted on profile gauge creation to compute
measurements.
• The measurement zone of a profile gauge can be edited post creation by following these
steps:
1. Select the profile gauge in the Tree View.

Choose Measure > Gauges > Edit Measurement
Zones.

borders.
439

For an existing profile gauge, the corresponding geometry on the part can be obtained by
the digitizing device should be aligned to the Reference object. In PolyWorks|Inspector, the

When there is an aligned Data object available in the project at profile gauge creation, the
measured component is extracted by default. Otherwise, when the Data object becomes
available and is aligned, a manual extraction operation must be performed using the profile
gauge.
Objective: Finish inspecting the profile for an existing profile gauge by extracting the gauge’s
measured component.
Required: A profile gauge and an aligned Data object.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the profile gauge.
Results
A measured status icon indicates the The profile gauge is displayed in the
measured status of the profile gauge as well 3D scene.
as its linked cross-section.
Notes
• If the profile gauge is created using the wrong family or name, it is possible to change
these parameters as well as other gauge creation parameters. Select the gauge and
choose Edit > Object Properties. The object’s property sheet opens. Open the Profile tab
and make the desired specifications.
440
• It is possible to view in 2D mode the selected profile gauges using the Profile Gauge
Navigator. To access the navigator, choose View > Object Navigator > Profile Gauges. See
Reviewing profile gauge measurement results on page 539.
Probe the geometry

The geometry for a profile on the part can be obtained by probing the measured component
of a profile gauge. The probed points are projected onto the plane defined by the
measurement zone of the gauge. Subsequently, the projected points are joined by a polyline
to define the measured component of the linked cross-section.
Objective: Finish inspecting the profile for an existing profile gauge by probing the
corresponding part geometry.
Required: A Reference object, a profile gauge, a probing device aligned with the Reference
object, and the part.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the profile gauges to

probe.
2. Choose Measure > Gauges > Probe Measured

Profile.
The Probe Measured Profile Gauge Compo-
nents dialog box opens.
3. In the Measurement zone area, select Use.
The selected profile gauges are available in the
adjacent list.
4. Specify a Projection distance.

Probed points within this distance from the
measurement zone are considered as valid
points to compute the measured component.
5. Specify a Max point-to-point distance.

Specifies the maximum distance between points
to be joined together by the polyline.
6. Click Probe.
probe to the desired location. Once within the
profile projection distance, probing is allowed.
441
Results
A measured status icon indicates the The profile gauge is displayed in the
measured status of the profile gauge as well 3D scene.
as its linked cross-section.
Notes
• Measured profile gauges can also be probed without having an existing profile gauge by
using the Probe 2 points method. In this case, a measurement zone must first be defined.
As well, no alignment is necessary for the probing device since no Reference object is
required.
442
Measuring flush and gap with flush & gap gauges

In manufacturing, when performing an assembly, it
can be necessary to measure the flush and the gap
existing between the assembled parts to assure the
assembly meets the design requirements.
Introducing flush & gap gauges

The flush & gap gauge is used to inspect the assembly on a cross-sectional plane using the
nominal geometry and the geometry of the part in order to produce results determined by
geometry controls.
Flush & gap gauges are available on the Measure > Gauges menu or on the Gauges
toolbar.
Flush & gap gauges are organized by family, and each family can have several types
of flush & gap gauges. This selection of gauges meets the needs of most users. Users can
program their own gauges using special creation tools; this advanced subject is not covered in
this document.
Flush & gap gauge families

There are four families of flush & gap gauges: Side B is a line, Side B is made of points, Side
A and B are fillets, and Universal.
The Universal family is the most versatile one, enclosing almost every possible scenario
where both sides are fillets. Since it offers more flexibility, it is the only family that is
addressed in detail. While the types offered in the Universal family have wider applications,
the ones offered for the Side A and B are fillets family have more specific applications.
Flush & gap gauge types

The Universal family offers three standard flush and gap gauge types:
AutoDirections Universal
This type of flush and gap gauge computes
both the gap and the flush whenever A and
B side are fillets.
AutoDirections Universal Flush Only

only the flush whenever A and B side are
fillets.
AutoDirections Universal Gap Only

only the gap whenever A and B side are
fillets.
443
Visualizing type usage

Each flush & gap gauge family and combination of types address specific needs of
measurement. To help choose the correct family and type, the Visualize type usage section
in the creation dialog box offers an interactive display of the different scenarios where the
selected type works.
1. In the creation dialog box, expand the

Visualize type usage area.
2. A display of the current gauge type is shown.
3. Use the vertical scroll bar on each side to
interactively change the display, showing the
gauge type.
Creation methods
Flush & gap gauge measurements are calculated along a linked
standard cross-section, which is created at the same time as the
flush & gap gauge. This is why flush & gap gauges use the same
creation methods as standard cross-sections. The methods most
444
1. Choose Measure > Gauges > Create > Flush &
Gap Gauges.
The Create Flush & Gap Gauges dialog box
opens.
2. Specify an object Name, if desired.
3. Specify the gauge Family and Name.

Use the Visualize type usage to display the
flush & gap gauge type.
4. Specify a creation Method.

Method-specific parameters may include
browsing for a text file or entering point
coordinates manually.

of the flush and gap gauge.

gauge creation.
Display options

445
PolyWorks|Inspector also offers a visualization mode called Flush & Gap Gauge Navigator that
displays a flush & gap gauge in 2D mode, making it easier to read the results. See Reviewing
flush & gap gauge measurement results on page 541.
Typical flush and gap analysis

The figure below illustrates the flush and the gap measured on the part.
Measured
flush
Measured gap
Reference
Side A Side B Data
(definition side)
446
Creating flush & gap gauges

A flush & gap gauge is a measurement object. It is created to obtain, along a cross-sectional
plane, a) the nominal geometry on the Reference object, and b) the geometry of the part, by
extracting it from an aligned Data object, or by probing the geometry of the part. When both
geometries have been obtained, geometry controls are applied to produce the desired results.

Objective: Start inspecting the flush & gap on an assembly by creating a flush & gap gauge to
capture the nominal component.
Required: A Reference object assembly, or separate Reference objects properly aligned to

each other.
If there are Data objects in the project, they must be aligned to the corresponding
Reference objects.
Steps
1. Choose Measure > Gauges > Create > Flush & Gap
Gauges.
The Create Flush & Gap Gauges dialog box
opens.
2. Choose the Family type and the name.

Use the Visualize type usage section to better
understand how to choose the type. The
operations that the selected type performs are
illustrated. This is only for visualization purposes
and does not affect the creation process.
3. Choose the creation Method from the

methods that follow.
The creation of flush & gap gauges, using the
methods most often used, follows.
All of the creation methods are shown to the right.
447
Along Curve
This method allows creating flush & gap gauges perpendicular to a curve. It involves specifying
the type of curve to use, and then specifying the location of the gauge along the curve.

curves to use the curves of a Reference object.

The Multiple mode allows creating evenly spaced
flush & gap gauges at a specified step either


If At intersection with plane is selected, only the

point where the curve and the specified standard
plane intersect can be picked.
The measurement zone is displayed.

only the area of interest, drag the blue borders.
7. Click Confirm.
448
Tips
Flush & gap gauges can be created along a whole curve or just using a portion of the curve.
When the Mode is set to Multiple, two anchoring modes become available:
• Whole Curve:
Flush & gap gauges are created along the entire
length of the curve.
• Partial Curve:
Flush & gap gauges are created between the
specified start and end points on the curve.
Click a first point to indicate the start point, and
click a second point to indicate the end point
on the curve.
Along Standard Axis
This method allows creating flush & gap gauges perpendicular to a standard axis. It is recom-
mended to have a properly oriented coordinate system to obtain the anticipated results.

flush & gap gauges at a specified step either

5. Click Preview.
449

flush & gap gauge is displayed in the 3D scene.
anchoring a point.

7. Click Confirm.
From Text File
It is possible to create the flush & gap gauges from predefined points by importing them from
a text file.
2. Specify the File contents:

• Ordered Points: the file contains a list of
ordered consecutive points.
• Points & Gap Vectors: the file contains a set
of points and gap vectors, and optionally
flush vectors.
450
3. Under Position, specify the path of the text file

to be used. If the file content has been set to
Ordered Points, additional information must
be specified:
• Number of gauges per curve segment:
specifies the number of gauges to create
along each curve segment (line joining two
consecutive points).
• Distance between gauges: specifies the
spacing between gauges along the curve.
4. Click Preview.
flush & gap gauge is presented in the 3D scene.

6. Click Confirm.
Results
The new flush & gap gauge, with a nominal The flush & gap gauge is displayed in the
the Gauges > Flush & Gap branch.
451
Notes
• By default, if Data objects are available and aligned when the flush & gap gauge is created,
the measured component is extracted automatically.
• Since a flush & gap gauge is a 2D analysis, a linked cross-section
is automatically extracted on flush & gap gauge creation to
compute measurements.
• The measurement zone of a flush & gap gauge can be edited post creation by following
these steps:
1. Select the flush & gap gauge in the Tree
View.
2. Choose Measure > Gauges > Edit
Measurement Zones.

borders.

For an existing flush & gap gauge, the corresponding geometry of the part can be obtained by
the digitizing device must be aligned to the Reference object. In PolyWorks|Inspector, the

When there is an aligned Data object available in the project at flush & gap gauge creation, the
measured component can be extracted automatically. Otherwise, when the Data object
becomes available and is aligned, a manual extraction operation must be performed using the
flush & gap gauge.
Objective: Finish inspecting the flush and gap on a part assembly for an existing flush & gap
gauge by extracting the gauge’s measured component.
Required: A flush & gap gauge, and properly aligned Data objects.
452
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the flush & gap gauge.
Results
A measured status icon indicates the The flush & gap gauge is displayed in the
measured status of the flush & gap gauge. 3D scene.
Notes
• If the flush & gap gauge is created using the wrong family or name, it is possible to change
these parameters and other gauge creation parameters. Select the gauge and choose Edit
> Object Properties. The object’s property sheet opens. Open the Flush & gap tab and make
the desired specifications.
• It is possible to view in 2D mode the selected flush & gap gauges using the Flush & Gap
Gauge Navigator. To access the navigator, choose View > Object Navigator > Flush & Gap
Gauges. See Reviewing flush & gap gauge measurement results on page 541.
Probe the geometry

The geometry for a flush and gap on the part can be obtained by probing the measured
component of a flush & gap gauge. The probed points are projected onto the plane defined by
the measurement zone of the gauge. Subsequently, the projected points are joined by
polylines to define the measured component of the linked cross-section.
Objective: Obtain the gauge’s measured component by probing the corresponding part
geometry.
Required: A Reference object, a flush & gap gauge, a probing device aligned with the
Reference object, and the part.
453
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the flush & gap

gauges to probe.
2. Choose Measure > Gauges > Probe Measured

Flush & Gap.
The Probe Measured Flush & Gap Gauge
3. In the Measurement zone area, select Use.
The selected flush & gap gauges are available in
the adjacent list.
4. Specify a Projection distance.

Probed points within this distance from the
measurement zone are considered as valid
points to compute the measured component.
5. Specify a Max point-to-point distance.

Specifies the maximum distance between points
to be joined together by the polyline.
6. Click Probe.
probe to the desired location. Once within the
projection distance, probing is allowed.
Measuring the flush and gap requires probing
two sides and each side is probed in a separate
step.
454
Results
A measured status icon indicates the The flush & gap gauge is displayed in the
measured status of the flush & gap gauge as 3D scene.
well as its linked cross-section.
Notes
• Measured flush & gap gauges can also be probed without having an existing flush & gap
gauge by using the Probe 2 points method. In this case, a measurement zone must first
be defined. Moreover, no alignment is necessary for the probing device since no Reference
object is required.
455
Measuring airfoil geometry with airfoil gauges

From domestic fans to turbines, blades play an important role
in the manufacturing field. They make it possible to use fluid
and gas dynamic principles to either absorb energy from fluids
and gases, or produce energy. As a result, the design of their
cross-sectional shape, called airfoil, must be accurately
calculated and inspected.
Introducing airfoil gauges

The airfoil gauge is used to inspect standard airfoil
characteristics on a cross-sectional plane using the nominal
geometry and the geometry of the part in order to produce
results determined by geometry controls.
Airfoil gauges are available on the Measure > Gauges menu or on the Gauges toolbar.
Airfoil gauges can measure the chord, the camber line, the leading and trailing edge radii and
the maximum thickness, and more.
Airfoil gauge families

There are two families of airfoil gauges.
Aerodynamic
Measurements are based on the aerodynamic
chord that is defined as the vector that joins
the limits of the camber line.
Tangential
Measurements are based on the tangential
chord that is defined as the vector that joins
the two tangential points.
For both families, only the Classic name is available, which results in Aerodynamic - Classic
or Tangential - Classic, depending upon the family chosen.
456
Airfoil edges
Analyzing airfoils implies analyzing their edges, called leading edge (LE) and trailing edge (TE).
Leading edge
Defined by the area of maximum curvature at
the front of the airfoil.
Trailing edge
Defined by the area of maximum curvature at
the rear of the airfoil.
An airfoil typically has both edges. However, some sections can only present the leading edge
or the trailing edge. PolyWorks|Inspector allows analyzing the edges simultaneously, or
individually, depending on the scenario. The shape of the edges can be either circular or
cutback.
Creation methods
Airfoil gauge measurements are calculated on a linked standard
cross-section, which is created at the same time as the airfoil
gauge. This is why airfoil gauges share most of the same creation
methods as standard cross-sections. The methods most
457
1. Choose Measure > Gauges > Create > Airfoil
Gauges.
The Create Airfoil Gauges dialog box opens.
2. Specify a Name, if desired.
3. Specify the family Type.
4. Specify the Edges to analyze on the airfoil

profile.
5. Specify the Edges shapes.
6. Specify the creation Method.


of the airfoil gauge.

gauge creation.
Display options

either Nominal or Measured.
PolyWorks|Inspector also offers a visualization mode called Airfoil Gauge Navigator which
displays the airfoil gauge in 2D mode, making it easier to read the results. See Reviewing airfoil
gauge measurement results on page 543.
458
Typical airfoil analysis

This figure shows an example of airfoil geometry captured by an airfoil gauge and the
standard airfoil characteristics that can be calculated and reported.
Smallest enclosing
circle
Maximum thickness
Maximum Camber line

thickness point
Centroid Maximum
width
Stagger
Datum direction
Chord
Leading edge (LE) Trailing edge (TE)
LE thickness
TE thickness
LE radius and center

TE radius and center
LE point LE tangent point TE tangent point TE point
459
Creating airfoil gauges

An airfoil gauge is a measurement object. It is created to obtain, on a cross-sectional plane, a)
the nominal geometry of the Reference object, and b) the geometry of the part by extracting it
from an aligned Data object. When both geometries have been obtained, geometry controls
are applied to produce the desired results.

Objective: Start inspecting the standard characteristics of an airfoil by creating an airfoil

gauge to capture the nominal component.
Required: A Reference object that represents an airfoil.
Steps
1. Choose Measure > Gauges > Create > Airfoil

Gauges.
The Create Airfoil Gauges dialog box opens.
2. Choose the Family type:
• Aerodynamic: measurements are based on
the aerodynamic chord.
• Tangential: measurements are based on the
tangential chord.
The Name offered for both families is Classic.
3. Specify the Edges to analyze:

• LE and TE: leading edge and trailing edge.
• LE: leading edge only.
• TE: trailing edge only.
4. Set the Edge shapes of the edges to analyze:

Circular
Cutback
5. Choose a creation Method from the ones that
follow.
The creation of airfoil gauges using the most
frequently used methods follows. To the right, all
of the possible creation methods are shown.
460
Along Standard Axis
This method allows creating airfoil gauges perpendicular to a standard axis. It is recom-
mended to have a properly oriented coordinate system to obtain the anticipated results.

airfoil gauges at a specified step either within a
range or by slicing whole objects.

5. Click Preview.
airfoil gauge is displayed in the 3D scene.
anchoring a point.
6. Drag the blue borders to resize the

measurement zone in order to include only the
area of interest.
7. Click Confirm.
461
From Planes
This method allows creating airfoil gauges at the position of existing plane primitives.
1. In the Tree View, select the plane(s) to use.
2. In the Method list, select From Planes.
3. Specify the Primitives to use.

By default, both of the primitive types, Nominal
and Measured, are selected. If a selected plane
has a nominal and a measured primitive, an
airfoil gauge is created at the location of each
primitive.
4. Click Preview.
A preview of the measurement zone of the airfoil
gauge is displayed in the 3D scene.
5. Drag the blue borders to resize the

measurement zone in order to include only the
area of interest.
6. Click Confirm.
462
Results
The new airfoil gauge, with a nominal The airfoil gauge is displayed in the 3D scene.
component, is added to the Tree View under
the Gauges > Airfoils branch.
Notes
• If a Data object is available and aligned when the airfoil gauge is

created, then the measured component is extracted.
• An airfoil gauge uses a cross-section to compute the measurements

since it is a 2D analysis. Because of this, a linked cross-section is
created automatically on airfoil gauge creation.
• The measurement zone of an airfoil gauge can be edited post creation by following these
steps:
1. Select the airfoil gauge in the Tree View.

Choose Measure > Gauges > Edit Measurement
Zones.
463

borders.
464

For an existing airfoil gauge, the corresponding geometry of the part can be obtained by
extraction on an aligned Data object. In PolyWorks|Inspector, the geometry obtained on the
part is called the measured component of the measurement object.
The measured component of an airfoil gauge can be automatically extracted at creation when
there is an aligned Data object available in the project. Otherwise, a manual extraction can be
performed later when the Data object is acquired and properly aligned.
Objective: Finish inspecting the airfoil for an existing airfoil gauge by extracting the gauge’s
measured component.
Required: An airfoil gauge and a properly aligned Data object representing an airfoil part.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the airfoil gauge.
Tip
It is possible to view in 2D mode the selected airfoil gauges using the Airfoil Gauge Navigator.
To do so, choose View > Object Navigator > Airfoil Gauges. For more information, see Reviewing
airfoil gauge measurement results on page 543.
Results
A measured status icon indicates the The airfoil gauge is displayed in the 3D scene.
measured status of the airfoil gauge.
465
Notes
If the airfoil gauge is created using the wrong family or if the information related to the edges
to analyze was specified incorrectly, it is possible to change these parameters and other gauge
creation parameters. Select the gauge and choose Edit > Object Properties. The object’s
property sheet opens. Open the Airfoil tab and make the desired specifications.
466
Additional tools
Build/Inspect
Basic measurements
PolyWorks|Talisman™
Creating Level Planes

Orient to Gravity
467
Measuring displacement during real-time

assembly
When moving a physical part, it is very useful to track its
deviation to stable CAD surfaces or feature(s) to get the
part into the closest possible position.
The Build/Inspect mode offers visual and audio guidance

for tasks such as lining up to a hole or axis, leveling a part,
or securing it in a fixture. Deviations can be measured, in
real time, to a center point, axis, or surface. It is possible
to measure the probe position to one or to many features
simultaneously, using set tolerances for each feature. If
necessary, the deviation can be recorded for later
reference.
Objective: Move a part into position over a fixed assembly hole using real-time guidance.
Required: A CAD model or feature(s), and a probing device aligned to the Reference object.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select a destination feature.

2. Choose Measure > Build/Inspect.
The Build/Inspect dialog box and the Build/
Inspect Objects pane open.
3. In the Method list, select Single Distance to

show guidance to just one feature.
4. Under Object selection, select Specific to

choose which feature to be guided to.
Distance arrows, digital readout values, and audio

feedback in the 3D scene indicate the current
distance of the probe from the destination
feature.
5. Adjust the part, using the guidance, to bring it

closer to the destination.
Build/Inspect feedback is displayed in red and
green, based on positional tolerances.
468
6. Specify the Distance Type, Compensation,

and Tolerance values in the Build/Inspect
Objects pane.
The Inverted compensation method can be useful
when building or inspecting a fixture and only the
CAD model of the part is available.
7. If desired, acquire a point to record the final
position.
Results
If a point is collected, it is added to the Tree The physical part location is optimized (a
View, under the Features branch. A measured representation of the part is shown in blue),
status icon indicates the measured status. and if a point was collected, it is displayed in
the 3D scene.
Notes
It is possible to measure several features Each feature can be assigned an individual

simultaneously by selecting the Multiple Digital Readout that allows the user to track
Distances method. the probe position with regards to more than
one destination.
469
Taking basic measurements interactively

To quickly measure simple dimensions on a model,
cross-section, or feature, use the Basic Measurements tool.
Basic measurements include various distances, radii, curve
lengths, and angles. Calculations are performed by simply
anchoring on the object in the 3D scene. Basic measurements
are not updatable, but offer a quick and easy way to get a
measurement.
Objective: Measure an angle interactively.
Required: The project contains a Reference and/or Data object.
Steps
1. Choose Measure > Interactive Measurements >

Basic.
The Create Basic Measurements dialog box
opens.
2. Specify the Angle measurement type to

measure a basic angle on the part.
3. If the part is aligned to a coordinate system,
select Project onto plane and choose a system
plane or plane feature to constrain the angle
measurement.
4. In the 3D scene, define one side of the angle by

anchoring two or more points on the model.
Press and hold SHIFT to pick the closest vertex.
5. Right-click to confirm the first side.
470
6. Define the second side of the angle by

anchoring two or more points on the model.
Press and hold SHIFT to pick the closest vertex.
7. Right-click to end the measurement.
Results
The angle measurement is added to the The angle measurement is displayed in the
Tree View under the Interactive 3D scene.
Measurements branch.
Notes
It is possible to perform basic measurements

on cross-sections and features as well. This
can make anchoring more accurate.
471
Adding quantitative or visual checks

Inspection processes may require at some point
quantitative checks using conventional metrology tools
such as thread gauges, or visual checks such as the quality
or presence of weld spots.
Quantitative checks imply physical measurements and are
typically reported in terms of numerical values, while visual
checks imply a qualitative test and are typically reported in
terms of pass/fail values.
These checks can be added to the inspection project using the custom measurement objects.
Creating custom measurement objects

Objective: Create custom measurement objects to add quantitative or visual checks to the
inspection project.
Required: The project contains a Reference and/or Data object.
Steps
1. Choose Measure > Custom Measurements >

Create.
The Create Custom Measurements dialog box
opens.
2. Specify the Type:

• Numerical: Quantitative checks reported in
terms of numerical values.
• Qualitative: Visual checks reported in terms
of pass/fail values.
3. Choose one of the following creation methods:
Anchor
This method allows anchoring a point interactively at a representative location of the

measurement.

2. Click Anchor.
The interactive anchoring mode is launched.
472
3. In the 3D scene, anchor a point at a

representative location.
closest vertex.
Numerically
This method allows defining the representative location of the point using specific
coordinates.

2. Specify the Position coordinates to define the
location.
3. Click Create.
Results
The custom measurement object is added to The custom measurement object is displayed
the Tree View, under the Custom in the 3D scene.
Measurements branch.
Notes
The position and orientation (if any) of the custom measurement object are used during Play
Inspection sequences to position and orient the 3D scene.
The next step consists in defining the nominal and measured components for the Numerical
type, or only the measured component for the Qualitative type.
473
Defining the nominal component for the numerical type

Objective: Define the nominal component of a numerical type custom measurement object.
Required: The project contains a numerical custom measurement object.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the numerical custom

measurement object for which to define the
nominal component.
Define Nominal.
Alternatively, right-click the selected object in the
Tree View and choose Define Nominal.
The Define Nominal Custom Measurement
3. Enter the value that defines the nominal
component of the custom measurement
object.
4. Click Create.
Results
The nominal component of the numerical

type custom measurement object is defined.
Defining the measured component

Objective: Define the measured component of custom measurement objects.
Required: The project contains a custom measurement object.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the custom

measurement objects to measure.
474

Define Measured.
Alternatively, right-click the selected objects in the
Tree View and choose Define Measured.
The Define Measured Custom Measurement
Components dialog box opens. It is contextual
to the type of custom measurement object:
Numerical type
1. Enter the Measured numerical value that
defines the measurement.
2. Click Create.
Qualitative type
1. In the Test list, select the qualitative value that
defines the measurement. The following values
are offered:
• Pass
• Warning
• Fail
2. Click Create.
Results
The measured component of custom

measurement objects is defined.
475
Notes
• Tolerances can be adjusted using the Geometry Controls pane. See Editing control
tolerances on page 486.
• In the PolyWorks Metrology Suite, the nominal and measured components of custom
measurements are independent from the units set for the project. This means that if the
project units are modified, custom measurement values are not converted.
476
Measuring when away from the workstation

When performing probing operations away from the computer, which is common for laser
tracker applications, it may be helpful to have access to functions and operations, like
capturing a point or changing the type of feature that will be probed, without having to go
back to the computer. It is possible to perform these operations by using Talisman, which is
the PolyWorks Metrology Suite mobile application.
Connecting to Talisman
Talisman gives remote control of the PolyWorks Metrology Suite such as: accessing the
PolyWorks|Inspector 3D scene and performing 3D transformations; connecting to a probing
or laser-scanning measurement device; configuring measurement modes and parameters;
and data acquisition.
The Talisman application runs on mobile devices and communicates with the PolyWorks
Metrology Suite via a Wi-Fi connection.
Objective: Have remote access to a PolyWorks|Inspector project using Talisman.
Required: The workstation and the mobile device must be connected to the same network
and a PolyWorks|Inspector project must be open on the workstation.
Steps
1. In the Workspace Manager, choose Tools >

Options.
2. In the Workspace Manager Options dialog box,

open the Talisman page.
3. Select the PolyWorks server for Talisman

parameter.
This enables communication between Talisman
and the PolyWorks Metrology Suite. Unless the
user configuration is reset, this only needs to be
done once.
4. Click OK.
5. Start the Talisman application on the mobile

device.
6. Within the Talisman application, select the

project in order to view and perform desired
operations.
477
Creating level planes

Some laser trackers have an electronic level that calculates the inclination of the tracker with
respect to the axis of gravity. PolyWorks|Inspector allows the user to obtain the necessary
information from the tracker's level to create a measured plane primitive. The plane is
oriented with respect to gravity, which results in a plane that is perfectly horizontal.
Objective: Create a level plane.
Required: A laser tracker with an electronic level.
Steps
1. Connect to the laser tracker in

2. Make sure that the laser tracker is initialized.
3. On the Probing Device Control toolbar, click

the arrow next to the Orient to Gravity
button.
4. Choose Create Level Plane.

The laser tracker performs a series of
movements from which it will output a plane
feature that is level.
Results
The plane is added to the Tree View, under

Notes
Once the plane is created, a new coordinate system can be defined using this level plane by
choosing Tools > Coordinate Systems > Create Cartesian.
478
Orienting to gravity
When laser trackers have an electronic level, it is possible to orient them to gravity. The level
inside the tracker computes the inclination of the tracker with respect to the axis of gravity so
that acquired points are compensated by taking into account the computed inclination.
Objective: Orient the laser tracker to gravity.
Required: A laser tracker with an electronic level.
Steps
1. Connect to the laser tracker in

2. Make sure that the laser tracker is initialized.
3. On the Probing Device Control toolbar, click

the Orient to Gravity button.
The laser tracker performs a series of
movements from which it measures its
inclination angles.
Results
A plumb bob icon appears to the left of the active

device position to indicate that the laser tracker is
oriented to gravity.
479
Geometry controls
Dimensional and GD&T controls
480
Controlling measurements using geometry

controls
When inspecting using measurement objects, namely features, cross-sections, comparison
points, and gauges, the main purpose is to control whether the geometric characteristics of
the objects are within the specified tolerance. This is done by adding controls on the
geometric characteristics of measurement objects. These geometry controls can be of two
types.
Dimensional controls – All measurement objects can have dimensional controls. These
controls are used to control, using a tolerance, various geometric characteristics of
measurement objects, like the diameter of a circle, the 3D distance of a comparison point, or
the flush value of a flush & gap gauge. Each dimensional control reports a measured value
and a deviation, is toleranced, and can report a nominal value.
GD&T controls (features only) – Only feature objects can have GD&T controls. These special
controls are used to control precise geometrical dimensions, as specified by the
ASME Y14.5 2009 and ISO standards.
PolyWorks|Inspector offers the Geometry Controls pane that is the unique access through
which the controls of all measurement objects are managed.
The Geometry Controls pane allows doing the following for a measurement object:
• View all dimensions and review the nominal, measured, and deviation values; note that
distance controls and most GD&T controls typically only have a measured value, which is
also the deviation.
• Choose the dimensions to tolerance (become dimensional controls).
• Create GD&T controls for features.
• Edit the tolerance for the controls.
By default, new controls are displayed in the annotation of features in the 3D scene, and are
included in report tables created from all measurement objects.
To review and analyze the results of the geometry controls, it is recommended that the
Control Reviewer tool is used. For information, see Reviewing measurement results using the
Control Reviewer on page 518.
481
The Geometry Controls pane

To open the Geometry Controls pane:
1. Choose Measure > Geometry Controls.

Alternatively, click the Geometry Controls button
on the Main Objects toolbar.
The Geometry Controls pane is displayed.
Column headers Measurement context
List of controls Contextual toolbar
It offers the list of controls for the selected measurement object, a contextual toolbar, column
headers and a measurement context header.
If no measurement object is selected in the Tree View, the list of controls appears empty and
the buttons in the contextual toolbar are grayed out.
Column headers
Identify the values contained in the list of controls. It is possible to show/hide columns by
right-clicking the column header and selecting the appropriate item. Columns can also be
reordered by dragging them to a new location.
List of controls
Displays controls for the selected measurement object in the Tree View.
482
Measurement context
Displayed when the selected object in the Tree View is a cross-section or a cross-section
feature. Two uneditable text boxes are displayed, offering the following content:
• Data Alignment: displays the name of the data alignment to which the cross-section is
bound (or the linked cross-section in the case of cross-section features).
• Best-Fit Activation State: displays the state of the best-fit alignment for the selected cross-
section (or the linked cross-section in the case of cross-section features).
Contextual toolbar
It offers creation and editing functionalities. The toolbar varies depending on the
measurement objects selected in the Tree View, as buttons can be missing or disabled. Some
buttons display a dialog box, while others display a shortcut menu. Refer to the following
section for more information.
The contextual toolbar

Different functions are offered, depending on the context:
Add/Remove Dimensional Controls
Available for all measurement objects. It allows activating or deactivating

the mode for adding/removing dimensional controls.
Add GD&T Control
Available only when the selected measurement object is a feature. It

displays the list of GD&T tools that can be added to the selected feature,
along with their respective symbols.
Set Controls using Template
It displays a shortcut menu that provides a list of the available control

templates for the selected measurement object in the Tree View. By
default, existing GD&T controls are preserved.
Edit Controls
It either displays the Edit Controls dialog box, when selecting a dimensional
control, or the editing window, when selecting a GD&T control. A multiple
selection can be performed.
Remove Controls
It removes the selected controls. A multiple selection can be performed.
483
Set as Default
It saves the current dimensional control specifications as a control

template and sets it as the default template for the selected measurement
object type.
Save as Control Template
It saves the current dimensional control specifications as a control

template for the selected measurement object type.
484
Using the Geometry Controls
Adding and removing controls

The Geometry Controls pane allows viewing all dimensions (for example, radius, diameter, or
x, y, z coordinates) and choosing which one will be used as a control. Check boxes and a
different background color indicate whether each dimension is effectively controlled or not.
Objective: Specify dimensions to control for a measurement object.
Required: A measurement object.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select a measurement object.

Use a multiple selection to specify controls for
same-type measurement objects simultaneously.

The Geometry Controls pane opens.
3. In the pane, click Add/Remove Dimensional

Controls to display all available dimensional
controls for the feature type.
4. Select the desired controls in the expanded list.

Their current results are displayed in the pane.
5. Click Add/Remove Dimensional Controls
again to show only the effective controls.
Results
The added controls, and their current results, are displayed in the Geometry Controls pane.
485
Notes
For features and gauges, if the nominal component is missing, its value can be entered directly
in the cell under the Nominal column. The same applies for the Length, Perimeter, and Area
dimensions of cross-sections.
The Geometry Controls pane is also used to add and encode Geometric Dimensioning and
Tolerancing (GD&T) controls. See Adding and encoding GD&T controls on page 493 for more
information.
Editing control tolerances

A tolerance, consisting of upper and lower tolerance limits, is assigned to each individual
control. Values can be edited manually, or be changed by assigning a tolerance template that
contains predefined tolerance limits.
Standard tolerance templates are provided. However, new tolerance templates can be
created on the Objects > Tolerances page of the PolyWorks|Inspector Options dialog box.
Choose Tools > Options to open the options dialog box.
Objective: Edit the tolerance of a geometry control.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select a measurement

object.
Use a multiple selection to specify tolerances
for same-type measurement objects
simultaneously.
2. Click the arrow in the Tolerance field.

3. Edit the tolerance limits using one of the
following methods:
• Manually: Enter tolerance limit values in
the dialog box displayed.
• Using a template: Click the Assign
Tolerance button in the dialog box
displayed and select a tolerance
template.
486
Results
The new tolerance values are displayed in the

pane.
Notes
Tolerances can be edited for multiple controls

simultaneously by selecting the controls in
the pane and clicking Edit Controls.
Using control templates

When a measurement object is created, its controls and their tolerance are specified by the
object’s default control template. In the Geometry Controls pane, new controls can be added
and different tolerances can be specified for a measurement object. It is possible to save the
current specifications as a new user control template for that type of object, which can then
be used to set the controls of other objects of the same type. It can also be designated as the
default control template for the particular type of object.
Control templates provided with the PolyWorks Metrology Suite are called standard templates
and have the STD prefix in template lists, while control templates created by users have the
USR prefix. Standard templates cannot be deleted.
Saving a control template

Objective: Save a control template from the current controls of a measurement object.
Steps

3. In the pane, modify the controls if required.

See Adding and removing controls on page 485
and Editing control tolerances on page 486.
487
4. Click Save as Control Template.
To save as the default control template for the

type of measurement object, click Set as Default.
5. Specify the name of the new control template

and click Save.
Results
A user control template is saved for the type of

measurement object. It can be used to set the
contents of other measurement objects of the
same type. The default template is in bold.
Setting controls using a template

Objective: Set controls for a measurement object using a control template.
Steps

Use a multiple selection to set the controls for
same-type measurement objects simultaneously.
2. In the Geometry Controls pane, click Set

Controls using Template.
3. Choose the template.
Results
The control template is used to set the controls of the selected measurement object.
488
Managing control templates

The template editor allows personalizing control templates, either to create a new control
template, set a control template as the default for a measurement object type, edit the
contents of a user control template (USR) or delete it from the list of templates.
Managing existing templates

Objective: For a type of measurement object, delete a user template from the list of
templates and change the default control template.
Required: More than two control templates for the measurement object type.
Steps
1. Choose Tools > Edit Templates.

The Edit Templates dialog box opens.
2. In the Type list, select Control.
3. Browse for the desired object type.
4. Select the control template to designate as the

default control template.
The control template Dia+X+Y is selected as an
example.
5. To make the selected template the default

template, click Set as default.
6. To delete an existing user template (USR),

select it and click Delete.
Results
The new default control template is indicated

in bold.
New circles will use the new default control

template.
489
Creating and editing a user control template

Objective: For a type of measurement object, create a new user template and edit its
contents.
Required: PolyWorks|Inspector is open.
Steps

2. In the Type list, select Control.
3. Browse for the desired object type.
4. To create a new user template, click Create.

The Create User Template dialog box opens.
5. Specify the Name of the new user template.

6. Specify the Base Template for the new user
template.
If a template is selected upon creation, it will be
preselected as the base template by default.
7. Click Create.
The newly created user template can be set as
default by selecting the Set as default
parameter.
8. Edit the content of the newly created control

template, directly in the pane to the right, by
selecting the desired controls and changing the
tolerance values for the controls.
9. Click Apply.
490
Results
The new user control template is added to the It can now be assigned to measurement
list of templates. objects.
Notes
Edit the content of a user control template at any time by selecting it in the list, making the
required modifications in the pane, then clicking Apply.
Controlling features
When inspecting using features, the geometric characteristics of the objects can be controlled
with two types of controls: dimensional and GD&T.
• Dimensional controls: They allow controlling, using tolerances, all characteristics of a

feature relating to size, location, and orientation, such as radius, origin, length, and angle.
When nominal and measured values are present for a dimensional control, a deviation is
calculated, and using the specified tolerance, a Pass/Fail status can be determined.
• GD&T controls: These controls are used to control precise geometrical dimensions, as
specified by the ASME Y14.5 and ISO standards. The measurement envelope, datum
constraints, measured results, and Pass/Fail statuses are displayed for each encoded
control.
Adding dimensional controls

Objective: Add dimensional controls to a feature.
Required: A feature measurement object.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select a feature.

Use a multiple selection to modify same-type
features simultaneously.
491


controls for the feature type.
4. Select each desired control in the expanded

list.
Their current results are displayed in the pane.
Results
The added controls and their current results are displayed in the Geometry Controls pane.
Notes
If a nominal feature component exists, the nominal values are displayed in the Nominal
column. If the component is missing, its nominal values can be entered directly in the fields.
492
Adding and encoding GD&T controls

Objective: Add and encode a GD&T control.
Required: A feature measurement object.
Steps

3. In the pane, click Add GD&T Control.
4. In the list, select the desired GD&T control.

Only GD&T controls appropriate for the selected
feature type are displayed.
5. Enter the required information to define the

GD&T control, including Tolerance zone,
Material condition, Datum features, and
Tolerance zone mobility modifier.
Datum Features must be defined before using
them for encoding.
6. Press the ENTER key to confirm.
493
Results
The GD&T control is displayed in the Geometry Controls pane. If the feature contains a
nominal and a measured component, the deviation is automatically calculated.
Notes
When a GD&T control contains an information (for example, an error or a warning), feedback
is provided with different symbols in the Control column. Hovering the mouse over the
symbol displays information about an invalid or incomplete GD&T encoding.
494
Available GD&T controls by feature type

Here is a list of possible GD&T controls by feature type.
Form Size Orientation Location
Concentricity/Coaxiality
Spherical Diameter
Mating Thickness
Mating Diameter
Perpendicularity
Mating Distance
Local Diameter
Surface Profile
Mating Length
Local Distance
Mating Width
Total Runout
Straightness
Cylindricity
Parallelism
Angularity
Symmetry
Circularity
Flatness
Position
Plane *
Cylinder
Cone
Surface
Sphere
Circle
Slot
Rectangle
Polygon
Ellipse
Line
Point
Slab
Pattern
Distance**
* Only available when working under the ISO GD&T standard. This option is available on the
Objects > Features > GD&T page of the PolyWorks|Inspector Options dialog box. Choose Tools >
Options.
** Only available for distances created between lines on cross-sections.
495
Defining datum features

Objective: Define a feature as a datum for use in GD&T controls.
Required: A feature.
Steps

The Properties dialog box opens.
The property sheet of a feature can also be
accessed by double-clicking on it.
3. Click the Feature tab.

4. Select a datum label in the Datum feature
label list.
Labels that are already used are not available in
the list. Custom datum labels can be created by
entering them manually.
5. Click Apply.
Results
The datum label is added to the feature, and

the feature is renamed by default.
Notes
Datum labels can also be assigned to

features during feature creation. While in the
feature creation interface, select a datum
label in the Datum feature label list.
496
Defining datum targets

Objective: Define reference targets as a datum target for use in GD&T controls.
Required: A reference target point or line.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select a reference target.

Standard reference target points and reference
target lines can be used as datum targets.

Alternatively, right-click the selected reference
target in the Tree View and choose Properties.
3. On the Reference target tab, select a datum
label in the Datum target label list.
Labels that are already used are not available in
the list. Custom datum labels can be created by
entering them manually.
4. A default index value, starting at 1, is
automatically populated in the index field to
the right. If desired, manually enter a custom
index number.
5. Click Apply.
Results
The datum label is added to the reference

target and is renamed by default.
Notes
Datum labels can also be assigned to reference

targets on creation. While in the creation
interface, select a datum label in the Datum
target label list.
When used in the Datum Reference Frame of a GD&T control, all index numbers of the
specified datum are used. For example, if reference targets A1, A2, and A3 exist, and Datum A
is specified in the Datum Reference Frame, all three reference targets are used.
497
Defining composite datums

Objective: Create a composite datum from two or more datum features for use in GD&T
controls.
Required: Two or more datums of the same feature type.
Steps
1. Choose Measure > Features > Composite Datum

Features.
The Composite Datum Features dialog box
opens.
In the Creation section:
2. Select the first datum feature in the first list.
3. Select a second datum feature of the same

feature type in the second list, which appears
after specifying the first one.
Only usable datum features, such as datum
features of the same feature type, are displayed
in the list.
4. Continue until the composite datum contains

all the desired datum features.
5. Click Create.
Results
The composite datum feature appears in the The composite datum feature is now
Composite datum features list. available for use in GD&T controls.
498
Creating features from measurement envelopes

Objective: Create features representing the GD&T measurement envelope.
Required: A valid and measured GD&T control.
Steps

3. In the pane, select a GD&T control.

4. Right-click in any field and choose Create
Features > From Measured Envelope.
Results
A new feature is added to the Tree View that The measured envelope is displayed in the
represents the shape and size of the 3D scene at the location of the measured slot
measurement envelope. with respect to the DRF alignment.
Notes
The measurement envelope feature describes the measured value of the GD&T control, the
envelope shape, and the measured location of the feature as constrained by the Datum
Reference Frame.
7.087
499
Controlling cross-sections
The Geometry Controls pane can be used to specify toleranced dimensional controls for a
cross-section. Dimensional controls allow controlling, using tolerances, the characteristics of a
cross-section relating to size, form, and deviation such as Min and Max deviations, line profile,
length, and area. Results can be obtained when the nominal and measured components are
present. For a control, typically the nominal and measured values are used to obtain a
deviation and, using the tolerance and deviation, a Pass/Fail status is determined.
Objective: Specify controls for a cross-section.
Required: A cross-section.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select a cross-section.

Use a multiple selection to modify cross-sections
simultaneously.


controls for the object type.
4. Select the desired controls in the

expanded list.
Current values are displayed in the pane.
500
Results
Controlling comparison points

comparison point. Dimensional controls allow controlling, using tolerances, the
characteristics of a comparison point that relate to its location in space. When the nominal
and measured components are present, results can be obtained. For a control, typically the
nominal and measured values are used to obtain a deviation and, using the tolerance and
deviation, a Pass/Fail status is determined.
Objective: Specify controls for a comparison point.
Required: A comparison point.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select a comparison point.

Use a multiple selection to modify comparison
points simultaneously.


501

expanded list.
Current values are displayed in the pane for the
new controls.
Results
Controlling calipers
caliper. Dimensional controls allow controlling, using tolerances, the characteristics of a
caliper that relate to its length and location in space. When the nominal and measured
components are present, results can be obtained. For a control, typically the nominal and
measured values are used to obtain a deviation and, using the tolerance and deviation, a
Pass/Fail status is determined.
Objective: Specify controls for a caliper.
Required: A caliper.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select a caliper.

Use a multiple selection to modify calipers
simultaneously.
502



expanded list.
new controls.
Results
Controlling profile gauges

profile gauge. Dimensional controls allow controlling, using tolerances, the characteristics of a
profile gauge that relate to its size and deviation from the nominal component. The exact
controls available depend on the profile family type. For a control, typically the nominal and
Objective: Specify controls for a profile gauge.
Required: A profile gauge.
503
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select a profile gauge.

Use a multiple selection to modify profile gauges
simultaneously.



expanded list.
new controls.
Results
504
Controlling flush & gap gauges

flush & gap gauge. Dimensional controls allow controlling, using tolerances, the
characteristics of a flush & gap gauge that relate to its size and deviation from the nominal
component. The exact controls available depend on the flush & gap family and name. For a
control, typically the nominal and measured values are used to obtain a deviation and, using
the tolerance and deviation, a Pass/Fail status is determined.
Objective: Specify controls for a flush & gap gauge.
Required: A flush & gap gauge.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select a flush & gap gauge.

Use a multiple selection to modify flush & gap
gauges simultaneously.



expanded list.
new controls.
505
Results
Controlling airfoil gauges

The Geometry Controls pane can be used to specify toleranced dimensional controls for an
airfoil gauge. Dimensional controls allow controlling, using tolerances, the characteristics of
an airfoil gauge that relate to its size, form, and deviation from the nominal component. The
exact controls available depend on the airfoil family. For a control, typically the nominal and
Objective: Specify controls for an airfoil gauge.
Required: An airfoil gauge.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select an airfoil gauge.

Use a multiple selection to modify airfoil gauges
simultaneously.


506
4. Select the desired controls from the expanded

list.
new controls.
Results
507
Reporting
measurement
results
Annotations
Annotations are graphical notes displayed in the
3D scene in order to identify objects and provide
information about them. By default, each object
shown in the 3D scene has an annotation attached
to it.
Annotations differ slightly from one type of object

to another.
Annotation overview
Annotations are typically in a table format. Here is a typical example of an annotation:
1
2
6
4
A toolbar displayed when hovering the mouse over an

Annotation mini
1 annotation. For more information, see The Annotation mini
toolbar toolbar on page 510.
Displays the object name, preceded by an icon that represents

2 Header the object type and the measurement status of the object
(measured or unmeasured).
3 Lines List all the object controls, one per line.
Present attributes of the controls, such as the nominal,

4 Columns
measured and deviation values, as well as the pass/fail test.
5 Attachment line A line that links the annotation to the corresponding object.
6 Attachment point The location where the annotation is attached to the object.
509
The Annotation mini toolbar

The annotation mini toolbar is displayed when hovering the mouse over an annotation. It
offers the following buttons:
Position Annotations
Enables or disables the interactive mode that allows repositioning

annotations in the 3D scene. For more information, see Repositioning annota-
tions in the 3D scene on page 511.
Lock/Unlock Annotation Position
Locks or unlocks the position of the current annotation. When the annotation
is locked, its position remains unchanged with respect to the object. Its
repositioning is only possible using the Position Annotations tool.
Edit Annotation
Opens a dialog box that allows specifying the type of information that will be
displayed in the current annotation or modifying the appearance of this
annotation. For more information, see Editing an object annotation on
page 515.
Hide Annotation
Hides the current annotation. Hover the mouse over the attachment point of
the annotation to display a button that allows displaying the annotation.
510
Repositioning annotations in the 3D scene

To maximize the clarity of report snapshots, it is possible to reposition annotations in the
3D scene prior to taking a snapshot. This operation can be made for a specific annotation or
for all annotations simultaneously.
Objective: Reposition object annotations in the 3D scene.
Required: The project contains an object with a visible annotation.
Steps
1. Choose Tools > Annotations > Position.
Alternatively, mouse over the annotation and

click the Position Annotation button on the
Annotation mini toolbar.
The positioning annotation mode is activated.

The Annotation Display Options toolbar is
displayed in the lower part of the 3D scene.
See The Annotation Display Options toolbar on
page 513.
2. Reposition the annotations using one of the
following methods.
Interactively
This method allows repositioning annotations individually in the 3D scene by dragging them
to the desired location.
1. Left-click an annotation.
The annotation is displayed in red, and a hand
symbol is displayed when hovering the mouse
over the annotation.
2. Hold the left mouse button and drag to the

desired location.
• Press Spacebar to temporarily exit the mode
and perform rotations/translations.
• Press ESC to exit the mode or click the first
button on the mini toolbar.
511
Automatically
This method allows repositioning annotations simultaneously in the 3D scene based on the
automatic repositioning modes available.
1. On the Annotation Display Options toolbar,
click the arrow next to the annotation
positioning button.
2. Choose a positioning mode from the drop-
down list to position all annotations either:
• Close to object: annotations are
automatically positioned as close as
possible to their related object.
• Close to border: annotations are
automatically positioned along the top,
bottom, left, and right boundaries of the 3D
Scene pane in a way that minimizes
annotation overlap and the intersection of
annotation attachment lines.
Results
The annotations are now repositioned in the 3D scene. When they have been repositioned
automatically, two choices are offered and the difference between both is shown below:
• Close to border
512
• Close to object
Notes
• The View menu offers tools used to hide, hide interactively, and restore annotations.
• When an annotation is repositioned by the user, it is automatically locked, which means
that the length and the orientation of the attachment line will not change, even when
performing a transformation in the 3D scene (for example, zoom, rotation, and
translation). The annotation can be unlocked using the appropriate button on the mini
toolbar, or by right-clicking the object in the Tree View, and choosing Annotation > Unlock
Position.
The Annotation Display Options toolbar
Sets the annotation positioning mode to close to object/border
Menu button that allows positioning the annotations close to the object or
along the boundaries of the 3D Scene pane. In both cases, the annotation
overlap and the intersection of annotation attachment lines are
minimized.
Options related to annotation positioning mode
Offers options that allow controlling the display and positioning of

annotations. It also allows specifying the minimal length of the attachment
line, in pixels.
513
Locks/unlocks the position of all annotations
Menu button that allows locking or unlocking the position of all

annotations.
Hides or restores all annotations
Displays or hides all annotations.
514
Editing an object annotation

On creation, the information of object annotations is determined using a default annotation
template. The content of an annotation can be changed by applying another template, or by
adding and removing items manually. It is also possible to modify the appearance of
annotations.
Setting object annotation content

Annotations are configurable. It is possible to add or remove information items displayed on
creation, as well as to modify the order in which the items appear.
Objective: Edit the content of an object annotation.
Required: The project contains an object.
Steps
1. Choose Tools > Annotations > Edit, then left-click

an object annotation in the 3D scene.
Alternatively, mouse over the annotation, and

click the Edit Annotation button on the
Annotation mini toolbar.
The annotation editor opens, displaying the

object annotation.
2. Set the object annotation content using one of

the following methods.
From a Template
1. On the annotation editor toolbar, click Set
Contents using Template.
2. On the menu, select the annotation template

to apply.
515
Manually
1. On the annotation editor toolbar, click Edit
Contents.
2. On the menu, select the section of the

annotation to modify.
In this example, Columns is selected. The Edit
Columns dialog box opens.
Alternatively, right-click in an empty area of the
annotation editor and click Edit Header, Edit
Columns or Edit Lines to access the dialog box
that allows editing the appropriate content.
Notes
The changes made can be applied to all same-type

objects by clicking the check box at the bottom of
the Edit Annotation dialog box.
Results
The annotation content is set as specified.
516
Modifying the appearance of annotations

It is also possible to modify the appearance of annotations.
Objective: Edit the appearance of an annotation.
Required: The project contains an object with an annotation.
Steps
1. Choose Tools > Annotations > Edit, then left-click

an object annotation in the 3D scene.
Alternatively, mouse over the annotation, and
click the Edit Annotation button on the
annotation mini toolbar.
The annotation editor opens, displaying the

object annotation.
2. On the annotation editor toolbar, click Edit

Format.
The Display > Annotations > Formatting
page of the PolyWorks|Inspector Options
dialog box opens.
3. Edit the formatting options of annotations.

4. Click Apply.
The formatting is applied to all annotations
that appear in the 3D scene.
Results
The annotation appearance is set as specified.
517
Reviewing measurement results using the

Control Reviewer
The Control Reviewer offers a condensed view of the most important information of an
inspection project: geometry controls. It displays a table of the controls, and it offers
operations to filter, sort, and group them in views. Its content is also synchronized with the
3D scene. Unlike 2D formatted reports, the 3D scene can be manipulated to better view the
information.
The Control Reviewer can be used to:
• Review metrology results in an effective way

• Structure inspection projects
• Enhance the reporting workflow
The Control Reviewer pane

To open the Control Reviewer pane:
1. Choose Report > Control Reviewer.

Alternatively, click the Control Reviewer button
on the Main Objects toolbar.
The Control Reviewer pane is displayed. It offers the Controls list box, a contextual toolbar,
column headers, the list of controls, and statistics.
Controls list box
Menu bar
Contextual
toolbar
Column headers
List of controls
Statistics
518
Menu bar
Provides access to all Control Reviewer functionalities.
Controls list box
Specifies the controls that will be listed in the pane.
Contextual toolbar
Offers quick access to common operations. The operations offered on this toolbar change
according to the selected item in the Controls list box.
Column headers
Used to filter and sort controls. It is also possible to show/hide column headers as well as
reorder them.
List of controls
Displays controls according to the item selected in the Controls list box. Filters can also be
applied to reduce the number of controls displayed.
Statistics
Displays statistics on the controls listed in the pane:

• Total number of controls;
• Number of measured controls;
• Number of controls that are out-of-tolerance (Fail) or for which a warning is issued.
519
The contextual toolbar

Different tools are offered, depending on the context:
Create Control View
Enters a creation mode based on all the controls listed in the pane, and
opens the Create Control View dialog box.
Create Control View from Selected Controls
Enters a creation mode based on the controls selected in the pane, and
opens the Create Control View dialog box.
Edit Control View
Enters an edition mode for the current control view.
Delete Control View
Deletes the current control view.
Clear Filters
Removes all applied filters.
Edit Context
Opens the Edit Context dialog box, which is used to edit the coordinate
system and the data alignment used to display the controls currently
selected.
Center on All Controls
Positions the 3D scene to show all the controls currently listed in the pane
as much as possible, as well as their annotations.
Center on Selected Controls
Positions the 3D scene to show the controls currently selected as much as

possible, as well as their annotations.
Restore Project View
Restores the 3D scene project view of the current control view.
520
Create Snapshot and Table
Creates a report snapshot and a report table for the current control view.
Create Table
Creates a report table for the current control view.
Create Snapshot
Creates a report snapshot for the current control view.
521
Using the Control Reviewer
Reviewing controls
By default, all active controls of all measurement objects in the project are listed in the
Control Reviewer pane, offering an overview of the results without having any report items or
formatted reports created. These controls can be filtered and sorted.
Filtering controls using the Controls list
Steps
1. In the Control Reviewer pane, open the

Controls list box.
2. Choose one of the following options:
• (All Controls): Displays all active controls of
all measurement objects in the inspection
project.
• (From Selected Objects): Displays all active
controls of the selected measurement
objects. Objects can be selected in the
3D scene as well as in the Tree View.
• Control Views: User-defined control views
are listed under this item. Displays the
controls associated with the selected control
view.
Results
Controls are listed in the pane according to the selection made in the Controls list box.
522
Filtering controls using filters
Steps
1. In the Control Reviewer pane, identify the

columns that have a filter icon.
Column headers with a filter icon indicate that
controls in that column can be filtered.
2. Click the filter icon of a column header.

A contextual dialog box is displayed.
3. Enable the Activate filter parameter.
Depending on the column, controls can be
filtered using a string-based filter, or a multiple
selection from a predefined list of filters.
String-based filter
1. In the list, choose a filtering method:
• Is Equal To: Search for strings that are equal
to the specified string.
• Contains: Search for strings that contain the
specified string.
2. Type the string that will be used to filter the
controls.
Multiple-selection based filter

1. In the list, choose a filtering method:
• Is Equal To: Search for results that are equal
to the selection.
• Is Different From: Search for results that
are different from the selection.
2. Select the desired expressions used to filter
controls.
523
Results
The list of controls is filtered, and only the relevant controls are displayed.
Notes
When a column is filtered, its header is displayed in italics and the filter icon is colored.
Sorting controls
Steps
1. In the Control Reviewer pane, move the mouse

pointer over the desired column header.
2. Click a column header to sort controls.
All column headers can be sorted by increasing/
decreasing values. A third click on a column
header removes the sorting.
Results
The list of controls is sorted.
524
Introducing control views

Historically, engineering drawings have been conceived in terms of views: top, side, front, and
auxiliary views present the dimensions and measurements of a part. CAD software capable of
adding PMI to 3D models also use the concept of views.
Control views can be used to review measurement results in an effective and structured
manner, offering an enhanced inspection workflow.
Creating control views from selected controls
Steps
1. In the list of controls, select the controls that

will be included in the control view.
Use CTRL or SHIFT when left-clicking to select
multiple controls.
If desired, controls can be filtered and sorted
to list only specific controls in the pane.
2. In the Control Reviewer pane, click Center on

Selected Controls.
This positions the 3D scene to show, as much
as possible, the associated objects and their
annotations.
3. In the Control Reviewer pane, click Create
Control View from Selected Controls.
The Create Control View dialog box opens.
4. In the 3D scene, adjust the orientation of the
objects and position of the annotations.
While in the creation mode, a toolbar that offers
quick access to annotation display options is
available. See The Annotation Display Options
toolbar on page 513 for detailed information.
5. In the Create Control View dialog box, specify a

name for the control view.
6. Click Create.
525
Results
• The control view is saved and added to the Control Views section of the Controls list box.
• The control view can now be selected in the Controls list box. When selected, its controls
are listed in the pane, and the associated 3D scene view is displayed.
Notes
• Create report item is available in the Create

Control View dialog box. It is used to create the
report items linked to the control view being
created.
When selected, the following items are offered
in the adjacent list box:
Create Table
Create Snapshot
Create Snapshot and Table
526
Editing control views
Steps
1. In the Control Reviewer pane, select a control

view in the Controls list box.
2. Click Edit Control View on the Contextual

toolbar.
The Edit Control View dialog box opens.
3. Modify the view of the part in 3D scene, change
annotation positions, rename the view, apply
filters, sort the list of controls, or change object
visibility options.
4. Click OK to save changes made to the control
view.
Results
The control view now contains all the

changes that were made.
527
Displaying controls in the 3D scene

Controls and their associated measurement objects can be displayed in the 3D scene based
on the project view embedded in a control view, or based on the content of Control Reviewer
pane.
From a control view
Steps
1. In the Control Reviewer pane, choose a control

view from the Controls list box.
Results
The project view associated with the control view is shown in the 3D scene.
Notes
If the project view associated with the control view

is modified but not saved, Restore Project View
can be clicked to restore the saved project view.
A project view contains the list of displayed objects,

elements and annotations and their position in the
3D scene.
528
From the list of controls
Steps
Center on All Controls

1. If desired, filter and sort controls to display
only specific controls in the list of controls.
2. Click Center on All Controls.
Center on Selected Controls

1. In the list of controls, select the controls that
will be displayed in the 3D scene.
Use SHIFT or CTRL when left-clicking to select
multiple controls.
2. Click Center on Selected Controls.
529
Results
The 3D scene displays the controls based on the selection that was previously made.
530
Generating snapshots and report tables from control

views
Reports can also be used to analyze and communicate inspection measurements. Typically, a
report consists of report tables and snapshots, complete with observations, comments, and
conclusions – all formatted into a printable document.
Reporting using control views allows generating snapshots and report tables that are
synchronized and linked to control views. In other words, snapshots display the project view
of the control view they are associated with, and report tables display the controls of the
control view they are associated with.
Steps
1. In the Controls list box of the Control Reviewer

pane, select the control view that will be in the
report.
2. Click the arrow next to Create Snapshot and
Table, and choose one of the following:
• Create Table: Creates a report table linked
to the current control view.
• Create Snapshot: Creates a snapshot
linked to the current control view.
• Create Snapshot and Table: Creates a
snapshot and a report table linked to the
current control view.
Results
Report items linked to the control view are created and automatically included in the active
formatted report.
531
Notes
• When creating a control view, it is possible to

create both the control view and the
corresponding report items.
• Report items of all control views can also be

automatically generated by choosing Report >
Create Snapshots and Tables > From All Control
Views.
Alternatively, click the Create Snapshots and

Tables from All Control Views button on the
Main Objects toolbar.
532
Viewing measurement results using the object

navigator
Object navigators are specialized tools that
allow viewing objects one by one. In
addition, they display the dimensional and
GD&T controls of features, and the
measurement results of gauges.
Such visualization of the measurements

provides information about deviation
sources and direction, which can be useful
when troubleshooting.
Object navigators are available for:
• Features
• Cross-sections
• Airfoil gauges
• Flush & gap gauges
• Profile gauges
To access the object navigators, choose one from the View > Object Navigator submenu.
533
Reviewing feature measurement results

The Feature Navigator is useful to review feature results,
in order to view the dimensional and the GD&T
measurements for each feature individually. This
visualization of the measurements provides information
about the deviation. Note that when features are
created on cross-sections, features are shown on their
cross-section.
Feature dimension results

Objective: Display the result of a dimensional measurement on the model.
Required: The PolyWorks|Inspector project must have measured features with a

dimensional control.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the features to

visualize.
2. Choose View > Object Navigator > Features or
right-click and choose View > Feature Navigator.
The Feature Navigator dialog box opens.
3. In the Feature list, select the feature to display.

4. In the Control list, select the dimensional
control to display.
5. To display the nominal and/or measured
feature, select Show nominal components
and/or Show measured components.
Results
The feature dimensions for the selected

feature are displayed in the 3D scene.
534
Feature GD&T controls

Objective: Display the result of a GD&T measurement on the model, showing the datum
reference frame, alignment, and calculated features.
Required: The PolyWorks|Inspector project must have a measured feature with a GD&T
control.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the feature to visualize.

2. Choose View > Object Navigator > Features or
right-click and choose View > Feature Navigator.
The Feature Navigator dialog box opens.
3. In the Control list, select the GD&T control to

display.
4. To display the nominal and/or measured

feature, select Show nominal components
and/or Show measured components.
5. A color map can be displayed on GD&T

controls that are measured using data points
(for example, Surface Profile) by selecting
Show GD&T control color map.
6. If Show datum reference frame alignment is

selected, it displays the dataset and measured
features in position, as defined by the datums
in the datum reference frame.
7. Display the datum reference frame

components by selecting the items under
Datum features.
535
Results
The model, datums used in the datum The nominal feature and the aligned and
reference frame, and feature itself are constrained measured feature are displayed,
displayed in the 3D scene. The measured using Pass/Fail colors.
features are aligned using the datum
reference frame.
Measured Nominal
536
Reviewing cross-section measurement results

It is useful to review cross-section results, using the Cross-
Section Navigator, in order to visualize each cross-section
individually. Such visualization of the cross-sections
provides information about deviation, which can be useful
when troubleshooting.
Objective: Display the results of a cross-section, showing the nominal and measured
sections and deviations.
Required: The PolyWorks|Inspector project must have measured cross-sections.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the cross-sections to

visualize.
2. Choose View > Object Navigator > Cross-
Sections or right-click and choose View > Cross-
Section Navigator.
The Cross-Section Navigator dialog box opens.
3. In the Cross-section list, select the cross-

section to display.
4. Select Show nominal component and/or

Show measured component to display the
nominal and/or measured cross-section
components.
5. To manually modify the cross-sections by

extending, adjusting, or cutting them, click the
Extend, the Pick and Place Vertices, or the
Cut Segments button.
537
Results
The cross-sections and deviations are

displayed in 2D in the 3D scene.
Notes
By default, measured cross-sections are

displayed along with a deviation color map
and deviation vectors. To hide the color map
and show only the cross-section profiles, click
Hide Color Map.
538
Reviewing profile gauge measurement results

It is useful to review profile gauge results, using the Profile Gauge
Navigator, in order to see how the results were obtained. Such
visualization provides information about deviation, which can be
useful when troubleshooting.
Objective: Display the result of a profile gauge, showing the

measurement zone, cross-sections, and gauge dimensions.
Required: The PolyWorks|Inspector project must have measured profile gauges.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the profile gauges to

visualize.
2. Choose View > Object Navigator > Profile
Gauges or right-click and choose View > Profile
Gauge Navigator.
The Profile Gauge Navigator dialog box opens.
3. In the Profile gauge list, select the gauge to

display.
4. In the Component list, select a component to

display the Nominal or Measured
component.
5. To show the components of the cross-sections

used to calculate the profile gauge, select
Show nominal component and/or Show
measured component.
539
Results
The profile gauge dimensions and linked

cross-sections are displayed in 2D in the
3D scene.
Notes
To view both the nominal and measured profile gauge results simultaneously, select Split
view. The nominal cross-sections and profile gauge dimensions are displayed on the left. The
measured cross-sections and profile gauge dimensions are displayed on the right.
Nominal Measured
540
Reviewing flush & gap gauge measurement results

It is useful to review flush & gap gauge results, using the Flush &
Gap Gauge Navigator, in order to see how the results were
determined. Such visualization provides information about
deviation, which can be useful when troubleshooting.
Objective: Display the result of a flush & gap gauge, showing

the measurement zone, cross-sections, and gauge dimensions.
Required: The PolyWorks|Inspector project must have measured flush & gap gauges.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the flush & gap gauges

to visualize.
2. Choose View > Object Navigator > Flush & Gap
Gauges or right-click and choose View > Flush &
Gap Gauge Navigator.
The Flush & Gap Gauge Navigator dialog box
opens.
3. In the Flush & gap gauge list, select the gauge

to display.

component.
5. Select the Show variable annotations to

display the coordinates of the gauge contact
points and other gauge key points.

used to calculate the flush & gap gauge, select
Show nominal component and/or Show
measured component.
541
Results
The flush & gap gauge dimensions and linked

3D scene.
Notes
To view both the nominal and measured flush & gap gauge results simultaneously, select Split
view. The nominal cross-sections and flush & gap gauge dimensions are displayed on the left.
The measured cross-sections and flush & gap gauge dimensions are displayed on the right.
Nominal Measured
542
Reviewing airfoil gauge measurement results

It is useful to review airfoil gauge results, using the Airfoil Gauge
Navigator, in order to examine each individual cross-section.
Such visualization provides information about deviation, which
can be useful when troubleshooting.
Objective: Display the result of an airfoil gauge, showing the measurement zone, cross-
sections, and gauge dimensions.
Required: The PolyWorks|Inspector project must have measured airfoil gauges.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the airfoil gauges to

visualize.
2. Choose View > Object Navigator > Airfoil
Gauges or right-click and choose View > Airfoil
Gauge Navigator.
The Airfoil Gauge Navigator opens.
3. In the Airfoil gauge list, select the gauge to

display.

component.

used to calculate the airfoil gauge, select Show
nominal component and/or Show measured
component.
543
Results
The airfoil gauge dimensions and linked

3D scene.
Notes
To view both the nominal and measured gauge results simultaneously, select Split view. The
nominal cross-sections and gauge dimensions are displayed on the left. The measured cross-
sections and gauge dimensions are displayed on the right.
Nominal Measured
544
Reporting
Producing reports is key to analyzing and communicating inspection measurements. Typically,
a report consists of report tables and report snapshots, completed by observations,
comments, and conclusions, all formatted into a printable document.
PolyWorks|Inspector offers tools to generate and edit such reports.
Here is the typical workflow for reporting:
1. Create report tables.

Create report tables from
measurement objects in the Tree
View.
They are automatically added to the
active formatted report
2. Create 3D scene snapshots.

Create snapshots of the 3D scene to
show inspection results.
They are automatically added to the
active formatted report.
3. Prepare the formatted report.

Using the Report Editor tool, format
the report to include project and
piece information, comments on the
results, and shapes to emphasize
content.
4. Export.
Export the formatted report into
different formats, such as PDF.
The individual report items can be
exported as well. An example is to
export to Microsoft Excel.
545
Working with report tables

A report table is a listing of the desired information of any measurement object, such as
nominal and measured values, tolerances, deviations, and pass/fail status. Tables are a very
useful way to summarize inspection results.
Typically, a measurement object report table

includes a title, a header area, the name of each
object, and the following information for each
of its controls:
• Nominal and measured values

Note that certain dimensional controls (for example, distance controls), and GD&T controls
(except size controls), do not have nominal values.
• Tolerance limits
• A deviation
• A pass/fail test result
• Out-of-tolerance value
Since objects are updated by the Automatic Project Update mechanism, table results are
automatically updated as well. Table contents and formatting can be edited to suit different
reporting needs. Table reports can be incorporated into a formatted report or exported for
use in applications like Microsoft Excel.
Creating report tables

Objective: Create a report table containing the current results of a measurement object.
Required: The project contains a measurement object.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the measurement object

for which to report measurements.
2. Choose Report > Create Tables > From Objects.
546
Results
The report table is added to the active The report table is automatically positioned
formatted report, shown at the bottom of the on a page in the report, and can be viewed
Tree View. by double-clicking the report name in the
Tree View.
Notes
If two or more types of object are selected, a report table will be generated for each type. In
the example shown below, all selected features are included in one report table, and selected
comparison points are included in a second report table.
547
Setting report table contents using a template

When a report table is created from a measurement object, its contents are specified by the
object’s default table template. The report table can then be edited as required, by adding and
removing information and changing the formatting. A new user table template can be created
from the setup of the current report table, and can then be used to set the contents and
formatting for other reports of the same type. It can also be designated as the default table
template for the particular type of report table.
Table templates provided with the PolyWorks Metrology Suite are called standard templates
and have the STD prefix in template lists, while table templates created by users have the USR
prefix. Standard templates cannot be deleted.
Objective: Set the contents of a report table by applying a table template.
Required: The project contains a report table.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, double-click a report name to

open the Report Editor.
2. In the Report Editor, select a report table.

3. Choose Edit > Table.
The table editor opens displaying the report
table.
4. On the table editor toolbar, click Set Contents

using Template.
5. On the menu, select the table template to

apply.
Results
The report table has the contents and formatting defined by the table template.
548
Editing report table contents manually

Objective: Edit the contents of a report table manually.
Steps

2. In the Report Editor, select the report table to

edit.
table.
4. On the table editor toolbar, click Edit Contents

to edit the contents.
5. On the menu, select the section of the table to

modify.
In this example, Columns is selected. The Edit
Columns dialog box opens.
549
6. To add columns, select them in the Available

columns list, and click the Add arrow to
transfer them to the Displayed columns list.
7. To remove displayed columns, select them in

the Displayed columns list, and click the
Remove arrow to transfer them to the
Available columns list.
8. Reorder the displayed columns using the Move

Up and Move Down arrows located on the right
side.
9. Click Apply to view the changes in the table.
10. Click OK to close the editor.
11. Repeat steps 3 through 9 to edit other sections

of the table.
A similar dialog box is available when editing the

other sections, such as Title and Table Header.
However, when editing Lines, the dialog box
features a list box that specifies if a table shows All
Controls for the measurement objects, or allows
selecting Specific lines (specific controls and
dimensions) – Specific must be selected.
Results
The report table now contains the desired information.
550
Notes
Edit more quickly using the shortcut menus available by right-clicking in the different sections
of the table editor:
• Click Edit Title, Edit Table Header, Edit Object Header, Edit Columns, and Edit Lines for
the dialog boxes like those described previously.
• Add and remove items for each section by clicking them on the section’s shortcut menu.
551
Saving a table template

Objective: Save a table template from a modified report table.
Steps


table.
4. On the table editor toolbar, click Save as

Template to save the current report table
configuration as a user table template.
The Save as Template dialog box opens.
5. Specify the name of the new table template

and click Save.
Results
The new user table template (USR) is saved. It

can be applied to other report tables of the
same type.
552
Managing table templates

The template editor allows personalizing table templates, either to create a new table
template, to set a table template as the default one, edit the contents of a user table template
or delete it from the list of table templates.
Managing existing templates

Objective: For an object type, set a default table template, or delete a user template from the
list of table templates.
Required: More than two table templates for the object type.
Steps
1. Choose Tools > Edit templates.

2. In the Type list, select Table.
3. Browse for the desired table type.
4. Select the table template to define as the

default one.
The feature table template SavedTemplate is
selected as an example.
5. To make the selected template the default

template, click Set as Default.
6. To delete an existing user template (USR),

select it and click Delete.
553
Results
The new default table template is indicated in

bold.
New feature report tables will be created using

the new default table template.
Creating and editing a user table template

Objective: Create a new user template for an object type and edit its contents.
Required: PolyWorks|Inspector is open.
Steps

2. In the Type list, select Table.
3. Browse for the desired table type.
4. To create a new user template, click Create.

The Create User Template dialog box opens.
5. Specify the Name of the new user template.

6. Specify the Base template for the new user
template.
If a template is selected upon creation, it is
preselected as the base template by default.
7. Click Create.
The newly created user template can be set as
default by selecting the Set as default option.
554
8. Edit the content of the newly created table

template directly on the right pane.
For more information, see Editing report table
contents manually on page 549.
9. Click Apply.
Results
The new user table template is added to the list It can now be to assigned to report tables.
of table templates.
Notes
Edit the content of a user table template at any time by selecting it on the template list,
making the required modifications on the right pane, then clicking Apply.
555
Editing the report table format

Objective: Edit the font and font size of a report table.
Steps
Edit the format of a single report table


3. Choose Edit > Table from the Report Editor
menu bar.
table
4. On the table editor toolbar, click Edit Format
The Edit Table Format dialog box opens.
5. Set the appropriate options.
To set the table format as the default one for all
new tables, select Set as default in the Edit Table
Format dialog box. The present settings are
transferred to the Objects > Reports > Tables >
Formatting page of the PolyWorks|Inspector
options.
6. Click Apply.
The formatting is applied to the report table.
Specify the formatting options of all new report tables
1. Choose Tools > Options.

The PolyWorks|Inspector Options dialog box
opens.
2. Choose Objects > Reports > Tables > Formatting.

3. Set the appropriate options.
4. Click Apply.
The formatting is applied to all subsequent
new report tables.
556
Working with report snapshots

Report snapshots are images captured from the 3D scene to report the
model and measurement results in full detail.
Since objects are updated through the Automatic Project Update, the
report snapshot will automatically be updated. The snapshot contents
can also be edited to modify the part orientation or the objects shown
at any time. Report snapshots can be incorporated into a formatted
report, or exported for use in applications like Microsoft Excel.
Creating report snapshots

Objective: Create a report snapshot showing the contents of the 3D scene.
Required: The project contains a visible measurement object or model.
Steps
1. Prepare the 3D scene by giving the model a

suitable orientation and zoom level, and
displaying only the desired measurement
objects.
2. The annotations can be repositioned. Choose

Tools > Annotations > Position.
• Using the ALT key as a shortcut to drag
annotations.
• When an annotation is repositioned, it is
automatically locked. In this case, its position
remains unchanged when performing a
transformation in the 3D scene (for example,
zoom, rotation and translation).
3. Choose Report > Create Snapshots > Capture

3D Scene.
557
Results
The snapshot is added to the active formatted The snapshot is automatically positioned
report, shown at the bottom of the Tree View. on a page in the report, and can be viewed
by double-clicking the report name.
Editing a report snapshot

Objective: Edit a report snapshot to change its orientation or contents.
Required: The project contains a report snapshot.
Steps
Report snapshots are stored by default in the active formatted report, listed at the bottom of
the Tree View.

2. In the Report Editor, select a report snapshot.

3. Choose Edit > Snapshot.
558
4. In the 3D scene, modify the zoom level,

orientation, or objects displayed. The snapshot
extent is displayed as a dotted boundary line.
The extent of the 3D Scene region and the
Snapshot size can also be edited using the fields
in the Edit Snapshot dialog box.
5. Click Recapture.
Results
The report snapshot is updated in the

formatted report.
Notes
If a color map simply needs to be updated, do not edit the report snapshot. Rather, select the
snapshots for which the color map needs to be updated, and choose Edit > Assign Current
Color Scale to Snapshots > Selected, or right-click and choose Assign Current Color Scale.
559
Working with formatted reports

Reports are a good, organized way to present or share
inspection results. Formatted reports normally contain
report snapshots, report tables, text, and graphics and can
be edited and prepared as needed using the Report Editor
tool. While formatted reports are automatically generated
when report snapshots or report tables are created, they
can also be created manually. After a report is completed,
it is generally exported in PDF format for others to review.
Formatted reports are displayed in the Report Editor pane.

The Page View interface lists the page thumbnails, and the
main interface displays the page currently selected for
review and editing. Common tools are offered on toolbars
located above and below the page area, respectively.
560
Creating formatted reports

By default, a formatted report is created as soon as a report snapshot or a report table is
created. Subsequent report items are automatically added sequentially on pages of the
formatted report as they are generated. A formatted report can also be created manually at
any time.
Objective: Create an empty formatted report manually.
Required: A PolyWorks|Inspector project.
Steps
1. Choose Report > Create Formatted Report.

2. Specify report properties.
3. Click Apply and then click Close.
Results
The formatted report object is added at the The formatted report is initially empty.
bottom of the Tree View as the active Newly created report items (snapshots and
formatted report (in bold). tables) are automatically added to the
active formatted report.
Notes
Newly created report items are added to the active formatted report, which is displayed in
bold in the Tree View. To make any formatted report the active one, select it in the Tree View
and choose Report > Formatted Report > Activate.
561
Editing formatted reports

Objective: Edit an existing formatted report, move report items, and add text and graphics.
Required: The project contains a formatted report.

2. Perform one of the following edition
operations.
Move or resize report items in the formatted report
Steps
1. In the Report Editor, left-click the report item to

select it.
2. Left-click and drag the report item to move it to
a different location.
Move the report item to another page by dragging
it to a page thumbnail in the Page View.
3. Left-click and drag the handles of the report
item to resize it.
Results
The changes are applied to the report items.
Notes
To crop an image, click it to select it, then choose Format > Crop Image. Drag the handles to
crop, and then click anywhere outside the image to confirm.
562
Add and edit a text field in the report
Steps
1. In the Report Editor, choose Insert > Text Field >

Fixed to add a text field.
2. Position the text field by moving the mouse to

the intended location on the page, and left-click
to confirm.
The text field edition mode is automatically
activated. To access this mode after creation,
select the text field and choose Edit > Text.
3. Type to add text.

It is possible to change the format of a text field by
clicking it and choosing Edit > Item Properties.
Results
The text field is created and formatted in the

report.
Notes
It is also possible to add a variable to the text

field. Enter the text field edition mode, then
right-click and choose Insert. Page numbers,
dates, and properties can all be added, and
their values update automatically
563
Add and edit a graphical shape in the formatted report
Steps
1. In the Report Editor, choose Insert > Shapes >

[choose a shape type] to add graphical shapes.
2. Position the shape by moving the mouse to the

intended location on the page.
3. Left-click and drag to create the shape.
It is possible to format the created shape by
clicking it and choosing Edit > Item Properties.
Results
The shape is created and formatted in the formatted report.
Add a fixed image to the formatted report
Steps
1. In the Report Editor, add an image by choosing

Insert > Image From File.
2. Browse to the image file.

3. Click Open.
4. Move the image to the desired location on the

report page.
5. Resize the image, if necessary, by dragging the
item handles.
Results
The image is added to the report.
564
Add, reorder, or remove pages from the formatted report
Steps
1. In the Report Editor, add a report page by

choosing Insert > Page.
2. Reorder pages by clicking and dragging a page

thumbnail.
3. Delete a report page by selecting the thumbnail

and choosing Edit > Delete.
Results
The pages are added, reordered, or deleted from the formatted report.
565
Generate a PDF file from a formatted report

Objective: Save a formatted report as a PDF file.
Required: The project contains a formatted report.
Steps

2. In the Report Editor, choose File > Export
Report > PDF.
3. Browse to the desired location.

4. Specify a name for the exported formatted
report.
5. Click Save.
Results
The formatted report is saved in PDF format.
566
Exporting report items

Report items, such as tables and snapshots, can be exported from a formatted report. This
can be useful when the inspection results are used to fill out an existing external template, or
are published online or on a company network. Available export options include Excel, HTML,
and text files.
Objective: Export report items using available formats.
Required: The project contains a formatted report with report items.
Steps
1. Open the formatted report that contains the

report items to export by double-clicking it in
the Tree View.
2. In the Report Editor, select the report items to

export.
To select multiple report items, hold the CTRL key
while selecting them.
3. Choose File > Export Items to export the selected

items.
4. Specify a File name and location.
5. Select in the Save as type list, a file format.

The Options button opens a dialog box that
offers export parameters.
6. Click Save.
Results
The selected report items are exported to the specified file format.
Notes
To export items to the Microsoft Excel format, Microsoft Excel must be installed on the
computer.
567
Inspecting
multiple pieces
Repeating an inspection on multiple pieces

In PolyWorks|Inspector, all measurement object
parameters and relations are stored in the project. The
stored information facilitates relational, parametric
inspection within the PolyWorks|Inspector project,
where remeasuring of one object automatically
updates any related objects. This functionality also
allows for perfect repeatability when inspecting
multiple pieces, using the inspection routine of the
first inspected piece to inspect subsequent pieces. A
single inspection project can contain several piece
templates. Then, when measuring a new piece, the
operator can choose the appropriate piece template
based on the current setup, for example, according to the type of device used.
Multipiece inspection consists of four general steps:
1. Inspect and report the first piece.
2. Create a piece template from the first piece.
3. Create a new piece from the piece template.
4. Inspect a new piece using Play Inspection.
569
All pieces are stored within a single PolyWorks|Inspector project and their results can be
reviewed individually or summarized using Statistical Process Control (SPC) tools.
Working with multiple pieces

Each physical version of a part is called a piece. By default, the first piece is named piece 1.
When the inspection is completed for piece 1, a piece template can be created from this
piece to be used for subsequent pieces.
Operations related to multiple pieces are managed in the Multipiece Inspection toolbar.
New Piece
Opens an interface used to add a new piece to the project.
New Piece Template
Opens an interface used to create a new piece template.
Play Inspection
Plays the active measurement sequence.
Sequence Editor
Displays the Sequence Editor pane.
Object Control SPC
Opens an interface to perform statistical process analysis on object

controls.
Surface Data SPC
Opens an interface to perform statistical process analysis on surface data

objects.
570
Pieces and piece templates are stored within the

project. They are available from the piece list at the
top of the Tree View.
Upon opening a piece, it automatically becomes
the active piece and therefore the current piece.
Choose File > Project Properties to manage pieces

and piece templates, and their properties.
Alternatively, use the Piece Properties button.
Creating a new piece template

Once a piece inspection is completed, it is recommended to create a piece template using the
active piece to ensure uniformity among the new pieces.
Objective: Create a new piece template from the current piece.
Required: A piece completely inspected.
Steps
1. Choose Tools > Piece > Template > New.

The New Piece Template dialog box opens.
2. In the Copy from list, select (Current Piece).

If the project contains existing templates, these are
available in the list to allow creating a new piece
template from the selected one.
3. Click Create.
Results
The piece template is created and stored in the project. It contains all the measurements and
inspection sequences defined for the first piece.
571
Inspecting a new piece using Play Inspection

The Play Inspection tool offers a guided, step-by-step
sequence to capture 3D datasets of a new piece, using
either point cloud digitizing or probing devices.
Combining it with the Control Reviewer pane allows to

view control results in real-time as the associated
measurement objects are measured. See Reviewing
measurement results using the Control Reviewer on
page 518.
The Play Inspection tool:
• Automatically proposes a logical order of measurement that considers device positions,

data alignments, object Tree View sequence, and geometric constraints;
• Triggers the right measurement method for each object;
• Manages multiple device positions.
The sequence proposed by the Play Inspection tool is called an autogenerated sequence and
it can be customized using the Sequence Editor. For information, see Introducing the Sequence
Editor on page 610.
Objective: Repeat an initial inspection on a new piece.
Required: A first piece completely inspected or a piece template.
Steps
1. Choose Tools > Piece > New.
572
The New Piece properties dialog box opens.

The piece name as well as the creation date and
time are automatically specified.
2. Choose the Source piece used to define the
new piece:
• Current piece: A nominal copy of the
current piece is used to create the new piece.
• Piece template: The template is used to
create the new piece.
3. If required, specify other standard information
for the new piece.
4. Click Create.
A nominal copy of the current piece or piece
template is created.
The measurement sequence associated to the

current piece or to the piece template is applied
to the new piece.
By default, Play Inspection is automatically
launched, guiding the user through the steps
necessary to calculate the measurement
objects for the new piece. The inspection is
based on the measurement sequence of the
first inspected piece or the piece template.
When required, the measurement sequence is
paused and a message is displayed to indicate
that a manual action is required.
5. If required, use the Pause, Skip Current
Operation, and Stop buttons to interrupt or
modify the inspection process.
A message is displayed when the new piece inspection is finished.
573
Results
The new inspection is completed and the The results of the inspection performed in
measurement objects of piece 2 are displayed piece 2 are shown in the 3D scene.
in the Tree View. A measured status icon
indicates the measured status.
Notes
• The inspection sequence can be launched manually at any

time by choosing Tools > Piece > Play Inspection to measure
unmeasured objects.
• If a measurement object cannot be calculated, a warning
message is displayed. The message can be used for
troubleshooting purposes. The problematic objects are
flagged in the Tree View with an X overlay.
574
Customizing guiding instructions

During an inspection, standard on-screen messages guide
the operator through scanning or probing the piece
properly. Additional guidance can also be provided
through custom instructions or images for any Data
objects or measurement objects.
Objective: Repeat an initial inspection on a new piece

using custom guidance.
Required: A first piece completely inspected or a piece template.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select a Data object or a

measurement object.
3. Click the Measurement tab.
4. In the Guiding instructions section, select
Message and/or Image.
For measurement objects, these parameters are
offered only when the measurement method is
Custom, Undefined, or Probe.
• In the Message area, enter custom
instructions.
• Under the Image area, click the import
button and load a drawing or image file that
illustrates the instructions. The image is
displayed in the viewing area.
5. Click Apply.
575
Results
The custom message and image are displayed

during Play Inspection.
Notes
Custom guiding instructions can also be specified for Data alignment and Data color map
objects. These parameters are available in the property sheet of the object, respectively on the
Data alignment and the Data color map tabs.
576
Guided feature probing using measurement points

In metrology, it is important to reduce the number of factors that could affect measurement
results. For example, when performing a part inspection by probing, controlling the location
of the points that are to be probed is sometimes desired.
This is especially useful when setting up a project for a multipiece inspection process, where
multiple instances of a part are inspected. In order to obtain meaningful results, each
measurement of the part must be performed in the exact same way.
When probing features, the repeatability of each measurement depends largely on the
number and the location of the probed data points of each feature. Adding measurement
points to features provides guidance as to where the points should be probed, instead of
randomly probing points on the part for every new inspection.
There are three main steps when using measurement points for guidance:
1. Features are created.
2. The measurement method is set to Probe, the

Guided point acquisition mode is configured,
and measurement points are defined for each
feature that will be probed.
3. When measuring the piece, the features are

probed using measurement points as guidance.
577
The Measurement Points pane

When using measurement points for guidance, the Measurement Points pane can be used to
customize the measurement points used for the probing operation. To open the
Measurement Points pane:
1. In the Tree View, select the desired feature.

The property sheet is opened.
3. On the Measurement tab, make sure that:
• The measurement method is set to Probe.
• The point acquisition mode is set to Guided.
4. Under Point acquisition, press Measurement

Points.
The Measurement Points pane is opened: columns provide information on measurement

points, and a vertical toolbar offers operations used to create, edit, and delete measurement
points:
Columns Vertical toolbar
The vertical toolbar offers the following buttons:
Define Measurement Points from Probed Data Points
Defines measurement points from previously probed data points.
Anchor Measurement Points
Launches an interactive mode that allows creating measurement points by

anchoring them on features.
578
Pick Go to Positions
Can only be used when the measurement method is set to CNC Probe (in
other words, when automatically probing using a CNC CMM).
Launches an interactive mode that allows adding intermediate positions,
or go to position points, between measurement points along the
measurement path to avoid collisions with the part or its fixture.
Edit Points
Opens a dialog box used to edit the position and normal of selected
measurement points.
Drag Points
Launches an interactive mode that allows repositioning measurement

points by dragging them in the 3D scene.
Delete Points
Deletes selected measurement points.
Delete Points Interactively
Launches an interactive mode that allows deleting measurement points by

clicking them in the 3D scene.
579
Configuring the guided point acquisition mode

It is possible to configure whether the acquisition of a feature’s probed data points is guided
or not. The guided point acquisition mode is used to define measurement points at the
locations and the order in which data points should be probed.
Once the guided acquisition mode is set, parameters are made available to configure the
acquisition.
Parametric information that defines the nominal components of features can be used to
define the measurement points.
Objective: Configure the guided acquisition mode for features.
Required: The project contains features with at least the nominal primitives.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the feature to which

measurement points will be added.
In the Point acquisition section:
5. In the Mode list, select Guided.

6. Set the point acquisition Order.
• Select Sequential to specify that the
measurement points will be used to guide
point acquisition in the order of the
measurement points list.
• Select Auto-Detect to specify that the
measurement points will be used to guide
point acquisition in any order.
7. Set the Guiding sphere radius.
Sets the size of the spheres used to guide the user
to the location of the measurement points while
probing.
8. If Limit acquisition to radius is selected,
points can only be acquired when the probe is
within the specified radius.
580
9. Set the Measurement Points parameter.

• Select From Nominal to use the nominal
component of the feature to define the
measurement points.
See the following sections for the parameters

related to each feature type.
• Select Custom to use probed points of the
measured component of the feature or to
anchor measurement points directly in the
3D scene.
Then, click Measurement Points to the right

of the list box to open the Measurement
Points pane to define and edit measurement
points. See Defining measurement points from
the nominal component on page 582.
10. In the Points not on reference surface list
box, specify the behavior when one or more
defined measurement points are not on a
reference surface:
• Select Disallow to prevent the CNC probe
mode from launching when some points are
not on a reference surface.
To correct this situation, edit the point

acquisition parameters or edit the
measurement points through the Measurement
Points pane.
• Select Skip to skip the points in error.
A minimum number of points must be probed

to form a valid feature.
• Select Acquire to attempt to probe the
points in error.
This may result in acquisition failure. If there is

no reference surface at all, this behavior is
used.
11. Click Apply.
Measurement points are added to the feature
based on the set parameters.
581
Defining measurement points from the nominal component

When defining measurement points using From Nominal, the Point acquisition section
offers both general and feature-specific parameters that are used to configure the
measurement points defined from the nominal component of a feature.
Setting the parameters for line features

Objective: Define measurement points from the nominal component of a feature.
Required: The project contains a feature with a nominal component.
Steps

5. Set the point acquisition Mode to Guided.
6. Set the Measurement points to From
Nominal.
7. Set the Location, which specifies the location
of the feature on the part:
• Click Convex Edge when the line is located
on an edge with an angle pointing outwards.
• Click Concave Edge when the line is on an
edge with an angle pointing inwards.
8. Enter the Number of points that are evenly
distributed along the line.
9. Specify the Offset to plane distance between
the feature plane and the measurement points.
The offset direction is based on the Location.
10. Set the Measurement side:
• Click Left when the measurement points are
located on the left side of the line and the
material is on the right side of the line.
• Click Right when the measurement points
are located on the right side of the line and
the material is on the left side of the line.
11. Click Apply and close the Properties dialog box.
582
Results
Measurement points are defined using the nominal

primitive of the selected line.
Setting the parameters for plane features

Steps
Along Boundary
This pattern is used to distribute measurement points along the external boundary of the
plane.
Nominal.
7. Set the pattern to Along Boundary.
8. Specify the Number of points distributed
along the boundary.
583
Results
Measurement points are defined using the nominal

primitive of the selected plane.
Grid
This pattern defines uniformly-spaced measurement points by sampling a grid that covers the
plane.
Nominal.
7. Set the pattern to Grid.
8. Set the Sampling step value of the grid.
584
Results
Measurement points are defined using the

nominal primitive of the selected plane.
Setting the parameters for circle features

Steps

Nominal.
585

• Click Top when the circle is located at the top
of the part geometry.
• Click Bottom when the circle is located at
the bottom of the part geometry.
The in-space orientation considered for the
circle feature comes from its nominal
component.
distributed along the circle.
the plane of the circle and the measurement
points. The offset direction is based on the
Location.
Tip
• Top location of an internal circle.
• Bottom location of an internal circle.
Results

nominal primitive of the selected circle.
586
Notes
The icons displayed for the Location are based on the in-space orientation of the nominal
component of the feature.
For an external circle, the Top and Bottom location

icons are shown to the right.
Setting the parameters for slot features

Steps

Nominal.
• Click Top when the slot is located at the top
of the part geometry.
• Click Bottom when the slot is located at the
bottom of the part geometry.
The in-space orientation considered for the slot
feature comes from its nominal component.
8. Enter the Number of points per arc that are
evenly distributed along each arc.
the plane of the slot and the measurement
Location.
587
Tip
• Top location of an internal slot.
• Bottom location of an internal slot.
Results

nominal primitive of the selected slot.
Notes
For an external slot, the Top and Bottom location

icons are shown to the right.
588
Setting the parameters for rectangle features

Steps

Nominal.
• Click Top when the rectangle is located at the
top of the part geometry.
• Click Bottom when the rectangle is located
at the bottom of the part geometry.
rectangle feature comes from its nominal
component.
8. Enter the Number of points per side that are
evenly distributed along each side.
the plane of the rectangle and the
measurement points. The offset direction is
based on the Location.
589
Tip
• Top location of an internal rectangle.
• Bottom location of an internal rectangle.
Results

nominal primitive of the selected rectangle.
Notes
For an external rectangle, the Top and Bottom

location icons are shown to the right.
590
Setting the parameters for polygon features

Steps

Nominal.
• Click Top when the polygon is located at the
• Click Bottom when the polygon is located at
polygon feature comes from its nominal
component.
8. Enter the Number of points per side that are
evenly distributed along each side.
the plane of the polygon and the measurement
Location.
591
Tip
• Top location of an internal polygon.
• Bottom location of an internal polygon.
Results

nominal primitive of the selected polygon.
Notes
For an external polygon, the Top and Bottom

592
Setting the parameters for ellipse features

Steps

Nominal.
• Click Top when the ellipse is located at the
• Click Bottom when the ellipse is located at
ellipse feature comes from its nominal
component.
distributed along the ellipse.
the plane of the ellipse and the measurement
Location.
593
Tip
• Top location of an internal ellipse.
• Bottom location of an internal ellipse.
Results

nominal primitive of the selected ellipse.
Notes
For an external ellipse, the Top and Bottom

594
Setting the parameters for cylinder features

Steps

Nominal.
7. Enter the Number of circles, which specifies
the number of equidistant circles on which
measurement points are defined.
8. Enter the Number of points per circle, which
specifies the number of measurement points
that are evenly distributed along each defined
circle.
9. Enable the Max Depth option, if needed. It
allows users to define the maximum distance
of the deepest circle. The depth considers the
axis orientation of the cylinder.
Results

nominal primitive of the selected cylinder.
595
Setting the parameters for cone features

Steps

Nominal.
circle.
9. Enable the Max Depth option, if needed. It
allows users to define the maximum distance
of the deepest circle. The depth considers the
axis orientation of the cone.
Results

nominal primitive of the selected cone.
596
Setting the parameters for sphere features

Steps

Nominal.
7. Enable Point on top of the sphere, if needed.
This creates a measurement point at the top of
the sphere.
circle.
10. For the First circle:
Set the Angle from top, at which the first circle
is positioned.
11. For the Last circle:
Set the Angle from top, at which the last circle
is positioned.
597
Results

nominal primitive of the selected sphere.
Notes
The parameters for the sphere are illustrated below.
Point on top First circle angle

First circle
Last circle
angle
Last circle
598
Setting the parameters for polyline features

Steps

Nominal.
Results
Measurement points are defined at each vertex of

the nominal primitive of the selected polyline.
599
Notes
Since polylines do not have surface information,

each measurement point only contains a location
(x, y, and z coordinates) but no orientation.
Defining custom measurement points

The Measurement Points pane can be used to define, visualize, and edit measurement points
on features. Two creation methods are offered:
• Define Measurement Points from Probed Data Points: Measurement points are
defined automatically from probed data points.
• Anchor Measurement Points: Measurement points are anchored directly on the feature
or on a Reference object in the 3D scene.
Measurement points are only available for features that support the Probe or the CNC Probe
measurement method, and they are specific to each feature.
Defining measurement points from probed data points

Objective: Define measurement points from probed data points for selected features.
Required: The selected feature must have probed data points.
Steps
1. Open the Measurement Points pane:

• by clicking Measurement Points in the
Properties of the feature (see Configuring
the guided point acquisition mode on
page 580).
• by right-clicking the feature and choosing
Edit > Measurement Points.
2. Click Define Measurement Points from

Probed Data Points.
600
Results
Measurement points are defined using probed data points obtained from the selected
feature.
Defining measurement points by anchoring

Objective: Define measurement points by anchoring points on features.
Required: The PolyWorks|Inspector project must have one or more features that support
the Probe measurement method.
Steps
1. Open the Measurement Points pane:

• by clicking Measurement Points in the
Properties of the feature (see Configuring
the guided point acquisition mode on
page 580)
• by right-clicking the feature and choosing
Edit > Measurement Points
2. Click Anchor Measurement Points to launch

an interactive anchoring mode.
3. In the 3D scene, click directly on the feature to

create the measurement points.
The number of measurement points must be
equal to or larger than the minimum number of
points for that feature type.
601
Results
Measurement points are defined on the feature.
Anchoring points on features that have arcs or sides

Slot, rectangle, and polygon features are probed using individual arcs or sides. To anchor
measurement points for these features, the arc or side associated with each measurement
point must be specified in order to provide the appropriate guidance. The Anchor
Measurement Points dialog box is used to specify which arc or side the measurement point
will be anchored on.
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the slot, rectangle, or

polygon feature to which measurement points
will be added.
2. In the Measurement Points pane, click Anchor
Measurement Points to launch an interactive
anchoring mode.
The Anchor Measurement Points dialog box

opens.
3. From the Step list, select the corresponding arc
or side for which measurement points will be
anchored.
4. In the 3D scene, click directly on the feature or

on the Reference object to anchor the
measurement points at the desired locations.
The number of measurement points must be
equal to or larger than the minimum number of
points.
602
5. From the list, select the next arc or side and

continue anchoring the points on the feature.
Repeat the procedure for the other arcs or sides.
Results
Measurement points are defined on the feature for each arc or side.
Editing and deleting measurement points

The Measurement Points pane offers various tools to edit and delete measurement points.
Editing measurement points numerically

Measurement points can be edited numerically by editing their position and normal.
Steps
1. In the Measurement Points pane, select the

measurement point that will be edited.
Use a multiple selection to edit more than one
measurement point at a time.
2. Click Edit Points.
603
The Edit Points dialog box opens.

3. Specify the Position and Normal for the
measurement point.
The measurement point x, y, or z coordinates can
also be edited directly in the Measurement Points
pane. Click a coordinate to edit its value.
Editing measurement points interactively

Measurement points can be edited interactively by dragging them in the 3D scene.
Steps
1. Click Drag Points to launch an interactive

dragging mode.
2. Reposition measurement points by dragging

them directly in the 3D scene.
3. Right-click to exit the dragging mode.
604
Editing arcs and sides of measurements points

In cases where a measurement point was anchored to the wrong side or arc, it is possible to
correct this and change the arc or the side the measurement points belong to.
Steps
1. In the Measurement Points pane, click the

measurement point that is on the wrong
arc or side and drag it to the correct arc or
side.
Deleting selected measurement points

Measurement points can be deleted by selecting them and launching the deletion operation.
Steps
1. In the Measurement Points pane, select the

measurement points that will be deleted.
Use a multiple selection to delete more than one
measurement point at a time.
2. Click Delete Points.
Deleting measurement points interactively

Measurement points can be deleted interactively.
Steps
1. Click Delete Points Interactively to launch an

interactive deleting mode.
2. Click the measurement points in the 3D scene

to delete them.
3. Right-click to exit the mode.
605
Probing features using measurement points

Once the guided acquisition mode has been configured (Configuring the guided point
acquisition mode on page 580) and the measurement points have been defined (Defining
measurement points from the nominal component on page 582), via the properties of the
feature, the probing in a guided mode can be launched.
The order in which the points are probed is controlled by the specified acquisition Order:
• Sequential: The next measurement point is the first unmeasured point in the list of
measurement points.
• Auto-Detect: The next measurement point is the one closest to the probing device.
The measurement point guiding spheres are highlighted in the 3D scene. The Limit
acquisition to radius option allows restricting the point acquisition for each measurement
point to a precise zone delimited by cylinders or by spheres (for point with no normal)
centered at the measurement points. The next measurement point guiding sphere is always
highlighted as follows in the 3D scene:
• If the Limit acquisition to radius option is set, it is highlighted in red if the probing
device is out of the zone, and in green if it is in the zone. A sound also indicates if the
probing device is within the zone or not.
• If the Limit acquisition to radius option is not set, the guiding zone of the
measurement point closest to the probing device is highlighted in green.
Once a measurement point has been used for point acquisition, its guiding zone is no longer
displayed in the 3D scene.
Example
Defined measurement points on a plane feature.
606
Probing a plane feature in the Sequential order. The points are probed in numerical order.
Probing a plane feature in the Auto-Detect order. The points are probed in any order.
607
Using measurement points with features probed in

multiple device positions
Sometimes, features need to be probed from multiple device positions. This can be due to the
size of the part or the physical constraints that make it impossible to access a feature from a
certain position.
Defining measurement points using the From Probed Data Points method will automatically
group the measurement points, taking into consideration the device positions in which they
were gathered.
Objective: Probe a feature from multiple device positions using measurement points as
guidance.
Required: A PolyWorks|Inspector project that contains at least one feature with defined
measurement points grouped in different device positions.
Steps
1. Open the project and click Play Inspection.
2. Probe the points in the first device position.
608
3. Move the device.

For more information on multiple device
positions, see Working with multiple device
positions on page 633.
4. Continue the Play Inspection sequence.
5. Probe points in the second device position.
6. If more than two device positions are required,

repeat steps 3 to 5 until the feature is
completely probed.
Results
When playing the inspection of a project that contains a feature originally created by probing,
using multiple device positions and the From Probed Data Points method measurement
points, PolyWorks prompts the user to probe the feature displaying only the measurement
points that belong to the first position. Then the sequence is paused and the user is prompted
to move the device. Once the new device position is created, the user is prompted to probe
the feature displaying corresponding measurement points.
609
Introducing the Sequence Editor

The measurement objects needed for the inspection are listed in the Tree View pane. These
objects contain all the information related to how the measurements must take place and the
links that exist between the objects. In multipiece inspection, the Play Inspection tool plays an
autogenerated measurement sequence, by default, that is based on the objects in the Tree
View. It can also play a measurement sequence that has been customized through the
Sequence Editor.
The Sequence Editor can be used to customize the autogenerated sequence or to create a
custom sequence where steps can be added one by one. Instructions for the operator can be
added, the order of measurements can be changed, and additional steps for measuring can
be included. Also, by inserting macro scripts, many functionalities can be added, such as those
related to reporting.
The Sequence Editor pane

To open the Sequence Editor pane:
1. Choose Tools > Sequence Editor.

Alternatively, click the Sequence Editor button
from the Multipiece Inspection toolbar.
The Sequence Editor pane is displayed. It features a menu bar, a standard toolbar, and a
sequence area.
Menu bar
Standard
toolbar
Sequence
area
610
Menu bar
Provides access to all Sequence Editor functionalities.
Standard toolbar
Provides quick access to the main functionalities of the Sequence Editor.
Create From Autogenerated Sequence / New Sequence
Split button used to create a new sequence, either from the autogenerated
sequence or from scratch.
Insert Step
Displays the Insert toolbar (see Insert toolbar on page 612) that offers quick
access to the steps that can be added to the sequence.
Start Recording
Starts the recording mode.
Execute One by One From Marker
Executes the next step in the sequence based on the marker position.
Execute From Marker
Executes steps starting at the marker position.
Stop Execution
Stops the execution of the sequence.
Reset Execution Status
Removes all information concerning step execution. The marker is

positioned at the beginning of the sequence.
611
Insert toolbar
To open the Insert toolbar, click the Insert button on the Standard toolbar. It offers quick
access to the steps that can be added to the sequence.
Guiding Instructions
Inserts a step used to add text and/or an image that will be displayed when
running the sequence.
Question
Inserts a question step composed of a question and an answer variable.
Conditional Statement for Selected Steps
Inserts a conditional statement based on the content of an answer

variable.
Comment
Inserts text to provide useful information about the sequence.
Scanning Options
Inserts a step to change the scanning profile or customize scanning

options.
Coordinate System
Inserts a step to activate a different coordinate system in the sequence.
Alignment
Inserts a step to create or activate a data alignment.
Device Position
Inserts a step to activate a device position or to perform a move device

operation.
Data Object
Inserts a step to acquire a Data object.
612
Measurement Object
Inserts a step to measure an object.
Add Probed Data Points
Inserts a step to add probed data points to a specified object.
Macro Script
Inserts a macro script by creating a new one or by importing a copy of a

script.
Sequence area
This area lists all the steps that make up a sequence.
Execution status
color
Step number
Marker
Edit step
shortcut
Icons
Marker
The marker sets the position from which the execution of the sequence starts or from which
sequence steps are added with the recording mode. Also, the real-time sequence validation
considers the steps starting at the marker position. Choose Sequence > Set Marker Position to
set the marker position. Alternatively, the marker can be dragged to the desired position.
613
Step number
Incremental number for each sequence step.
Execution status color
The execution status of steps is indicated by their

background color.
• Light green: step has been executed.
• White: step has not been executed.
• Gray: step was interactively skipped during
the execution of the sequence.
Icons
When creating a measurement sequence, a real-

time sequence validation is performed in the
background. If a step may cause a problem, an
icon is displayed to inform the user.
Warning icons are displayed to inform the
user of a potential problem.
Error icons are displayed when there is an
error in the step.
Information icons are displayed when a step
is unusual or unnecessary.
Moving the mouse pointer over an icon displays a

tooltip with the details.
The status bar at the bottom of the Sequence Editor

pane provides a summary of the problems detected
in the measurement sequence.
614
Edit step shortcut
Opens a dialog box to define or edit a sequence

step. The content of the dialog box depends on
the step that is currently defined or edited.
For example, when editing guiding instructions,
edit the step to add instructions (message and/or
image) for the operator to illustrate how to mount
a part into its fixture.
615
Using the Sequence Editor
Creating a measurement sequence from recorded actions

A measurement sequence is an ordered list of operations, called steps, created to measure
objects.
From the autogenerated sequence

When the nominal inspection project is ready, it is possible to create a measurement
sequence from the autogenerated one.
Steps

on the Multipiece Inspection toolbar.
2. In the Sequence Editor pane, choose Sequence

> Create from Autogenerated Sequence.
3. Type the Name and Description of the

sequence.
4. Click Create.
Results
The sequence is created. It contains the

objects from the Tree View along with
initial conditions and device positions.
The sequence is ready to be customized.
See Customizing a measurement sequence
on page 619.
616
From recorded actions

Once a measurement device is properly configured and connected, it is possible to start the
inspection of a part and create the sequence at the same time. Once recorded, subsequent
pieces can be inspected just by playing the inspection sequence.
Steps

on the Multipiece Inspection toolbar.
2. In the Sequence Editor pane, choose

Sequence > New.
3. Type the Name and Description of the

sequence.
4. Click Create.
5. Start the recording mode. Choose

Edit > Start Recording.
The actions performed subsequently are added to
the sequence (for example, alignments, activation
of a coordinate system, and measurement
operations).
To stop recording actions, choose Edit > Stop

Recording.
617
Results
A sequence is created. The initial condi-

tions are automatically added to the
sequence area.
618
Customizing a measurement sequence

Once the measurement sequence is created, changes can be made. For example, it is possible
to change the order of sequence steps to optimize an inspection, add guiding messages and
images to facilitate the inspection of the part, or include macro scripts to increase efficiency.
Modifying the order of sequence steps

Steps in the sequence can be reordered, if required.
Steps
1. In the Sequence Editor pane, select the

sequence steps that will be moved in the
sequence area.
2. Drag the selected sequence steps to the

desired position in the sequence.
Results
In the Sequence Editor, the steps are displayed at

the new position.
619
Adding sequence steps

Steps can be added to the sequence. They can be broadly categorized as follows:
• General steps
• Context steps
• Measurement steps
• Macro script steps
When a step is added, a contextual dialog box is opened to specify a Tree View object or
required information. If an object is preselected in the Tree View, then the inserted step is
automatically set to the selected object.
Choosing steps from the Insert menu
Steps
1. In the Sequence Editor pane, choose Insert >

[select which step to add].
A step is added to the sequence and a
contextual dialog box is displayed.
2. Specify the required information in the

contextual dialog box.
3. Click outside the dialog box to confirm.
Notes
• Steps added using the Insert menu can be

used as placeholders if relevant objects have
not yet been created in the project. A warning
icon appears. These steps must be defined
before executing the sequence.
• Moving the mouse pointer over the object

displays a tooltip with recommended actions
to correct the issue.
• When a step is inserted, it appears at the end

of the sequence, except if there is a selection in
the sequence; in this case, the step is inserted
above the selection.
620
Dragging objects from the Tree View
Steps
1. In the Tree View, select the objects associated

with the steps that will be added to the
sequence.
2. Drag the objects to the desired position in the

active sequence.
621
Notes
A convenient way to add steps for existing objects is to drag the objects from the Tree View.
Inserting macro script steps
Steps
1. In the Sequence Editor pane, choose Insert >

Macro Script. Two items are offered.
• New: The Macro Script Editor opens,
allowing users to create a macro script.
• Import: Allows users to browse for an
existing macro script.
Results
The step is added to the sequence. The macro

script or, when imported, a copy of the macro
script is saved in the current piece.
Editing sequence steps

Once added, sequence steps can be modified by accessing the step’s contextual dialog box.
Steps
1. In the Sequence Editor pane, select the

sequence step that will be modified and
choose Edit > Step.
Alternatively, click the Edit Step shortcut arrow
that corresponds to the step that will be
modified.
The sequence step contextual dialog box
opens.
2. Set the required parameters.
622
Defining conditional blocks

Depending on the inspection requirements, some measurement objects can be excluded
from the inspection. It is possible to define these requirements, in a measurement sequence,
as conditional statement steps. These steps allow users to construct a sequence that is
adaptable to certain variations in an inspection, like the presence of an optional part.
Steps
1. Choose Insert > Question.
2. Type in a Yes or No question.

3. From the Answer variable list, select the
variable where the answer will be stored.
If a new variable must be created, choose
(Create New) and type the Variable name.
4. Set the initial value of the variable using the
Sequence validation answer list. Refer to the
Notes section for more information.
5. Select the steps in the sequence that are

affected by the conditional statement.
6. Choose Insert > Conditional Statement.
7. Select the variable that will be used in the

conditional statement.
8. Set the conditional value of the variable. If the
variable is equal to the answer provided by the
operator, the steps that are part of the
conditional statement are executed.
Otherwise, they are shown in gray and will not
be executed.
Results
The steps are added to the sequence.
The steps that were selected when the conditional

statement was inserted are grouped under the
conditional statement.
623
Notes
The Sequence validation answer allows users to validate the corresponding conditional
statement steps for a given scenario. This value is not used when the measurement sequence
is executed in the Sequence Editor or processed by the Play Inspection tool.
624
Evaluating pieces using Statistical Process Control

Statistical Process Control (SPC) is a tool that analyzes common measurements between
multiple pieces for repeatability. Reviewing SPC results tells the user whether a part is being
manufactured predictably or not.
PolyWorks|Inspector offers two SPC tools:
Object Control SPC:

Analyzes measurement object dimensions, such as hole diameter, flatness, and length.
Surface Data SPC:

Analyzes the range of part shape using color maps.
Analyze part dimensions for repeatability using Object

Control SPC
The Object Control SPC tool analyzes the values of any
measurement common to multiple pieces in the inspection
project. Results are displayed in graphic and tabular format in
the Object Control SPC Results pane.
Objective: Display statistics of measured object values for all

pieces.
Required: A completed inspection project containing more than one inspected piece.
Steps
1. In the Tree View of a piece, select the objects to

consider in the SPC analysis.
2. Choose Tools > Statistical Process Control > Object

Controls.
3. The Object Control SPC dialog box opens, with a

list of the inspected pieces.
Pieces can be excluded from analysis by
deselecting them in the list.
4. In the Options section, specify the Sample size.

See the following section for more information.
625
Results
The value for each of the five pieces is displayed for the selected measurement object in the
Object Control SPC Results pane.
Statistics of the piece values is shown in the object annotation.
626
Sample size
A sample consists of a collection of pieces. The sample size determines how many pieces
represent a sample and is used to calculate mean values. The default sample size is 1.
• Sample size equal to 1: I-MR charts are generated, consisting of the Individuals (I) chart
and the Moving Range (MR) chart.
• Sample size greater than 1: Xbar-R charts are generated, consisting of the Mean (Xbar)
chart and the Range (R) chart.
Understanding SPC results

The SPC tool offers different charts to analyze results. Depending on the sample size (1, or
more than 1), different charts are generated.
I-MR charts
Generated when the sample size is 1, the I-MR charts display information about the
performance of the process. They consist of:
• Individuals (I) chart: It displays the

measured values per piece for the
selected control of the selected
measurement object, and the mean of
these values.
• Moving Range (MR) chart: For the selected

control of the selected measurement
object, it displays the variation from the
previous piece, and the mean of these
variations.
627
Xbar-R charts
Generated when the sample size is greater than 1, the Xbar-R charts display information
about the behavior of the process and outcome over time. They consist of:
• Mean (Xbar) chart: It displays the average

measured value per sample for the
selected control of the selected
measurement object, and the mean of
these values.
• Range (R) chart: For the selected control

of the selected measurement object, it
displays the range of data in each sample,
and the mean of these ranges.
Trend charts
• Trend charts display the measured value

per piece for the selected control of the
selected measurement object and the
mean of these values.
628
Sample statistics table
The Sample statistics table displays, per piece within each sample, the measured value for the
selected control of the selected measurement object, the mean and the range of these values,
and their average values.
Overall statistics table
The Overall statistics table displays statistics values such as the Mean, Std Dev, Min, Max, Cp,
Cpk, %Within Tol (percentage of pieces within tolerance), and more for the selected
measurement object.
Values per piece table
The Values per piece table displays the measured values per piece for the selected controls of
the selected measurement object.
629
Analyze part shape for repeatability using Surface Data

SPC
The Surface Data SPC tool analyzes the range in shape
of multiple pieces in the inspection project by
comparing them to the Reference object. Various
results can be displayed using a color map. They
include the range of variation, mean deviation, highest
deviating areas, and more.
Objective: Display statistical analyses of Data object shape variation for all pieces.
Required: An inspection project containing a Reference object and more than one piece.
Steps
1. Choose Tools > Statistical Process Control >

Surface Data Objects.
The Initialize Surface Data SPC dialog box and
the Surface Data SPC pane open.
2. In the Pieces list, select From Project.
3. In the Reference objects list, select an object.
4. Specify the Sampling step defining the density

of deviation measurements made to the Data
objects.
The value should be at least as large as the point
spacing of point cloud Data objects.
For all Data object types, the sampling step must
be small enough to measure meaningful details.
5. Specify the Max distance to use to measure

the deviations of the Data objects from the
Reference object.
6. Click Initialize.
630
Results
The Surface Data SPC pane opens, listing the A color map in the 3D scene, generated on
pieces included in the analysis. Deselect the Reference object, is shown based on the
pieces to be removed from the analysis. Color map type specified in the Surface Data
SPC pane.
Tools used to initialize, reset, remeasure, report,
and change options are located on the vertical
toolbar of the Surface Data SPC pane.
Notes
Other piece locations are available in the

Pieces list of the Initialize Surface Data SPC
dialog box.
When using From Data Objects, individual
Data objects that are aligned to the
Reference object can also be used for Surface
Data SPC. They can be added to the Surface
Data SPC tool, using pane buttons, and are
immediately measured.
631
Working with
multiple device
positions
Working with multiple device positions

There are many challenges to acquiring data points on large objects. Some objects are larger
than the measurement volume of a device. Sometimes, data must be acquired on a portion of
a part that is hidden from the measuring device. These situations demand that the device be
moved around the part to acquire the data. In PolyWorks|Inspector, device positions address
this specific need.
The different device positions must be aligned to each other. Two methods are detailed in this
manual:
• Using targets
• From points obtained by probing targets
• Using a custom alignment such as the best-fit of Data to Data objects
In the example illustrated below, a part is measured using a laser tracker in three different
device positions.
The active device position is displayed on the status bar, in the lower right corner of the
interface.
The Device Positions toolbar is located at the bottom of the PolyWorks|Inspector user
interface.
It offers the following tools:
Define Measured Targets
Opens the Define Measured Device Position Targets dialog box from which
to measure the targets.
633
Move Device
Allows the creation of a new device position.
Manage Device Positions and Targets
Opens the Device Positions and Targets pane which allows visualizing the
different device positions and targets and editing them.
The basic acquisition workflow with multiple device

positions using targets
For this typical workflow, the part is inspected by probing and/or scanning, and probed targets
are used for the alignment. The targets can be defined from physical targets strategically
placed on the part and/or around the part, or they can be features (points, circles, spheres) on
the part. Note that a combination of physical targets and features on the part can be used.
Position 1
Define measured targets

Define the accessible targets of
position 1.
Scan the part & measure

objects
Scan the accessible surfaces of the
part and, if required, measure
objects using scanned or probed
data.
Note that the Data object needs to
be aligned to the Reference object to
measure certain types of objects.
634
Move device
Define a new device position and
physically move the device or the
part.
Position 2
Define measured targets
The acquisition of targets is
automatically launched.
Define all the accessible targets of
position 2. There must be a minimum
of three common targets, with the
previous position, for alignment.
There can be more targets than in
the previous position. Typically, these
will be used with targets in future
positions.
Scan the part & measure

objects
Scan the accessible surfaces of the
part and, if required, measure
objects using scanned or probed
data.
Note that the Data objects need to
be aligned to the Reference object to
measure certain types of objects.
Move device
physically move the device or the
part.
635
Position n
Repeat the process
Repeat this process for as many
positions needed to acquire the
required data.
Moving the device or the part by probing targets

A robust and repeatable method for defining targets is using
target locations. The targets can be on the part itself or placed
around it. The probe is used to define each target every time the
device or the part is moved, aligning the different setups
together.
Objective: Move the device or the part and align it to previous

data by probing device position targets.
Required: A probing device is available and ready to use. The required plug-ins are loaded.
Steps
1. In position 1, define the targets by choosing

Tools > Device Positions > Define Measured Device
Position Targets.
The Define Measured Device Position Targets
dialog box opens.
3. Set the Type to Point.
4. In the Submethod list, select Uncompensated.

The target will be acquired at the probe tip center.
5. Click Probe.
6. Probe all accessible stable target locations.

Three targets are a minimum to perform the
target alignment, but more are recommended.
The targets are listed in the Device Positions and
Targets pane.
636
7. Scan the accessible surfaces of the part and, if

required, measure objects.
Note that the Data object needs to be aligned
to the Reference object to measure certain
types of objects.
8. Physically move the device or part, and define a

new device position – position 2 – by choosing
Tools > Device Positions > Move Device.
The Move Device dialog box opens.
9. In the Alignment method list, select Targets.
10. Click OK.
The Define Measured Device Position Targets
dialog box opens.
11. Probe all accessible and stable target locations

to align position 2.
At least three targets must be the same as in
position 1. Although a minimum of three targets is
required to perform the target alignment, it is
recommended to use more targets.
The targets can be probed in any order.
The targets are listed in the Device Positions and
Targets pane, with alignment errors.
12. Continue scanning and probing the part in the

new position.
Results
• The new device position is aligned to the

previous device position.
New scanning and probing Data objects
are created in the Tree View to keep the
device positions independent of each
other.
637
• The probed targets and the alignment

accuracy are displayed in the Device
Positions and Targets pane.
Notes
All accessible targets should be measured from each device position. This ensures that plenty
of targets are available for future device position alignments. As soon as there are three
common targets between the device positions, the current device position is aligned. Adding
additional common targets strengthens the alignment.
To avoid ambiguous alignment solutions, physical targets should be placed in a

nonsymmetrical array. If necessary, target matches between device positions can be
edited manually. The Edit Target Match tool, found on the Target alignment
results tab of the Device Positions and Targets pane, allows defining specific target
match pairs.
When connected to a laser tracker probing device with the capability to orient to gravity, it is
possible to orient to gravity while creating the device position.
Bundle adjustment
Bundle adjustment optimizes the auto-match alignment of device positions by finding the
most probable effective location for each target through averaging, and aligns all instances of
the target to that location position. The effective location is updated every time a new device
position is added. This option gives best results when the entire part volume is measured such
that the last device position is adjacent to the first device position.
Without bundle adjustment, any target measured in more that one device position is always
aligned to the first measured instance of that target.
638
Objective: Activate bundle adjustment for target alignment.
Required: A project with multiple device positions aligned using targets.
Steps
1. Choose Tools > Options to access the

PolyWorks|Inspector options.
The PolyWorks|Inspector Options dialog box
opens.
2. Open the Device Positions options page.

3. Select Bundle adjustment.
4. Click Apply.
5. Close the PolyWorks|Inspector Options dialog

box.
Results
The alignment is updated, and the error for all targets is recalculated based on the new
effective target location.
Notes
Accuracy models are used to determine the most probable location for each target. It is
therefore important to set the proper accuracy model for each device position according to
the device used. The default accuracy model can be set from the Device Positions page in the
PolyWorks|Inspector options. Alternatively, a specific accuracy model can be set for each
device position in the Device positions tab of the Device Positions and Targets pane. Two
bundle adjustment accuracy models are available:
639
Uniform accuracy model

Digitizing arms have small measurement volumes and, as such, have fairly consistent
accuracy throughout that volume. For digitizing arms, the Uniform accuracy model is used.
Range and angle accuracy model

Laser trackers have large measurement volumes, and the point positional certainty varies
throughout that volume based on the distance and angle from the tracker. Therefore, for laser
trackers, the Range and angle accuracy model is used.
Device position uncertainty

When physically predetermining a set of target locations that can be measured from several
device positions, users can, by inadvertence or inexperience, set up their alignment targets in
ways that systematically produce unstable alignment solutions. It is possible to detect these
unreliable target setups by evaluating device position uncertainties. Here are some of the
most common problematic target setups:
• The alignment targets of a device position are

nearly collinear.
• The horizontal angular span of the alignment

targets of a device position is small.
640
• The measurement device is moved along one

direction, and a new device position is aligned
by only using targets measured by the closest
previous device position, producing daisy-
chained device positions.
Objective: Measure the uncertainty of a device position.
Required: A project with two or more device positions. Bundle adjustment must be enabled.
Steps
1. Choose Tools > Device Positions > Manage

Positions and Targets. The Device Positions
and Targets pane opens.
2. Select the Device positions tab at the
bottom of the pane.
3. Click Evaluate Position Uncertainty.

The Device Positions options page offers
parameters related to uncertainty
computation.
641
Results
The uncertainty of the unlocked positions is calculated and shown in the Device Positions and
Targets pane along with a pass/fail test.
Notes
• When targets are added or removed, the uncertainty values are considered out-of-date
and are removed. The uncertainty tool must be relaunched to update the uncertainty
values.
• It is possible to modify the tolerance for the device position uncertainty on the Device
Position page of the PolyWorks|Inspector options.
642
The basic acquisition workflow with multiple device

positions using surface information
For this workflow, the part is digitized and the scanned surfaces are used for alignment, which
involves relying on the overlap between the objects to align.
Position 1
Scan the part

In position 1, scan the area of the part
that is accessible.
Move device
physically move the device or the part.
Position 2
Scan the part

In position 2, scan the area of the part
that is accessible to capture surface
data that overlaps with previous
scans.
Align scan with previous

scans
Based on the surface information, use
a Best-Fit Data to Data objects
alignment to align the scanned data;
overlapping data is required.
Move device
physically move the device or the part.
643
Position n
Repeat the process
Repeat this process for as many
positions as needed to acquire the
required data.
Last position
Scan the part and align with
previous scans
In the last position, scan the part
capturing surface data that overlaps
with previous scans. Based on the
surface information, use a Best-Fit
Data to Data objects alignment to align
the scanned data where overlapping
data is available.
Globally optimize alignments

Use this alignment when three or
more Data objects, from different
device positions, were scanned and
are closely aligned.
644
Moving the device or the part using a custom alignment

When scanning a part, it is sometimes impossible to capture all of
the surfaces without moving the scanning device, or changing the
part position relative to the scanning device. This generates one
surface Data object for each different setup used. If the device
positions are not already aligned, it is possible to align these
surface Data objects to one another. The alignment uses the areas
that overlap with neighboring polygonal Data objects. First a pre-
alignment is done by the user by picking matching points, and
then a best-fit alignment is performed using the surface shape in the overlying regions.
Objective: Scan the part into different device positions.
Required: A scanning device is available and ready to use. The required plug-ins are loaded.
Steps
1. In position 1, scan the areas of the part that are

accessible.
Position 1 can be aligned to a Reference object.
2. Move the device or part, and define a new

device position – position 2 – by choosing Tools >
Device Positions > Move Device.
The Move Device dialog box opens.
3. In the Alignment method list, select Custom.
4. Click OK.
5. Continue scanning the part in the new position.
645
Results
New scanned Data objects are created in the

Tree View for each device positions.
Next step
Once all the part has been digitized, align the polygonal Data objects using a Best-fit Data to
Data objects.
646
Unifying polygonal Data objects

When data is acquired using multiple device positions, one polygonal Data object per device
position is typically created. Before inspecting the part, it is recommended to unify the
polygonal Data objects into only one Data object.
Objective: Unify polygonal Data objects into one object.
Required: Polygonal Data objects acquired using different device positions that are already
aligned to each other.
Steps
1. Select the polygonal Data objects in the Tree

View.
2. Choose Tools > Data Objects > Create Polygonal

Models.
The Create Polygonal Data Objects dialog box
opens.
3. Specify a Name.
4. In the Method list, select From Data Objects.
5. Under Source data objects, select the Data
objects that will be unified.
When the objects are selected in the Tree View,
their check box is automatically selected.
6. In the Meshing method list, select Quality
Meshing.
647
7. Specify how the Meshing parameters are to

be obtained (From source objects is
recommended). If Custom is selected, the
following parameters must be specified:
• Sampling step: Determines the average
distance between vertices. The smaller the
step, the finer the details are in the resulting
polygonal Data object. It is recommended to
use the same step as the one used when
scanning.
• Max edge length: Sets the maximum size for
any triangle edge. A good approximation is
ten times the sampling step, but always keep
it smaller than the finest details on the
polygonal Data object. Otherwise, details will
lose definition.
8. Click Create.
Results
A new polygonal Data object is created and The new polygonal Data object is displayed
added to the Data branch of the Tree View. The in the 3D scene.
source objects are moved into a group. The
new polygonal Data object is dependent on the
source objects it was created from. If any of the
source objects are modified, this new Data
object is updated.
648
Using the Offline
Simulation mode
Introducing the Offline Simulation mode

The Offline Simulation mode allows users to perform simulated data acquisition without
using a physical device. Simulated data is provided for all scanning and probing operations. As
a result, an entire inspection project, including data color maps, device positions,
measurement sequences, and formatted reports, can be prepared. Once the inspection
project is complete, it can be used with an actual device to play the inspection, acquire the
data, and measure the part.
Activating/deactivating the Offline Simulation mode

To create inspection projects offline using simulated data, the Offline Simulation mode must
first be activated.
1. On the Devices toolbar, click the Activate

Offline Simulation button.
The Simulated Data watermark is displayed at

the bottom of the 3D scene as a reminder that
simulated data is being used in the project.
The inspection can be performed using:
• simulated scanned data (see The workflow
when performing an inspection using
simulated scanned data on page 651)
• simulated probed data (see The workflow
when performing an inspection using
simulated probed data on page 656)
Note that the watermark is displayed as long
as the Offline Simulation mode is activated and
the project contains simulated data.
2. To deactivate the Offline Simulation mode,

press the same button on the Devices toolbar,
now named Deactivate Offline Simulation.
650
The workflow when performing an inspection

using simulated scanned data
The workflow for an inspection using a scanning device and the Offline Simulation mode is
illustrated below:
Import
Reference object
Activate the Offline

Simulation mode
Acquire
Data object
Align
Data object
to Reference object
Measure
dimensions and deviations
Deactivate the Offline

Simulation mode
Report
measurement results
Create nominal project

and share
651

(typically a CAD model) into the inspection
project.
Activate the Offline Simulation mode

Click the button on the Devices toolbar to
activate the Offline Simulation mode.
Specify the scanning plug-in

In the scanning plug-in list, select the required
plug-in for your scanning device.
Acquire Data object

Acquire simulated scanned data, based on the
Reference object.
Align Data object to Reference object
Alignment
Align the Data object to the Reference object
using a best-fit alignment.
Refine alignment
Refine the alignment of the Data object to the
Reference object using one of the many
alignment techniques once the required objects
are available.
652
Measure dimensions and deviations

Create the objects required to perform the
inspection of the part.
Set the required dimensional and GD&T
controls, if applicable.
Measure the different objects using simulated
scanned data.
Deactivate the Offline Simulation

mode
deactivate the Offline Simulation mode.

using:
• Tables and snapshots in formatted reports.
Create nominal project and share

Save the inspection project

The creation of the nominal project removes all
measurements and saves the project under a
new name.
The project is now ready to be used to play the

inspection.
653
Particularities when acquiring simulated scanned data

Before using a scanning device to acquire simulated scanned data, make sure that the
following requirements have been met:
• The project contains a Reference object.

• The Offline Simulation mode is enabled.
• The scanning plug-in has been selected and the connection to the device has been
established.
• An alignment to the Reference object has been previously simulated.
Scanning options
If required, set options for the acquisition of simulated scanned data. The goal is to have data
dense enough so that the extraction of measurement objects is successful. Note that these
options are not applicable when scanned data is acquired with an actual scanning device.
1. Click the Scan button.

For information on the parameters offered for

scanning, see Acquiring surface and boundary
Data objects on page 82.

3. If required, click Options to set the options
specific to the device.
The Line Scan Options dialog box opens.

4. On the Offline Simulation page, set the
required parameters.
This page contains the default parameters
used to configure the acquired simulated
scanned data.
654
• Line-to-line distance: Controls the distance

between consecutive scan lines.
• Point-to-point distance: Controls the
distance between two neighboring points on
the same scan line.
• Noise: Introduces noise into the simulated
scanned data based on a tolerance.
• Scan nominal primitives for measured
primitive extraction: Additional data is
simulated for features in the Tree View for
which the measurement method is set to
Extract or Undefined. This ensures that
feature extraction is done successfully.
655
The workflow when performing an inspection

using simulated probed data
The workflow for an inspection using a probing device and the Offline Simulation mode is
illustrated below:
Import
Reference object
Activate the Offline

Simulation mode
Align part
to Reference object
Measure
dimensions and deviations
Deactivate the Offline

Simulation mode
Report
measurement results

and share
656


activate the Offline Simulation mode.
Specify the probing plug-in

In the probing plug-in list, select the required
plug-in for your probing device.
Connect to the probing device

Connect to the probing device to simulate the
connection.
Align part to Reference object
Alignment
Simulate the alignment of the part to the
Reference object using a Surface Points
alignment.
Refine the alignment

Refine the alignment of the part to the CAD
model using one of the many alignment
techniques once the required objects are
available.
657
Measure dimensions and deviations

Create the necessary objects in order to
perform the inspection of the part.
Set the required dimensional and GD&T
controls, if applicable.
Then, specify the Probe method, set the related
probing parameters, and measure the different
objects using simulated probed data.
Deactivate the Offline Simulation mode

Disconnect from the probing plug-in
disconnect from the probing plug-in.
Deactivate the Offline Simulation mode

deactivate the Offline Simulation mode.

Report the measurement results based on the
probed data through:
• Tables and snapshots in formatted reports.
Create nominal project and share

Save the inspection project

The creation of the nominal project removes all
measurements and saves the project under a
new name.
The project is now ready to be used to play the

inspection.
658
Simulating multiple device positions

The Offline Simulation mode can be used to simulate probing targets in different device
positions. Four targets are automatically generated and probed, and they are listed in the
Device Positions and Targets pane.
However, when measuring the actual part, any number of targets can be created for each
device position as long as there is a minimum of three targets per position that are
measurable in the next device position.
For more information on multiple device positions, see Working with multiple device positions
on page 633.
659
Creating a nominal project

Once the inspection project containing simulated data is completed, the simulated data must
be removed before sharing it with operators. This can be done by creating a nominal project.
The project can then be used to start measuring the different pieces of a part.
Objective: Create a nominal project ready for use with a measurement device.
Required: A completed inspection project made with simulated data.
Steps
1. Make sure that the Offline Simulation mode is

deactivated.
2. Choose File > Create Nominal Project.
The Create Nominal Project dialog box opens.
3. Click Create.
A browser opens.
4. Specify a file name and location.

5. Click Save.
The project is ready to use. All measurements

are deleted.
6. Connect to the measurement device.

7. Choose Tools > Piece > Play Inspection.
Results
The Play inspection is launched, guiding the

user through the steps necessary to measure
the measurement objects.
660
Appendix
APPENDIX
Automatic project update

By default, PolyWorks|Inspector projects are always automatically up to date. This means that
measurement objects, alignments, data color maps, report items and formatted reports are
automatically recalculated as necessary.
The icon of the Automatic project update status, located

at the right end section of the status bar, indicates
whether the automatic project update is activated or not.
If needed, the Automatic project update can be

activated/deactivated by clicking the arrow to the right of
the icon and selecting the Automatic project update
command. When activated, the command is preceded by
a check mark.
Troubleshooting the automatic project update

The update status of objects in the Tree View is
constantly monitored by the Automatic project
update function. In some cases, object updates
cannot be performed, such as when the
measurement parameters of an object do not allow
its remeasurement or when an object is linked to an
object that no longer exists. In these cases, a yellow
warning triangle is superimposed on the Automatic
project update icon on the status bar and a
notification is shown.
Choose Tools > Troubleshoot Project Update to display a dialog box that lists the objects in error
and a message for each.
662
APPENDIX
The following update status icons can be displayed on the object icon in the Tree View:
A red x mark indicates that the object is in error.
A yellow warning triangle indicates that the object could not be updated.
An anchor symbol indicates that the object is nonupdatable or rendered as such.
A clock icon indicates that the object is out-of-date. An object can have an out-of-date
status only when the Automatic project update is deactivated.
Moving the mouse pointer over the object

displays a tooltip with the details.
Operations that trigger an automatic project update

Common operations that trigger the automatic project update include:
• Modifying a Data or Reference object by replacing the object or by deleting elements.

• Changing the active alignment.
• Opening a formatted report.
663
APPENDIX
Setting and saving the user configuration

The PolyWorks Metrology Suite has a default standard configuration for the Workspace
Manager and each module. The standard configuration holds information about window sizes
and positions, display modes, selection modes, dialog box parameters, templates
(annotations, controls, and tables), and various module options like units and Options panel
settings.
A user configuration also exists, which augments the standard configuration. As a user works
in the software, any changes to these settings and parameters can be saved in the user
configuration.
On the computer, the user configuration files are found in a folder

named .innovmetric.[version].
Each user can have their own personal user

configuration. The location of the user
configuration directory, by default within the
\User directory, is shown in the Workspace
Manager Options dialog box.
Changes to the parameters and settings in the user configuration can be saved by choosing
Tools > Save User Configuration in any module. The saved settings become the default the next
time the module is launched. In the Workspace Manager, the current user configuration for all
modules can be exported by choosing Tools > User Configuration > Export. Likewise, an external
user configuration can be loaded by choosing Tools > User Configuration > Load.
664
APPENDIX
Saving a compressed copy of a project

When only one specific inspection project needs to be shared or exported, it is possible to
create a compressed copy of this project directly from an open PolyWorks|Inspector project.
When opening this compressed file in the PolyWorks Metrology Suite, or in the free
PolyWorks|Reviewer™, a new workspace is automatically created.
Objective: Share inspection results by saving a compressed copy of an inspection project.
Required: A completed, open inspection project.
Steps
1. To create a compressed copy of the project,

choose File > Save Compressed Copy.
2. In the message window that is displayed, click

OK.
The PolyWorks|Inspector project is saved and
closed.
3. Browse for the location to save the file and click

Save.
Results
A copy of the project is saved to a new

workspace that is compressed and then
saved at the specified location as a .pwzip
file. It can be opened with the PolyWorks
Metrology Suite or the PolyWorks|Reviewer.
Notes
From the Workspace Manager, it is also possible to create a compressed copy of one or more
PolyWorks|Inspector projects. Simply open the workspace, select the projects, and choose File
> Export > Objects to Compressed Workspace.
665
APPENDIX
PolyWorks keyboard shortcuts
General interfaces
Select objects mode CTRL+SHIFT+SPACEBAR

Switch to local split view CTRL+SPACEBAR
mode
Quit interactive modes ESC
Cancel macro script ESC
Next step in wizard TAB
File >
Open project CTRL+O
Save project CTRL+S
Edit >
Undo CTRL+Z
Redo CTRL+Y
Undo transformation CTRL+SHIFT+Z
Duplicate objects (E, I) CTRL+U
Ignore objects CTRL+SHIFT+E
Use objects CTRL+SHIFT+U
Delete >
Objects SHIFT+DEL
Elements DEL
Select >
Elements > Objects >
All CTRL+A All CTRL+SHIFT+A
Invert CTRL+I Invert CTRL+SHIFT+I
None CTRL+N None CTRL+SHIFT+N
Interactively SPACEBAR
666
APPENDIX
View >
Normal View (E,I) SHIFT+F9 Hide >
Center> Objects CTRL+SHIFT+D
All Objects CTRL+C Elements CTRL+D
Objects CTRL+SHIFT+C Restore >
Standard Views > Objects CTRL+SHIFT+R
+X SHIFT+F1 Elements CTRL+R
-X SHIFT+F2 Keep>
+Y SHIFT+F3 Objects CTRL+SHIFT+K
-Y SHIFT+F4 Elements CTRL+K
+Z SHIFT+F5
-Z SHIFT+F6
Rotate 90° around SHIFT+right-
View click
To display the color map CTRL+T
Object Display Options
Static display > Dynamic display >

Flat CTRL+F Flat CTRL+SHIFT+F
Flat + Wireframe CTRL+L Flat + Wireframe CTRL+SHIFT+L
(E, I) (E,I)
Point CTRL+P Point CTRL+SHIFT+P
Smooth CTRL+G Smooth CTRL+SHIFT+G
Wireframe CTRL+W Wireframe CTRL+SHIFT+W
Bounding box CTRL+SHIFT+B
Specific interfaces
Edit >
Lock Images CTRL+SHIFT+L
Unlock Images CTRL+SHIFT+O
Align >
Start Best-Fit alignment CTRL+F2
Stop Best-fit alignment CTRL+F3
Point Pairs CTRL+F5
667
APPENDIX
Display menu on objects and annotations Right-click

Position annotations ALT + left-click
Select > Data Points > Measured Data Points CTRL+M
Select > Data Points > Measured Data Points CTRL+B

of Local Planes
Tools > Reference Objects > Correct Inverted CTRL+Q

CAD Surfaces
668
Getting help
Users can access help resources both within the software interface and externally. Resources
include reference guides, illustrated tips, video tutorials, and webinars.
Getting help through the software interface
Reference Guides
PDF documents located on the Help menu of the Workspace Manager and of
each module. The reference guides define all of the functionalities of the
PolyWorks Metrology Suite.
Question mark
Found on the title bar of displayed dialog boxes. Clicking the question mark
icon opens the appropriate reference guide at the section documenting the
active dialog box.
F1
Pressing F1 opens either the appropriate reference guide at the section
documenting the active dialog box, or, if in an interactive mode, opens the
Interactive Mode Wizard.
Interactive mode wizard

Enable the wizard in the Tools > Options
window, on the General page. The wizard
gives detailed information on interactive
modes (the modes where clicking in the
3D scene is required).
How to button
A button, found in some dialog boxes, that
displays a diagram showing the mouse clicks
or the steps required to perform an
operation.
Intermediate Release Notes

A PolyWorks Metrology Suite intermediate release is produced approximately
once a month. These releases contain new tools along with bug fixes. The
“Release Notes” document gives the details of the intermediate release and is
available through Help > Whats New > Intermediate Release Notes.
669
Getting help outside of the software interface
The website
The InnovMetric website (www.innovmetric.com) offers technical webinars (Support >
Webinars page), which introduce new major functionalities and demonstrate the use and
benefits of existing PolyWorks tools.
The Technical Support Zone (TSZ)

The secure Technical Support Zone offers PolyWorks users 24/7 online access to:
Software Releases:
This is where you will find the downloadable versions of the PolyWorks Metrology Suite
and intermediate release notes.
Knowledge Base:
This section provides videos and tutorials to help you get the most out of PolyWorks:
• The Video Learning Center offers workflow-oriented videos to help you learn the basic
capabilities of PolyWorks.
• The Tutorials section contains tips & tricks.
Macro Zone:
The PolyWorks Metrology Suite offers the possibility of creating macro scripts to automate
repetitive tasks or generate a personal set of tools to save time and perform tasks in a
predefined, controlled manner. In the Macro Zone, you will find a variety of useful macro
scripts developed by our Technical Support team.
Data Exchange:
This section is dedicated to your troubleshooting purposes and allows you and a
PolyWorks expert to confidentially exchange data for review.
For direct assistance

Contact the Technical Support team of your PolyWorks provider.
670

Polyworks Scanning Package

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Polyworks Scanning Package

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Polyworks Scanning Package

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

©2014-2018 InnovMetric Software Inc. All rights reserved.

PolyWorks® is a registered trademark

Essentials for PolyWorks|Inspector Premium Package

Essentials – PolyWorks|Inspector™ Premium Package

PolyWorks® Metrology Suite 2018

ACQUIRING DATA OBJECTS

ALIGNING DATA OBJECTS TO REFERENCE OBJECTS

MEASURING DIMENSIONS AND DEVIATIONS

Data color maps

REPORTING MEASUREMENT RESULTS

INSPECTING MULTIPLE PIECES

WORKING WITH MULTIPLE DEVICE POSITIONS

USING THE OFFLINE SIMULATION MODE

PolyWorks|Inspector Premium Package

Introducing the Essentials

Navigation through the sections

1. Choose Align > Feature-Based > Plane, Axis,

Objective and Required:

• Steps: Present the steps to follow for each tool.

Graphical user interface elements:

Introducing the Workspace Manager

• Adding software license keys.

Adding license keys

Introducing the workspace format

Here is a view of a workspace in the When a workspace is saved, it creates one

Starting the PolyWorks Metrology Suite modules

This module is a software tool that allows performing data alignments to

This module offers a comprehensive set of advanced editing tools for

This module allows viewing inspection projects and polygonal models.

This module allows automatically merging a set of aligned 3D scans of an

Setting essential project options

Required: The Workspace Manager is open.

To set project options, choose Tools > Options.

On the Plug-ins page:

On the Talisman page:

The inspection workflow

Understanding the workflow

Import Reference object

Acquire Data object

Align Data object to Reference

Measure dimensions and

Report measurement results

The probing workflow with a CAD model

Understanding the workflow

Import Reference object

Align part to Reference object

Prealign part to Reference object

Refine part alignment to Reference

Measure dimensions and

Report measurement results

The probing workflow without a CAD model

Understanding the workflow

Acquire part data by probing

Create coordinate systems

Measure dimensions and

Report measurement results

The graphical user interface

1 Menu bar: Access to all PolyWorks|Inspector functionalities.

7 3D Scene: 3D rendering window where objects are displayed.

Provides information and allows changing units, layers, and the

Essentials for PolyWorks|Inspector Premium Package